2017 Nissan Juke | Owner's Manual And Maintenance Information USA

User Manual: 2017-juke

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 416

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

2017

JUKE

OWNER’S MANUAL
and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

Foreword
Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN
owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with
confidence. It was produced using the latest
techniques and strict quality control.
This manual was prepared to help you understand the operation and maintenance of your
vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles of
driving pleasure. Please read through this
manual before operating your vehicle.
A separate Warranty Information Booklet
explains details about the warranties covering your vehicle. Additionally, a separate
Customer Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S.
only) will explain how to resolve any
concerns you may have with your vehicle,
as well as clarify your rights under your
state’s lemon law.
In addition to factory installed options, your
vehicle may also be equipped with additional
accessories installed by NISSAN or by your
NISSAN dealer prior to delivery. It is important
that you familiarize yourself with all disclosures,
warnings, cautions and instructions concerning
proper use of such accessories prior to operating the vehicle and/or accessory. It is recommended you see a NISSAN dealer for details
concerning the particular accessories with
which your vehicle is equipped.
Your NISSAN dealer knows your vehicle best.

When you require any service or have any
questions, we will be glad to assist you with the
extensive resources available to us.

READ FIRST — THEN DRIVE SAFELY
Before driving your vehicle, read your Owner’s
Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity with
controls and maintenance requirements, assisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle.

WARNING
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION
REMINDERS!
Follow these important driving rules to
help ensure a safe and comfortable trip
for you and your passengers!
.

NEVER drive under the influence of
alcohol or drugs.

ALWAYS observe posted speed limits and never drive too fast for
conditions.

ALWAYS give your full attention to
driving and avoid using vehicle
features or taking other actions that
could distract you.

ALWAYS use your seat belts and
appropriate child restraint systems.

Pre-teen children should be seated
in the rear seat.
.

ALWAYS provide information about
the proper use of vehicle safety
features to all occupants of the
vehicle.

ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual for important safety information.

On-pavement and off-road driving
This vehicle will handle and maneuver
differently from an ordinary passenger
car because it has a higher center of
gravity. As with other vehicles with features of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of
control or an accident. Be sure to read
“Avoiding collision and rollover” and
“Driving safety precautions” in the “5.
Starting and driving” section of this
manual.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification could affect its performance,
safety or durability, and may even violate
governmental regulations. In addition,
damage or performance problems resulting from modification may not be covered
under NISSAN warranties.

WARNING
Installing an aftermarket On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) plug-in device that uses
the port during normal driving, for
example remote insurance company
monitoring, remote vehicle diagnostics,
telematics or engine reprogramming,
may cause interference or damage to
vehicle systems. We do not recommend
or endorse the use of any aftermarket
OBD plug-in devices, unless specifically
approved by NISSAN. The vehicle warranty may not cover damage caused by
any aftermarket plug-in device.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

in this Owner’s Manual for contact information.

This manual includes information for all
features and equipment available on this
model. Features and equipment in your
vehicle may vary depending on model, trim
level, options selected, order, date of
production, region or availability. Therefore, you may find information about
features or equipment that are not included or installed on your vehicle.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT
THIS MANUAL

All information, specifications and illustrations in
this manual are those in effect at the time of
printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change
specifications, performance, design or component suppliers without notice and without
obligation. From time to time, NISSAN may
update or revise this manual to provide Owners
with the most accurate information currently
available. Please carefully read and retain with
this manual all revision updates sent to you by
NISSAN to ensure you have access to accurate
and up-to-date information regarding your vehicle. Current versions of vehicle Owner’s
Manuals and any updates can also be found in
the Owner section of the NISSAN website at
https://owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/navigation/manualsGuide. If you have questions concerning any information in your Owner’s Manual,
contact NISSAN Consumer Affairs. See the
NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM page

You will see various symbols in this manual. They
are used in the following ways:

WARNING
This is used to indicate the presence of
a hazard that could cause death or
serious personal injury. To avoid or
reduce the risk, the procedures must
be followed precisely.

CAUTION
This is used to indicate the presence of
a hazard that could cause minor or
moderate personal injury or damage to
your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk,
the procedures must be followed carefully.

above call attention to an item in the illustration.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING

WARNING

SIC0697

If you see the symbol above, it means “Do not
do this” or “Do not let this happen”.

If you see a symbol similar to those above in an
illustration, it means the arrow points to the front
of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to those
above indicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to those

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components
contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive
harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products
of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects
or other reproductive harm.

CANADA’S PRODUCTS CONTAINING
MERCURY REGULATIONS
The xenon headlights (if so equipped) on
your vehicle contain mercury. If these
parts require disposal, the repair facility
vehicle dismantler or recycler should
make sure they are recycled or disposed
of as hazardous waste in accordance
with applicable laws. For information on
safe handling procedures, disposal and
recycling options in accordance with
Canada’s Products Containing Mercury
Regulations, go to http://www.ec.gc.ca/
mercure-mercury/.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVISORY
Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batteries, may contain perchlorate material.
The following advisory is provided: “Perchlorate Material - special handling may
apply, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”
Bluetooth is a trademark owned
by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and
licensed to Visteon Corporation
and Robert Bosch GmbH.
SiriusXM services require a
subscription after trial period
and are sold separately or as a
package. The satellite service is
available only in the 48 contiguous USA and DC. SiriusXM
satellite service is also available
in Canada: see www.siriusxm.ca.

C 2016 NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD.
*

All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s
Manual may be reproduced or stored in a
retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or
by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the
prior written permission of Nissan Motor Co.,
Ltd.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE
PROGRAM
NISSAN CARES ...
Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are
our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.
However, if there is something that your
NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or you
would like to provide NISSAN directly with
comments or questions, please contact the
NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department using
our toll-free number:
For U.S. customers
1-800-NISSAN-1
(1-800-647-7261)
For Canadian customers
1-800-387-0122
The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for
the following information:
.
.
.
.
.
.
OR

Your name, address, and telephone number
Vehicle identification number (attached to
the top of the instrument panel on the
driver’s side)
Date of purchase
Current odometer reading
Your NISSAN dealer’s name
Your comments or questions

You can write to NISSAN with the information at:
For U.S. customers
Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
or via e-mail at:
nnaconsumeraffairs@nissan-usa.com
For Canadian customers
Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5
or via e-mail at:
information.centre@nissancanada.
com

If you prefer, visit us at:
www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or
www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)
We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and
thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

Table of
Contents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Do-it-yourself

Maintenance and schedules

Technical and consumer information

Index

0 Illustrated table of contents
Seats, seat belts and Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) ............................................................................
Exterior front ...............................................................................
Exterior rear ................................................................................
Exterior (NISMO models) ........................................................
Passenger compartment .........................................................

0-2
0-3
0-4
0-5
0-6

Cockpit ........................................................................................ 0-7
Instrument panel ....................................................................... 0-8
Meters and gauges .................................................................. 0-9
Engine compartment ............................................................ 0-11
MR16DDT engine .......................................................... 0-11
Warning and indicator lights .............................................. 0-12

SEATS, SEAT BELTS AND
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM (SRS)
10.
11.
12.

13.
*:

JVC0533X

1.
2.
3.
4.

0-2

Rear head restraints (Page 1-5)
Child restraint anchor points (for top tether strap
child restraint) (P.1-30, P.1-34)
Front head restraints (P.1-5)
— Front-seat Active Head Restraints* (P.1-9)
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover
supplemental air bags (P.1-38)

Illustrated table of contents

5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Seat belts (P.1-10)
Front seats (P.1-3)
Supplemental front-impact air bags (P.1-38)
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system (P.1-20)
Rear seats (P.1-4)
— Child restraints (P.1-18)

Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental
air bags (P.1-38)
Seat belt with pretensioners (P.1-52)
Occupant classification sensors (weight sensors)
— Advanced Air Bag System (P.1-44)
Front passenger air bag status light (P.1-46)
if so equipped

EXTERIOR FRONT
7.

8.
9.
10.

11.

12.

13.
14.

JVC0977X

1.
2.

Hood (P.3-15)
Windshield wiper and washer
— Switch operation (P.2-36)
— Blade replacement (P.8-15)
— Window washer fluid (P.8-9)

4.
5.
6.

Side turn signal lights
— Switch operation (P.2-43)
— Bulb replacement (P.8-26)
Front view camera* (P.4-13)
License plate installation (P.10-13)
Fog lights*
— Switch operation (P.2-44)
— Bulb replacement (P.8-26)
Headlights
— Switch operation (P.2-39)
— Bulb replacement (P.8-23)
Tires
— Wheels and tires (P.8-28, P.10-9)
— Flat tire (P.6-3)
— Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
(P.2-18, P.5-3)
Side view camera* (P.4-13)
Doors
— Keys (P.3-2)
— Door locks (P.3-4)
— Intelligent Key system (P.3-6)
— Security system (P.2-33)
if so equipped

Parking lights, turn signal lights and front side
marker lights
— Switch operation (P.2-39)
— Bulb replacement (P.8-26)
Moonroof* (P.2-52)
Power windows (P.2-50)
Outside mirrors (P.3-22)

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

EXTERIOR REAR
7.

8.
9.
*:

JVC0745X

1.
2.

0-4

Liftgate (P.3-16)
— Intelligent Key system (P.3-6)
Rear window wiper and washer
— Switch operation (P.2-37)
— Window washer fluid (P.8-9)
High-mounted stop light (P.8-23)

Illustrated table of contents

4.
5.
6.

Antenna (P.4-75)
— Satellite radio antenna* (P.4-35)
Rear window defroster (P.2-38)
Fuel-filler door
— Operation (P.3-18)
— Fuel information (P.10-4)

Rear view camera
— RearView Monitor* (P.4-8)
— Around View Monitor* (P.4-13)
Rear combination lights
— Bulb replacement (P.8-26)
Child safety rear door lock (P.3-6)
if so equipped

EXTERIOR (NISMO models)
For NISMO models, the vehicle parts listed
below require special care or caution for
cleaning. Refer to the additional information in
each section.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Front bumper (P.3-17)
Daytime running light (P.2-42, P.3-17, P.8-23,
P.8-26)
Side sill extensions (P.3-17)
Rear spoiler (P.3-17, P.7-3)

JVC0978X

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

JVC0184X

2.
3.
4.
5.

0-6

Cargo area
— Cargo cover* (P.2-49)
— Cargo light (P.2-55, P.8-23)
Coat hook (P.2-48)
Sun visors (P.3-21)
Microphone (P.4-80, P.4-89)
Moonroof switch* (P.2-52)

Illustrated table of contents

6.
7.
8.

Room light and map lights (P.2-54)
Inside rearview mirror (P.3-21)
Door armrest
— Power window switch (P.2-50)
— Power door lock switch (P.3-5)
if so equipped

COCKPIT
6.

7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

12.
13.
*:

Shift lever
— Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
(P.5-14)
— Manual Transmission (MT) (P.5-19)
Fuse box cover (P.8-19)
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch
(P.5-37)
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) switch* (P.5-29)
Tilting steering wheel lever (P.3-20)
Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side)
— Audio control (P.4-73)
— Siri Eyes Free (P.4-76)
— Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System control (P.4-80, P.4-89)
— NISSAN Voice Recognition System (with
navigation system)* (P.4-96)
Steering-wheel-mounted controls (right side)
— Cruise control switches (P.5-26)
Heated seat switch* (P.2-45)
if so equipped

JVC0725X

1.
2.

Outside mirror remote control switch (P.3-22)
Headlight, fog light and turn signal switch
— Headlight (P.2-40)
— Turn signal light (P.2-43)
— Fog light* (P.2-44)
Paddle shifter* (P.5-16)

Steering wheel
— Electric power steering (P.5-34)
— Horn (P.2-44)
— Driver’s supplemental air bag (P.1-38)
Wiper and washer switch (P.2-36)

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

INSTRUMENT PANEL
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
*:
**:

JVC0607X

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

0-8

Meters and gauges (P.2-5)
Center ventilator (P.4-27)
Audio system* or Navigation system** (P.4-35)
Hazard warning flasher switch (P.6-2)
Integrated Control System* (P.2-24)
— Drive mode (P.5-22)
— Heater and air conditioner control (P.4-28)

Illustrated table of contents

6.
7.
8.

— Defroster switch (P.2-38)
Heater and air conditioner control (models
without Integrated Control System) (P.4-28)
— Defroster switch (P.2-38)
Front passenger supplemental air bag (P.1-38)
Side ventilator (P.4-27)
Fuel-filler door release handle (P.3-18)

Hood release handle (P.3-15)
Push-button ignition switch (P.5-9)
Auxiliary input jack/USB connection port*
(P.4-38)
Parking brake (P.5-25)
Cup holder (P.2-47)
Power outlet (P.2-46)
Glove box (P.2-48)
if so equipped
Refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

METERS AND GAUGES
8.
*:

RESET switch for trip odometer (P.2-7)/Trip
computer mode switch (P.2-13)
if so equipped

JVC0850X
Type A (if so equipped)

1.
2.

Tachometer (P.2-9)
Vehicle information display (P.2-11)
— Odometer/twin trip odometer (P.2-7)
— Trip computer (P.2-13)
— Torque vectoring AWD (AWD model)
(P.2-14)
— Outside air temperature (P.2-12)

3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Fuel gauge (P.2-11)
Speedometer (P.2-7)
Warning/indicator lights (P.2-15)
Instrument brightness control knob (P.2-43)
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) position indicator* (P.2-12)

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

9.
*:

SIC4601
Type B (if so equipped)

1.
2.
3.

Tachometer (P.2-9)
Engine coolant temperature gauge (P.2-10)
Vehicle information display (P.2-11)
— Odometer/twin trip odometer (P.2-7)
— Trip computer (P.2-13)
— Torque vectoring AWD (AWD model)
(P.2-14)

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

— Outside air temperature (P.2-12)
Fuel gauge (P.2-11)
Speedometer (P.2-7)
Warning/indicator lights (P.2-15)
Instrument brightness control knob (P.2-43)
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) position indicator* (P.2-12)

RESET switch for trip odometer (P.2-7)/Trip
computer mode switch (P.2-13)
if so equipped

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

JVC0747X

MR16DDT ENGINE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Engine oil filler cap (P.8-5)
Radiator filler cap (P.8-5)
— Vehicle overheat (P.6-11)
Brake and clutch* fluid reservoir (P.8-9)
Air cleaner (P.8-14)
Window washer fluid reservoir (P.8-9)

6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
*:

Engine drive belt location (P.8-12)
Engine oil dipstick (P.8-5)
Engine coolant reservoir (P.8-5)
Fuse/fusible link holder (P.8-17)
Battery (P.8-10)
— Jump starting (P.6-9)
for Manual Transmission (MT) models

Illustrated table of contents 0-11

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
Warning
light

Name

Page

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) warning
light (yellow) (AWD model)

2-16

Anti-lock Braking System
(ABS) warning light

2-16

Warning
light

Name

Page

Indicator
light

Name

Page

Seat belt warning light

2-20

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) indicator light (green) (AWD model)

2-21

Supplemental air bag warning
light

2-20

All-Wheel Drive (AWD)-V indicator light (green) (AWD model)

2-21

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
warning light

2-21

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) indicator light (if
so equipped)

2-21

Brake warning light

2-16

Cruise indicator light

2-21

2-17

Engine start operation indicator
light

2-21

Charge warning light
Door open warning light

2-17

Exterior light indicator

2-22
2-22

Electric power steering warning
light

2-17

Front fog light indicator light (if
so equipped)

Engine oil pressure warning
light

2-17

Front passenger air bag status
light

2-22

High temperature warning light
(if so equipped)

2-18

High beam indicator light

2-22

Intelligent Key system warning
light

Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)

2-22

2-18

2-23

2-18

Security indicator light

Low fuel warning light

2-18

2-23

Low tire pressure warning light

Turn signal/hazard indicator
lights

Low washer fluid warning light
(if so equipped)

2-20

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
off indicator light

2-23

P position selecting warning
light

2-20

0-12 Illustrated table of contents

1 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental
restraint system
Seats ............................................................................................ 1-2
Front seats ............................................................................ 1-3
Rear seats ............................................................................. 1-4
Head restraints/headrests ....................................................... 1-5
Adjustable head restraint/headrest components ........ 1-6
Non-adjustable head
restraint/headrest components ........................................ 1-7
Remove .................................................................................. 1-7
Install ...................................................................................... 1-7
Adjust ..................................................................................... 1-8
Front-seat Active Head Restraints (if
so equipped) ........................................................................ 1-9
Seat belts ................................................................................. 1-10
Precautions on seat belt usage .................................... 1-10
Pregnant women .............................................................. 1-12
Injured persons ................................................................. 1-12
Three-point type seat belt .............................................. 1-12
Seat belt extenders .......................................................... 1-15
Seat belt maintenance .................................................... 1-15
Child safety .............................................................................. 1-16
Infants .................................................................................. 1-17
Small children .................................................................... 1-17
Larger children .................................................................. 1-17

Child restraints ....................................................................... 1-18
Precautions on child restraints ................................... 1-19
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
System (LATCH) ............................................................ 1-20
Rear-facing child restraint installation
using LATCH ................................................................... 1-23
Rear-facing child restraint installation using the
seat belts .......................................................................... 1-25
Forward-facing child restraint installation
using LATCH ................................................................... 1-28
Forward-facing child restraint installation using the
seat belts .......................................................................... 1-30
Booster seats .................................................................. 1-34
Supplemental restraint system ........................................... 1-38
Precautions on supplemental restraint system ....... 1-38
NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
(front seats) ..................................................................... 1-44
Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental
air bag and roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag systems ..................... 1-51
Seat belts with pretensioners (front seats) ............. 1-52
Supplemental air bag warning labels ....................... 1-54
Supplemental air bag warning light .......................... 1-54
Repair and replacement procedure .......................... 1-55

SEATS

SSS0133

well back and upright in the seat
with both feet on the floor and
adjust the seat properly. See “Precautions on seat belt usage” (P.110).

WARNING
.

1-2

Do not ride in a moving vehicle
when the seatback is reclined. This
can be dangerous. The shoulder belt
will not be against your body. In an
accident, you could be thrown into it
and receive neck or other serious
injuries. You could also slide under
the lap belt and receive serious
internal injuries.
For the most effective protection
when the vehicle is in motion, the
seat should be upright. Always sit

After adjustment, gently rock in the
seat to make sure it is securely
locked.
Do not leave children unattended
inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended children could
become involved in serious accidents.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of
the vehicle and/or its systems, do
not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or
pets unattended in your vehicle.
Additionally, the temperature inside
a closed vehicle on a warm day can
quickly become high enough to
cause a significant risk of injury or
death to people and pets.

The seatback should not be reclined
any more than needed for comfort.
Seat belts are most effective when
the passenger sits well back and
straight up in the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the risk of sliding
under the lap belt and being injured
is increased.

CAUTION
When adjusting the seat positions, be
sure not to contact any moving parts to
avoid possible injuries and/or damage.

FRONT SEATS
Front manual seat adjustment
Forward and backward:
1 up and hold it while you slide
Pull the lever *
the seat forward or backward to the desired
position. Release the lever to lock the seat in
position.

SSS0792
Type A (if so equipped)

JVR0342X
Type B (if so equipped)

Reclining (Type A) (if so equipped):
2 up and
To recline the seatback, pull the lever *
lean back. To bring the seatback forward, pull
the lever up and lean your body forward. Release
the lever to lock the seatback in position.

Reclining (Type B) (if so equipped):
To recline the seatback, turn the adjusting dial
2 toward the rear of the vehicle and lean back.
*
To bring the seatback forward, turn the adjusting
dial toward the front of the vehicle and lean your
body forward.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the
seatback for occupants of different sizes for
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat
belt fit. (See “Precautions on seat belt usage”
(P.1-10).) Also, the seatback can be reclined to
allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is
stopped and the transmission is in the P (Park)
position or N (Neutral) position with the parking
brake fully applied.
NOTE:
. Depending on the passenger’s seat
sliding position when the passenger
seat is unoccupied while driving, a
noise may be heard as the side part
of the passenger’s seat contacts the
seat belt tongue. In this case, move the
seat to the rearmost position to avoid
interference.
. If you are having difficulty turning the
adjusting dial, park the vehicle and
then open the door or get out of the
vehicle to operate the dial.

SSS1129

Seat lifter (for driver’s seat):
Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to
adjust the seat height until the desired position
is achieved.

SSS1142

REAR SEATS
Folding
Before folding the rear seats:
Secure the seat belts on the seat belt hooks on
the side wall. (See “Seat belt hooks” (P.1-15).)
1 .
To fold the seatback, pull the adjusting knob *

To return the seatback to the seating position, lift
up each seatback and push it to the upright
position until it is latched.

1-4

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS

CAUTION
When folding or returning the seatback(s) to the upright position, to avoid
injury to yourself and others:
.

Make sure that the seat path is clear
before moving the seat.

WARNING
.

Do not fold down the rear seats
when occupants are in the rear seat
area or any objects are on the rear
seats.

Never allow anyone to ride in the
cargo area or on the rear seats
when they are in the fold-down
position. Use of these areas by
passengers without proper restraints could result in serious injury
in an accident or sudden stop.

injury.
.

When returning the seatbacks to the
upright position, be certain they are
completely secured in the latched
position. If they are not completely
secured, passengers may be injured
in an accident or sudden stop.

WARNING
Head restraint/headrest supplement
the other vehicle safety systems. They
may provide additional protection
against injury in certain rear end collisions. Adjustable head restraints/headrests must be adjusted properly, as
specified in this section. Check the
adjustment after someone else uses
the seat. Do not attach anything to the
head restraint/headrest stalks or remove the head restraint/headrest. Do
not use the seat if the head restraint/
headrest has been removed. If the head
restraint/headrest was removed, reinstall and properly adjust the head
restraint/headrest before an occupant
uses the seating position. Failure to
follow these instructions can reduce the
effectiveness of the head restraint/
headrest. This may increase the risk of
serious injury or death in a collision.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

.
.

.
JVR0051X

The illustration shows the seating positions
equipped with head restraint/headrest.

The non-adjustable head restraints/headrests have single locking notch to secure
them to the seat frame.
Proper Adjustment:
— For the adjustable type, align the head
restraint/headrest so the center of your
ear is approximately level with the center
of the head restraint/headrest.
— If your ear position is still higher than the
recommended alignment, place the head
restraint/headrest at the highest position.
If the head restraint/headrest has been
removed, ensure that it is reinstalled and
locked in place before riding in that designated seating position.

SSS0992

ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/
HEADREST COMPONENTS

Indicates the seating position is equipped
with a head restraint.

1. Removable head restraint/headrest

Indicates the seating position is equipped
with a headrest.

3. Lock knob

+ Indicates the seating position is not equipped
with a head restraint or headrest.
.
.

1-6

Your vehicle is equipped with a head
restraint/headrest that may be integrated,
adjustable or non-adjustable.
Adjustable head restraints/headrests have
multiple notches along the stalk to lock them
in a desired adjustment position.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

2. Multiple notches
4. Stalks

JVR0203X

NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/HEADREST COMPONENTS
1. Removable head restraint/headrest

SSS1037

REMOVE

INSTALL

Use the following procedure to remove the head
restraint/headrest.

1. Align the head restraint/headrest stalks with
the holes in the seat. Make sure that the
head restraint/headrest is facing the correct
direction. The stalk with the adjustment
1 must be installed in the hole with
notch *
2 .
the lock knob *

3. Lock knob

1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to the
highest position.

4. Stalks

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

2. Single notch

SSS1038

3. Remove the head restraint/headrest from
the seat.
4. Store the head restraint/headrest properly in
a secure place so it is not loose in the
vehicle.

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the
head restraint/headrest down.
3. Properly adjust the head restraint/headrest
before an occupant uses the seating position.

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head
restraint/headrest before an occupant uses
the seating position.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

SSS0997

ADJUST
For adjustable head restraint/headrest
Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the center
is level with the center of your ears. If your ear
position is still higher than the recommended
alignment, place the head restraint/headrest at
the highest position.

1-8

SSS1035

JVR0259X

For non-adjustable head restraint/headrest
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch
before riding in that designated seating position.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Raise
To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it up.
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch
before riding in that designated seating position.

The front head restraints have multiple adjustment notches.
Properly adjust the Active Head Restraints as
described in this section.

SSS1036

Lower
To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push
the head restraint/headrest down.
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch
before riding in that designated seating position.

SSS0508

FRONT-SEAT ACTIVE HEAD RESTRAINTS (if so equipped)
The Active Head Restraint moves forward
utilizing the force that the seatback receives
from the occupant in a rear-end collision. The
movement of the head restraint helps support
the occupant’s head by reducing its backward
movement and helping absorb some of the
forces that may lead to whiplash-type injuries.
Active Head Restraints are effective for collisions at low to medium speeds in which it is said
that whiplash injury occurs most.
Active Head Restraints operate only in certain
rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head
restraints return to their original positions.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

SEAT BELTS
PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT
USAGE
If you are wearing your seat belt properly
adjusted, and you are sitting upright and well
back in your seat with both feet on the floor, your
chances of being injured or killed in an accident
and/or the severity of injury may be greatly
reduced. NISSAN strongly encourages you and
all of your passengers to buckle up every time
you drive, even if your seating position includes a
supplemental air bag.
Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces
or territories specify that seat belts be
worn at all times when a vehicle is being
driven.

SSS0136

SSS0134

1-10 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING
.

Every person who drives or rides in
this vehicle should use a seat belt at
all times. Children should be properly restrained in the rear seat and,
if appropriate, in a child restraint.

The seat belt should be properly
adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to do
so may reduce the effectiveness of
the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of
injury in an accident. Serious injury
or death can occur if the seat belt is
not worn properly.

SSS0016

SSS0014

Always route the shoulder belt over
your shoulder and across your
chest. Never put the belt behind
your back, under your arm or across
your neck. The belt should be away
from your face and neck, but not
falling off your shoulder.
Position the lap belt as low and
snug as possible AROUND THE
HIPS, NOT THE WAIST. A lap belt
worn too high could increase the
risk of internal injuries in an accident.

Be sure the seat belt tongue is
securely fastened to the proper
buckle.

Do not wear the seat belt inside out
or twisted. Doing so may reduce its
effectiveness.

Do not allow more than one person
to use the same seat belt.

Never carry more people in the
vehicle than there are seat belts.

If the seat belt warning light glows
continuously while the ignition is
turned ON with all doors closed and
all seat belts fastened, it may indicate a malfunction in the system.
Have the system checked. It is
recommended you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

No changes should be made to the
seat belt system. For example, do
not modify the seat belt, add material, or install devices that may
change the seat belt routing or
tension. Doing so may affect the
operation of the seat belt system.
Modifying or tampering with the
seat belt system may result in
serious personal injury.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

Once a seat belt pretensioner has
activated, it cannot be reused and
must be replaced together with the
retractor. It is recommended you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
All seat belt assemblies, including
retractors and attaching hardware,
should be inspected after any collision. It is recommended you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
NISSAN recommends that all seat
belt assemblies in use during a
collision be replaced unless the
collision was minor and the belts
show no damage and continue to
operate properly. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision
should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper
operation is noted.
All child restraints and attaching
hardware should be inspected after
any collision. Always follow the
restraint manufacturer’s inspection
instructions and replacement recommendations. The child restraints
should be replaced if they are
damaged.

PREGNANT WOMEN
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use
seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug,
and always position the lap belt as low as
possible around the hips, not the waist. Place
the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across
your chest. Never put the lap/shoulder belt over
your abdominal area. Contact your doctor for
specific recommendations.

INJURED PERSONS
NISSAN recommends that injured persons use
seat belts, depending on the injury. Check with
your doctor for specific recommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT

WARNING
.

Every person who drives or rides in
this vehicle should use a seat belt at
all times.

1-12 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

internal injuries.
.

For the most effective protection
when the vehicle is in motion, the
seat should be upright. Always sit
well back and upright in the seat
with both feet on the floor and
adjust the seat belt properly.

Do not allow children to play with
the seat belts. Most seating positions are equipped with Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) mode seat
belts. If the seat belt becomes
wrapped around a child’s neck with
the ALR mode activated, the child
can be seriously injured or killed if
the seat belt retracts and becomes
tight. This can occur even if the
vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seat
belt to release the child. If the seat
belt can not be unbuckled or is
already unbuckled, release the child
by cutting the seat belt with a
suitable tool (such as a knife or
scissors) to release the seat belt.

Fastening the seat belts
1. Adjust the seat. (See “Seats” (P.1-2).)

SSS0292

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor
and insert the tongue into the buckle until
you hear and feel the latch engage.
. The retractor is designed to lock
during a sudden stop or on impact.
A slow pulling motion permits the
belt to move and allows you some
freedom of movement in the seat.
. If the seat belt cannot be pulled from
its fully retracted position, firmly pull
the belt and release it. Then
smoothly pull the belt out of the
retractor.

SSS0290

3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug
on the hips as shown.
4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the
retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the
shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder
and across your chest.
The front passenger seat and the rear seating
positions three-point seat belts have two modes
of operation:
. Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
. Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
allows the seat belt to extend and retract to
allow the driver and passengers some freedom

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

of movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat
belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or
during certain impacts.
The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode
(child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for
child restraint installation.
When ALR mode is activated the seat belt
cannot be extended again until the seat belt
tongue is detached from the buckle and fully
retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode
after the seat belt fully retracts. For additional
information, see “Child restraints” (P.1-18).
The ALR mode should be used only for
child restraint installation. During normal
seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR
mode should not be activated. If it is
activated, it may cause uncomfortable seat
belt tension.

SSS0326

Unfastening the seat belts
To unfasten the seat belt, push the button on the
buckle. The seat belt automatically retracts.

WARNING
When fastening the seat belts, be
certain that seatbacks are completely
secured in the latched position. If they
are not completely secured, passengers
may be injured in an accident or sudden
stop.

SSS0351A

Shoulder belt height adjustment (for front
seats)
The shoulder belt anchor height should be
adjusted to the position best for you. (See
“Precautions on seat belt usage” (P.1-10).)
1 , and
To adjust, pull the adjustment button *
then move the shoulder belt anchor to the
2 , so that the belt passes
desired position *
over the center of the shoulder. The belt should
be away from your face and neck, but not falling
off of your shoulder. Release the adjustment
button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into
position.

The range of height adjustment of the shoulder

1-14 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

extender is required.

belt may vary depending on the model.

WARNING

After adjustment, release the adjustment button and try to move the
shoulder belt anchor up and down
to make sure it is securely fixed in
position.

It is recommended that only
NISSAN seat belt extenders, made
by the same company which made
the original equipment seat belts,
be used with NISSAN seat belts.

The shoulder belt anchor height
should be adjusted to the position
best for you. Failure to do so may
reduce the effectiveness of the
entire restraint system and increase
the chance or severity of injury in an
accident.

Adults and children who can use the
standard seat belt should not use an
extender. Such unnecessary use
could result in serious personal
injury in the event of an accident.

Never use seat belt extenders to
install child restraints. If the child
restraint is not secured properly, the
child could be seriously injured or
killed in a collision or a sudden stop.

JVR0439X

Seat belt hooks
When the rear seat belts are not in use and
when folding down the rear seats, hook the rear
seat belts on the seat belt hooks.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS
If, because of body size or driving position, it is
not possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder belt
and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with
the installed seat belts is available that can be
purchased. The extender adds approximately 8
in (200 mm) of length and may be used for either
the driver or front passenger seating position. It
is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for
assistance with purchasing an extender if an

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
.

To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a
mild soap solution or any solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpets.
Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat
belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the
seat belts to retract until they are completely
dry.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

CHILD SAFETY
.

If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt
guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat
belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder
belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.
Periodically check to see that the seat
belt and the metal components, such as
buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires
and anchors, work properly. If loose parts,
deterioration, cuts or other damage on the
webbing is found, the entire seat belt
assembly should be replaced.

systems:

WARNING
Do not allow children to play with the
seat belts. Most seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the
seat belt becomes wrapped around a
child’s neck with the ALR mode activated, the child can be seriously injured
or killed if the seat belt retracts and
becomes tight. This can occur even if
the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seat
belt to release the child. If the seat belt
can not be unbuckled or is already
unbuckled, release the child by cutting
the seat belt with a suitable tool (such
as a knife or scissors) to release the
seat belt.
Children need adults to help protect them.
They need to be properly restrained.
In addition to the general information in this
manual, child safety information is available from
many other sources, including doctors, teachers,
government traffic safety offices, and community
organizations. Every child is different, so be sure
to learn the best way to transport your child.
There are three basic types of child restraint

1-16 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

. Rear-facing child restraint
. Forward-facing child restraint
. Booster seat
The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.
Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less
than 20 lbs (9 kg) should be placed in rearfacing child restraints. Forward-facing child
restraints are available for children who outgrow
rear-facing child restraints and are at least 1
year old. Booster seats are used to help position
a vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no
longer use a forward-facing child restraint.

WARNING
Infants and children need special protection. The vehicle’s seat belts may not
fit them properly. The shoulder belt may
come too close to the face or neck. The
lap belt may not fit over their small hip
bones. In an accident, an improperly
fitting seat belt could cause serious or
fatal injury. Always use appropriate
child restraints.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require the use of approved child
restraints for infants and small children. See

“Child restraints” (P.1-18).

SMALL CHILDREN

A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle
by using either the LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren) system or with the vehicle
seat belt. See “Child restraints” (P.1-18) for
more information.

Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at
least 20 lbs (9 kg) should remain in a rear-facing
child restraint as long as possible up to the
height or weight limit of the child restraint.
Children who outgrow the height or weight limit
of the rear-facing child restraint and are at least
1 year old should be secured in a forward-facing
child restraint with a harness. Refer to the
manufacturer’s instructions for minimum and
maximum weight and height recommendations.
NISSAN recommends that small children be
placed in child restraints that comply with
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You
should choose a child restraint that fits your
vehicle and always follow the manufacturer’s
instructions for installation and use.

NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens
and children be restrained in the rear seat.
Studies show that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear seat than in
the front seat.
This is especially important because your
vehicle has a supplemental restraint system (Air bag system) for the front passenger. See “Supplemental restraint system”
(P.1-38).

INFANTS
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed
in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recommends that infants be placed in child restraints
that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards. You should choose a child restraint
that fits your vehicle and always follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for installation and
use.

LARGER CHILDREN
Children should remain in a forward-facing child
restraint with a harness until they reach the
maximum height or weight limit allowed by the
child restraint manufacturer.
Once a child outgrows the height or weight limit
of the harness-equipped forward-facing child
restraint, NISSAN recommends that the child be
placed in a commercially available booster seat
to obtain proper seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit
properly, the booster seat should raise the child

so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned
across the chest and the top, middle portion of
the shoulder. The shoulder belt should not cross
the neck or face and should not fall off the
shoulder. The lap belt should lie snugly across
the lower hips or upper thighs, not the abdomen.
A booster seat can only be used in seating
positions that have a three-point type seat belt.
The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and
have a label certifying that it complies with
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
A booster seat should be used until the child
can pass the seat belt fit test below:
.
.
.
.

.
.

Are the child’s back and hips against the
vehicle seatback?
Is the child able to sit without slouching?
Do the child’s knees bend easily over the
front edge of the seat with feet flat on the
floor?
Can the child safely wear the seat belt (lap
belt low and snug across the hips and
shoulder belt across mid-chest and
shoulder)?
Is the child able to use the properly adjusted
head restraint/headrest?
Will the child be able to stay in position for
the entire ride?

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

CHILD RESTRAINTS
injured or killed in a sudden stop or
collision.

JVR0473X

SSS0099

If you answered no to any of these questions,
the child should remain in a booster seat using a
three-point type seat belt.
NOTE:
Laws in some communities may follow
different guidelines. Check local and state
regulations to confirm your child is using
the correct restraint system before traveling.

WARNING
Never let a child stand or kneel on any
seat and do not allow a child in the
cargo area. The child could be seriously

1-18 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0100

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RESTRAINTS

WARNING
.

Failure to follow the warnings and
instructions for proper use and installation of child restraints could
result in serious injury or death of a
child or other passengers in a
sudden stop or collision:
— The child restraint must be used
and installed properly. Always
follow all of the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions for
installation and use.
— Infants and children should
never be held on anyone’s lap.
Even the strongest adult cannot
resist the forces of a collision.
— Do not put a seat belt around
both a child and another passenger.
— NISSAN recommends that all
child restraints be installed in
the rear seat. Studies show that
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seat than

— Keep seatbacks as upright as
possible after fitting the child
restraint.

in the front seat. If you must
install a forward-facing child
restraint in the front seat, see
“Forward-facing child restraint
installation using the seat belts”
(P.1-30).
— Even with the NISSAN Advanced
Air Bag System, never install a
rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat. An inflating air bag
could seriously injure or kill a
child. A rear-facing child restraint must only be used in the
rear seat.
— Be sure to purchase a child
restraint that will fit the child
and vehicle. Some child restraints may not fit properly in
your vehicle.
— Child restraint anchor points are
designed to withstand loads
from child restraints that are
properly fitted.
— Never use the anchor points for
adult seat belts or harnesses.
— A child restraint with a top tether
strap should not be used in the
front passenger seat.

— Infants and children should always be placed in an appropriate child restraint while in the
vehicle.
.

When the child restraint is not in
use, keep it secured with the LATCH
system or a seat belt. In a sudden
stop or collision, loose objects can
injure occupants or damage the
vehicle.

CAUTION
A child restraint in a closed vehicle can
become very hot. Check the seating
surface and buckles before placing a
child in the child restraint.
This vehicle is equipped with a universal child
restraint anchor system, referred to as the
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system. Some child restraints include rigid
or webbing-mounted attachments that can be
connected to these anchors.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

For details, see “Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren System (LATCH)” (P.1-20).
If you do not have a LATCH compatible child
restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.
Several manufacturers offer child restraints for
infants and small children of various sizes. When
selecting any child restraint, keep the following
points in mind:
.

.
.

Choose only a restraint with a label certifying
that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
Check the child restraint in your vehicle to
be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s
seat and seat belt system.
If the child restraint is compatible with your
vehicle, place your child in the child restraint
and check the various adjustments to be
sure the child restraint is compatible with
your child. Choose a child restraint that is
designed for your child’s height and weight.
Always follow all recommended procedures.
If the combined weight of the child and child
restraint is less than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), you
may use either the LATCH anchors or the
seat belt to install the child restraint (not
both at the same time).

If the combined weight of the child and child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use
the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower
anchors) to install the child restraint.
. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved child
restraint at all times while the vehicle is
being operated. Canadian law requires the
top tether strap on forward-facing child
restraints be secured to the designated
anchor point on the vehicle.

1-20 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0801
LATCH label location

Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
System (LATCH)
Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor
points that are used with LATCH (Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system
compatible child restraints. This system may
also be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX
compatible system. With this system, you do not
have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the
child restraint unless the combined weight of the
child and child restraint exceeds 65 lbs (29.5
kg). If the combined weight of the child and child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use the
vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to
install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the

child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for
installation.

LATCH lower anchor

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and
instructions for proper use and installation of child restraints could result in
serious injury or death of a child or
other passengers in a sudden stop or
collision:
.

Attach LATCH system compatible
child restraints only at the locations
shown in the illustration.

Do not secure a child restraint in the
center rear seating position using
the LATCH lower anchors. The child
restraint will not be secured properly.

Inspect the lower anchors by inserting your fingers into the lower
anchor area. Feel to make sure
there are no obstructions over the
anchors such as seat belt webbing
or seat cushion material. The child
restraint will not be secured properly if the lower anchors are ob-

structed.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used to attach adult seat
belts, or other items or equipment to
the vehicle. Doing so could damage the
child restraint anchorages. The child
restraint will not be properly installed
using the damaged anchorage, and a
child could be seriously injured or killed
in a collision.

SSS0637
LATCH lower anchor location

LATCH lower anchor location
The LATCH lower anchors are located at the
rear of the seat cushion near the seatback. A
label is attached to the seatback to help you
locate the LATCH lower anchors.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

equipped) contacts the top tether strap
when it is attached to the top tether
anchor, remove the cargo cover from
the vehicle or secure it on the cargo
floor below its attachment location. If
the cargo cover is not removed, it may
damage the top tether strap during a
collision. Your child could be seriously
injured or killed in a collision if the child
restraint top tether strap is damaged.

SSS0643
LATCH webbing-mounted attachment

Installing child restraint LATCH lower
anchor attachments
LATCH compatible child restraints include two
rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can
be connected to two anchors located at certain
seating positions in your vehicle. With this
system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat
belt to secure the child restraint. Check your
child restraint for a label stating that it is
compatible with LATCH. This information may
also be in the instructions provided by the child
restraint manufacturer.

SSS0644
LATCH rigid attachment

When installing a child restraint, carefully read
and follow the instructions in this manual and
those supplied with the child restraint.

Top tether anchor

WARNING
Properly secure cargo and do not allow
it to contact the top tether strap when it
is attached to the top tether anchor.
Cargo that is not properly secured or
cargo that contacts the top tether strap
may damage the top tether strap during
a collision. If the cargo cover (if so

1-22 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

in a collision.
Anchor points are located on the back side of
the seatbacks.

1. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

The child restraint top tether strap must be used
when installing child restraints with the LATCH
lower anchor attachments or seat belts.
If you have any questions when installing a
top tether strap child restraint on the rear
seat, it is recommended you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
JVR0198X

Top tether anchor point locations

WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used to attach adult seat
belts, or other items or equipment to
the vehicle. Doing so could damage the
child restraint anchorages. The child
restraint will not be properly installed
using the damaged anchorage, and a
child could be seriously injured or killed

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
safety” and “Child restraints” sections before
installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint
exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint is
greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s
seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the
child restraint. Be sure to follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child
restraint using the LATCH system:
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

SSS0648
Rear-facing web-mounted — step 2

SSS0649
Rear-facing rigid-mounted — step 2

2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check
to make sure the LATCH attachment is
properly attached to the lower anchors.

1-24 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0639
Rear-facing — step 3

3. For child restraints that are equipped with
webbing-mounted attachments, remove any
additional slack from the anchor attachments. Press downward and rearward firmly
in the center of the child restraint with your
hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.

5. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1
through 4.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS

WARNING

SSS0650
Rear-facing — step 4

4. After attaching the child restraint, test it
before you place the child in it. Push it from
side to side while holding the child restraint
near the LATCH attachment path. The child
restraint should not move more than 1 inch
(25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it
forward and check to see if the LATCH
attachment holds the restraint in place. If the
restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH
attachment as necessary, or put the restraint
in another seat and test it again. You may
need to try a different child restraint or try
installing by using the vehicle seat belt (if
applicable). Not all child restraints fit in all
types of vehicles.

The three-point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be
used when installing a child restraint.
Failure to use the ALR mode will result
in the child restraint not being properly
secured. The restraint could tip over or
be loose and cause injury to a child in a
sudden stop or collision. Also, it can
change the operation of the front
passenger air bag. See “Front passenger air bag and status light” (P.1-46).

SSS0100
Rear-facing — step 1

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
safety” (P.1-16) and “Child restraints” (P.1-18)
before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint
exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint is
greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s
seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the
child restraint. Be sure to follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child
restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

seats:
1. Child restraints for infants must be
used in the rear-facing direction and
therefore must not be used in the front
seat. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.

SSS0654

SSS0655

Rear-facing — step 2

Rear-facing — step 3

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you
hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for belt routing.

3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor
is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
when the seat belt is fully retracted.

1-26 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0656

SSS0657

SSS0658

Rear-facing — step 4

Rear-facing — step 5

Rear-facing — step 6

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the
shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

5. Remove any additional slack from the seat
belt; press downward and rearward firmly in
the center of the child restraint to compress
the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while
pulling up on the seat belt.

6. After attaching the child restraint, test it
before you place the child in it. Push it from
side to side while holding the child restraint
near the seat belt path. The child restraint
should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm),
from side to side. Try to tug it forward and
check to see if the belt holds the restraint in
place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten
the seat belt as necessary, or put the
restraint in another seat and test it again.
You may need to try a different child
restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all
types of vehicles.
7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 1
through 6.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat
belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint
mode) is canceled.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
LATCH
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
safety” and “Child restraints” sections before
installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint
exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint is
greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s
seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the
child restraint. Be sure to follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a forward-facing
child restraint using the LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

SSS0645

SSS0646

Forward-facing web-mounted — step 2

Forward-facing rigid-mounted — step 2

2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check
to make sure the LATCH attachment is
properly attached to the lower anchors.

3. The back of the child restraint should be
secured against the vehicle seatback.

If the child restraint is equipped with a top
tether strap, route the top tether strap and
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point. See “Installing top tether strap” (P.130). Do not install child restraints that
require the use of a top tether strap in
seating positions that do not have a top
tether anchor.

1-28 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint to obtain the correct child restraint
fit. If the head restraint is removed, store it in
a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the
head restraint when the child restraint
is removed. See “Head restraints/headrests” (P.1-5) for head restraint adjustment
information.
If the seating position does not have a head
restraint and it is interfering with the proper
child restraint fit, try another seating position
or a different child restraint.

child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1
through 6.

SSS0647

SSS0638

Forward-facing — step 4

Forward-facing — step 6

4. For child restraints that are equipped with
webbing-mounted attachments, remove any
additional slack from the anchor attachments. Press downward and rearward firmly
in the center of the child restraint with your
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.

6. After attaching the child restraint, test it
before you place the child in it. Push it from
side to side while holding the child restraint
near the LATCH attachment path. The child
restraint should not move more than 1 inch
(25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it
forward and check to see if the LATCH
attachment holds the restraint in place. If the
restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH
attachment as necessary, or put the restraint
in another seat and test it again. You may
need to try a different child restraint. Not all
child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

5. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
slack.

7. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

in a collision.
The child restraint top tether strap must be used
when installing the child restraint with the
LATCH lower anchor attachments.
First, secure the child restraint with the LATCH
lower anchors (rear outboard seat positions
only).
1. Remove the head restraint and store it in a
secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head
restraint when the child restraint is removed
(rear outboard seat positions).
JVR0274X

Installing top tether strap

See “Head restraints/headrests” (P.1-5) for
head restraint adjustment, removal and
installation information.
Position the top tether strap over the top of
the seatback.
2. Secure the top tether strap to the tether
anchor point on the back of the seatback
behind the child restraint.
3. Refer to the appropriate child restraint
installation procedure steps in this section
before tightening the tether strap.
If you have any questions when installing a
top tether strap, consult your NISSAN
dealer for details.

1-30 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE
SEAT BELTS

WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be
used when installing a child restraint.
Failure to use the ALR mode will result
in the child restraint not being properly
secured. The restraint could tip over or
be loose and cause injury to a child in a
sudden stop or collision. Also, it can
change the operation of the front
passenger air bag. See “Front passenger air bag and status light” (P.1-46).

rear seats or in the front passenger seat:
1. If you must install a child restraint in
the front seat, it should be placed in a
forward-facing direction only. Move the
seat to the rearmost position. Child
restraints for infants must be used in
the rear-facing direction and, therefore,
must not be used in the front seat.
2. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
SSS0640
Forward-facing (front passenger seat) — step 1

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
safety” and “Child restraints” sections before
installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint
exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint is
greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s
seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the
child restraint. Be sure to follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a forward-facing
child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the

The back of the child restraint should be
secured against the vehicle seatback.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint to obtain the correct child restraint
fit. If the head restraint is removed, store it in
a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the
head restraint when the child restraint
is removed. See “Head restraints/headrests” (P.1-5) for head restraint adjustment,
removal and installation information.
If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint and it is interfering
with the proper child restraint fit, try another
seating position or a different child restraint.

SSS0360B
Forward-facing — step 3

3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you
hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for belt routing.
If the child restraint is equipped with a top
tether strap, route the top tether strap and
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point (rear seat installation only). See
“Installing top tether strap” (P.1-34). Do
not install child restraints that require the
use of a top tether strap in seating positions
that do not have a top tether anchor.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

SSS0651

SSS0652

SSS0653

Forward-facing — step 4

Forward-facing — step 5

Forward-facing — step 6

4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor
is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
when the seat belt is fully retracted.

5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the
shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

6. Remove any additional slack from the seat
belt; press downward and rearward firmly in
the center of the child restraint with your
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while pulling up on the seat
belt.
7. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
slack.

1-32 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2
through 8.

SSS0641

SSS1135

Forward-facing — step 8

Forward-facing — step 10

8. After attaching the child restraint, test it
before you place the child in it. Push it from
side to side while holding the child restraint
near the seat belt path. The child restraint
should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm),
from side to side. Try to tug it forward and
check to see if the belt holds the restraint in
place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten
the seat belt as necessary, or put the
restraint in another seat and test it again.
You may need to try a different child
restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all
types of vehicles.

10. If the child restraint is installed in the front
passenger seat, place the ignition switch in
the ON position. The front passenger air bag
status light
should illuminate. If this light
is not illuminated, see “Front passenger air
bag and status light” (P.1-46). Move the
child restraint to another seating position. Have the system checked. It is
recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat
belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child
restraint mode) is canceled.

9. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

in a collision.

BOOSTER SEATS
Precautions on booster seats

The child restraint top tether strap must be used
when installing the child restraint with the seat
belts.
First, secure the child restraint with the seat belt.
1. Remove the head restraint and store it in a
secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head
restraint when the child restraint is removed
(rear outboard seat positions).

JVR0274X

Installing top tether strap

WARNING
If a booster seat and seat belt are not
used properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a sudden stop or collision
greatly increases:
.

Make sure the shoulder portion of
the belt is away from the child’s face
and neck and the lap portion of the
belt does not cross the stomach.

Position the top tether strap over the top of
the seatback.

2. Secure the top tether strap to the tether
anchor point on the back of the seatback
behind the child restraint.

Make sure the shoulder belt is not
behind the child or under the child’s
arm.

A booster seat must only be installed in a seating position that has
a lap/shoulder belt.

See “Head restraints/headrests” (P.1-5) for
head restraint adjustment, removal and
installation information.

3. Refer to the appropriate child restraint
installation procedure steps in this section
before tightening the tether strap.
If you have any questions when installing a
top tether strap, it is recommended you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

1-34 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS0455

Booster seats of various sizes are offered by
several manufacturers. When selecting any
booster seat, keep the following points in mind:
.

Choose only a booster seat with a label
certifying that it complies with Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be
sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat
and seat belt system.

LRS0453

Make sure the child’s head will be properly
supported by the booster seat or vehicle
seat. The seatback must be at or above the
center of the child’s ears. For example, if a
1 is chosen, the
low back booster seat *
vehicle seatback must be at or above the
center of the child’s ears. If the seatback is
lower than the center of the child’s ears, a
2 should be used.
high back booster seat *
If the booster seat is compatible with your
vehicle, place your child in the booster seat
and check the various adjustments to be
sure the booster seat is compatible with
your child. Always follow all recommended
procedures.

LRS0464

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved child
restraint at all times while the vehicle is
being operated.
The instructions in this section apply to booster
seat installation in the rear seats or the front
passenger seat.

Booster seat installation

CAUTION
Do not use the lap/shoulder belt Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

when using a booster seat with the seat
belts.
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
safety”, “Child restraints” and “Booster seats”
sections earlier in this section before installing a
child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the
rear seat or in the front passenger seat:

SSS0640

1. If you must install a booster seat in the
front seat, move the seat to the rearmost position.
2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only
place it in a forward-facing direction. Always
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s
instructions.

LRS0454
Front passenger position

3. The booster seat should be positioned on
the vehicle seat so that it is stable.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint to obtain the correct booster seat
fit. If the head restraint is removed, store it in
a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the
head restraint when the booster seat is
removed. See “Head restraints/headrests”
(P.1-5) for head restraint adjustment, removal and installation information.
If the seating position does not have a head
restraint and it is interfering with the proper
booster seat fit, try another seating position
or a different booster seat.

1-36 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low
and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s
instructions for adjusting the seat belt
routing.
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt
toward the retractor to take up extra slack.
Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the top, middle portion of the child’s
shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat
manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the
seat belt routing.
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instructions for properly fastening a seat belt
shown in “Seat belts” (P.1-10).

SSS1135

7. If the booster seat is installed in the front
passenger seat, place the ignition switch in
the ON position. The front passenger air bag
status light
may or may not illuminate
depending on the size of the child and the
type of booster seat used. See “Front
passenger air bag and status light” (P.1-46).

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM
PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
section contains important information concerning the following systems:
.

Driver and passenger supplemental frontimpact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag
System)
. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag
. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag
. Seat belt with pretensioner
Supplemental front-impact air bag system:
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can
help cushion the impact force to the head and
chest of the driver and front passenger in certain
frontal collisions.
Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag system: This system can help
cushion the impact force to the chest and pelvic
area of the driver and front passenger in certain
side impact collisions. The side air bag is
designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle
is impacted.

head of occupants in front and rear outboard
seating positions in certain side impact or
rollover collisions. In a side-impact, the curtain
air bags are designed to inflate on the side
where the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover, the
curtain air bags on both sides are designed to
inflate. Under both side-impact and rollover
situations, the curtain air bags will remain
inflated for a short period of time.
These supplemental restraint systems are designed to supplement the crash protection
provided by the driver and passenger seat belts
and are not a substitute for them. Seat belts
should always be correctly worn and the
occupant seated a suitable distance away from
the steering wheel, instrument panel and door
finishers. (See “Seat belts” (P.1-10) for instructions and precautions on seat belt usage.)
The supplemental air bags operate only
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
After the ignition is placed in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7
seconds if the systems are operational.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag system: This
system can help cushion the impact force to the

1-38 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING
.

The front air bags ordinarily will not
inflate in the event of a side impact,
rear impact, rollover, or lower severity frontal collision. Always wear
your seat belts to help reduce the
risk or severity of injury in various
kinds of accidents.

The front passenger air bag will not
inflate if the front passenger air bag
status light is lit or if the front
passenger seat is unoccupied. See
“Front passenger air bag and status
light” (P.1-46).

The seat belts and the front air bags
are most effective when you are
sitting well back and upright in the
seat with both feet on the floor. The
front air bags inflate with great
force. Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, if you are
unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in
any way, you are at greater risk of
injury or death in a crash. You may
also receive serious or fatal injuries
from the front air bag if you are up
against it when it inflates. Always sit

SSS0131

SSS0132

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

back against the seatback and as
far-away as practical from the steering wheel or instrument panel. Always use the seat belts.
.

if the front air bag inflates.

The driver and front passenger seat
belt buckles are equipped with
sensors that detect if the seat belts
are fastened. The Advanced Air Bag
System monitors the severity of a
collision and seat belt usage then
inflates the air bags. Failure to
properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury
in an accident.

The front passenger seat is
equipped with occupant classification sensors (weight sensors) that
turn the front passenger air bag
OFF under some conditions. This
sensor is only used in this seat.
Failure to be properly seated and
wearing the seat belt can increase
the risk or severity of injury in an
accident. See “Front passenger air
bag and status light” (P.1-46).

Keep hands on the outside of the
steering wheel. Placing them inside
the steering wheel rim could increase the risk that they are injured

1-40 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0007

SSS0006

WARNING

SSS0008

SSS0009

Never let children ride unrestrained
or extend their hands or face out of
the window. Do not attempt to hold
them in your lap or arms. Some
examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations.

Children may be severely injured or
killed when the front air bags, side
air bags or curtain air bags inflate if
they are not properly restrained.
Pre-teens and children should be
properly restrained in the rear seat,
if possible.

Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rearfacing child restraint in the front
seat. An inflating front air bag could
seriously injure or kill your child.
See “Child restraints” (P.1-18) for
details.

SSS0099

SSS0100

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

SSS0059A

SSS0140

SSS0159

Do not lean against doors or windows.

WARNING
Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bags and roof-mounted
curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bags:
.

SSS0188A

1-42 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0162

The side air bags ordinarily will not
inflate in the event of a frontal
impact, rear impact, rollover or lower severity side collision. Always
wear your seat belts to help reduce
the risk or severity of injury in
various kinds of accidents.

The curtain air bags ordinarily will
not inflate in the event of a front
impact, rear impact, or lower severity side collision. Always wear your
seat belts to help reduce the risk or
severity of injury in various kinds of
accidents.

The seat belts, the side air bags and
curtain air bags are most effective
when you are sitting well back and
upright in the seat. The side air bag
and curtain air bag inflate with great
force. Do not allow anyone to place
their hand, leg or face near the side
air bag on the side of the seatback
of the front seat or near the side
roof rails. Do not allow anyone
sitting in the front seats or rear
outboard seats to extend their hand
out of the window or lean against
the door. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown
in the previous illustrations.

When sitting in the rear seat, do not
hold onto the seatback of the front
seat. If the side air bag inflates, you
may be seriously injured. Be especially careful with children, who
should always be properly re-

strained. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in
the illustrations.
.

Do not use seat covers on the front
seatbacks. They may interfere with
side air bag inflation.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

NISSAN ADVANCED AIR BAG SYSTEM (front seats)

WARNING
To ensure proper operation of the
passenger’s advanced air bag system,
please observe the following items.
.

Do not allow a passenger in the rear
seat to push or pull on the seatback
pocket.

Do not place heavy loads heavier
than 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback,
head restraint or in the seatback
pocket.

Do not store luggage behind the
seat that can press into the seatback.

Confirm the operating condition
with the front passenger air bag
status light.

If you notice that the front passenger air bag status light is not
operating, it is recommended you
visit a NISSAN dealer to check the
occupant classification system.

JVR0272X

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Crash zone sensor
Supplemental front-impact air bag modules
Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental
air bag modules
Occupant classification sensors (weight sensors)
Occupant classification system control unit

6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover
supplemental air bag inflators
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover
supplemental air bags modules
Seat belt with pretensioners
Satellite sensors
Air bag Control Unit (ACU)

1-44 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Until you have confirmed with your
dealer that your passenger seat
occupant classification system is
working properly, position the occupants in the rear seating positions.

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN
Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and
front passenger seats. This system is designed
to meet certification requirements under U.S.
regulations. It is also permitted in Canada. All of
the information, cautions and warnings in
this manual apply and must be followed.
The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is
located in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is
mounted in the instrument panel above the glove
box. The front air bags are designed to inflate in
higher severity frontal collisions, although they
may inflate if the forces in another type of
collision are similar to those of a higher severity
frontal impact. They may not inflate in certain
frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is
not always an indication of proper front air bag
operation.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has
dual stage air bag inflators. The system monitors
information from the Air bag Control Unit (ACU),
seat belt buckle sensors and the occupant

classification sensors (weight sensors). Inflator
operation is based on the severity of a collision
and seat belt usage for the driver. For the front
passenger, the occupant classification sensors
are also monitored. Based on information from
the sensors, only one front air bag may inflate in
a crash, depending on the crash severity and
whether the front occupants are belted or
unbelted. Additionally, the front passenger air
bag may be automatically turned OFF under
some conditions, depending on the information
provided by the occupant classification sensors.
If the front passenger air bag is OFF, the front
passenger air bag status light will be illuminated
(if the seat is unoccupied, the light will not be
illuminated, but the air bag will be off). (See
“Front passenger air bag and status light” (P.146) for further details.) One front air bag inflating
does not indicate improper performance of the
system.
If you have any questions about your air bag
system, it is recommended you visit a NISSAN
dealer to obtain information about the system. If
you are considering modification of your vehicle
due to a disability, you may also contact
NISSAN. Contact information is contained in
the front of this Owner’s Manual.
When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise
may be heard, followed by release of smoke.
This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate

a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it
may cause irritation and choking. Those with a
history of a breathing condition should get fresh
air promptly.
Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,
help to cushion the impact force on the head
and chest of the front occupants. They can help
save lives and reduce serious injuries. However,
an inflating front air bag may cause facial
abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags do
not provide restraint to the lower body.
Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat
belts should be correctly worn and the driver
and passenger seated upright as far as practical
away from the steering wheel or instrument
panel. The front air bags inflate quickly in order
to help protect the front occupants. Because of
this, the force of the front air bag inflating can
increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too
close to, or is against, the air bag module during
inflation.
The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.
The front air bags operate only when the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
After the ignition is placed in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7
seconds if the system is operational.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

an accident.

SSS1135
Front passenger air bag status light

Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING
The front passenger air bag is designed
to automatically turn OFF under some
conditions. Read this section carefully
to learn how it operates. Proper use of
the seat, seat belt and child restraints is
necessary for most effective protection.
Failure to follow all instructions in this
manual concerning the use of seats,
seat belts and child restraints can
increase the risk or severity of injury in

Status light:
The front passenger seat is equipped with the
occupant classification sensors (weight sensors) that turn the front passenger air bag on or
off depending on the weight applied to the front
passenger seat. The status of the front passenger air bag (ON or OFF) is indicated by the front
passenger air bag status light
which is
located on the instrument panel. After the
ignition switch is placed in the "ON" position,
the front passenger air bag status light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off or
illuminates depending on the front passenger
seat occupied status. The light operates as
follows:
.
.

Unoccupied passenger seat: The
light
is OFF and the front passenger air bag is
OFF and will not inflate in a crash.
Passenger’s seat occupied by a small adult,
child or child restraint as outlined in this
section: The
light illuminates to indicate
that the front passenger air bag is OFF and
will not inflate in a crash.
Occupied passenger seat and the passenger meets the conditions outlined in this
section: The
light is OFF to indicate that
the front passenger air bag is operational.

1-46 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

In addition to the above, certain objects placed
on the front passenger seat may also cause the
light to operate as described above depending
on their weight.
For additional information related to the normal
operation and troubleshooting of this occupant
classification sensor system, please refer to
“Normal operation” (P.1-48) and “Troubleshooting” (P.1-48) in this section.
Front passenger air bag:
The front passenger air bag is designed to
automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is
operated under some conditions as described
below as permitted by U.S. regulations. If the
front passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate
in a crash. The driver air bag and other air bags
in your vehicle are not part of this system.
The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce
the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag
to certain front passenger seat occupants, such
as children, by requiring the air bag to be
automatically turned OFF.
The occupant classification sensors (weight
sensors) are on the seat cushion frame under
the front passenger seat and are designed to
detect an occupant and objects on the seat. For
example, if a child is in the front passenger seat,
the Advanced Air Bag System is designed to
turn the passenger air bag OFF in accordance

with the regulations. Also, if a child restraint of
the type specified in the regulations is on the
seat, the occupant classification sensors can
detect it and cause the air bag to turn OFF.
Front passenger seat adult occupants who are
properly seated and using the seat belt as
outlined in this manual should not cause the
passenger air bag to be automatically turned
OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF,
however, if the occupant does not sit in the seat
properly (for example, by not sitting upright, by
sitting on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise
being out of position), this could cause the
sensors to turn the air bag OFF. Always be sure
to be seated and wearing the seat belt properly
for the most effective protection by the seat belt
and supplemental air bag.
NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and children be properly restrained in a rear seat.
NISSAN also recommends that appropriate
child restraints and booster seats be properly
installed in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the
occupant classification sensors are designed to
operate as described above to turn the front
passenger air bag OFF for specified child
restraints. Failing to properly secure child
restraints and to use the Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint mode)
may allow the restraint to tip or move in an
accident or sudden stop. This can also result in

the passenger air bag inflating in a crash instead
of being OFF. (See “Child restraints” (P.1-18)
for proper use and installation.)
If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the
passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a
crash. However, heavy objects placed on the
seat could result in air bag inflation, because of
the object being detected by the occupant
classification sensors. Other conditions could
also result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is
standing on the seat, or if two children are on the
seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.
Always be sure that you and all vehicle
occupants are seated and restrained properly.

not illuminated (indicating that the air bag might
inflate in a crash), it could be that the child
restraint or seat belt is not being used properly.
Make sure that the child restraint is installed
properly, the seat belt is used properly and the
occupant is positioned properly. If the front
passenger air bag status light is not illuminated,
reposition the occupant or child restraint in a
rear seat.

Using the front passenger air bag status light,
you can monitor when the front passenger air
bag is automatically turned OFF with the seat
occupied. The light will not illuminate when the
front passenger seat is unoccupied.

If the front passenger air bag status light will not
illuminate even though you believe that the child
restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are
properly positioned, the system may be sensing
an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is
OFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that the
system is OFF by using a special tool. However,
until you have confirmed with your dealer that
your air bag is working properly, reposition the
occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

If an adult occupant is in the seat but the front
passenger air bag status light is illuminated
(indicating that the air bag is OFF), it could be
that the person is a small adult, or is not sitting
on the seat properly.

The air bag system and front passenger air bag
status light will take a few seconds to register a
change in the passenger seat status. However, if
the seat becomes unoccupied, the front passenger air bag status light will remain off.

If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,
the front passenger air bag status light may or
may not be illuminated, depending on the size of
the child and the type of child restraint being
used. If the front passenger air bag status light is

If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air
bag system, the supplemental air bag warning
light
, located in the meter and gauges area,
will blink. Have the system checked. It is
recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47

this service.
Normal operation:
In order for the occupant classification sensor
system to classify the front passenger based on
weight, please follow the precautions and steps
outlined below:
Precautions:
. Make sure that there are no objects weighing over 9.1 lbs (4 kg) hanging on the seat
or placed in the seatback pocket.
. Make sure that a child restraint or other
object is not pressing against the rear of the
seatback.
. Make sure that a rear passenger is not
pushing or pulling on the back of the front
passenger seat.
. Make sure that the front passenger seat or
seatback is not forced back against an
object on the seat or floor behind it.
. Make sure that there is no object placed
under the front passenger seat.

Steps:
1. Adjust the seat as outlined. (See “Seats”
(P.1-2).) Sit upright, leaning against the
seatback, and centered on the seat cushion
with your feet comfortably extended to the
floor.
2. Make sure there are no objects on your lap.
3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined. (See “Seat
belts” (P.1-10).)
4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds
allowing the system to classify the front
passenger before the vehicle is put into
motion.
5. Ensure proper classification by checking the
front passenger air bag status light.
NOTE:
This vehicle’s occupant classification sensor system locks the classification during
driving so it is important that you confirm
that the front passenger is properly classified prior to driving. Also, the occupant
classification sensor system may recalculate the weight of the occupant when the
vehicle comes to a stop (i.e. stop light, stop
sign, etc.), so the front passenger seat
occupant should continue to remain
seated as outlined above.

1-48 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Troubleshooting:
If you think the front passenger air bag status
light is incorrect:
1.

If the light is ON with no front passenger and no
objects on the front passenger seat:

This may be due to the following conditions that
may be interfering with the weight sensors:
.

An object weighing over 9.1 lbs (4 kg)
hanging on the seat or placed in the
seatback pocket.
. A child restraint or other object pressing
against the rear of the seatback.
. A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the
back of the front passenger seat.
. Forcing the front seat or seatback against an
object on the seat or floor behind it.
. An object placed under the front passenger
seat.
. An object placed between the seat cushion
and center console or between the seat
cushion and the door.
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop
when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any
of the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and
wait 1 minute.
NOTE:
A system check will be performed during
which the front passenger air bag status

light will remain lit for about 7 seconds
initially.
If the light is still ON after this, it is recommended that the vehicle should be checked by a
NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.
2.

If the light is ON with an adult occupying the
front passenger seat:

Occupant is a small adult — the front
passenger air bag status light is functioning
as intended. The front passenger air bag is
suppressed.
However, if the occupant is not a small adult,
then this may be due to the following conditions
that may be interfering with the weight sensors:
.

.
.
.
.
.

Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning
against the seatback, and centered on the
seat cushion with his/her feet comfortably
extended to the floor.
A child restraint or other object pressing
against the rear of the seatback.
A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the
back of the front passenger seat.
Forcing the front seat or seatback against an
object on the seat or floor behind it.
An object placed under the front passenger
seat.
An object placed between the seat cushion
and center console or between the seat
cushion and the door.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop
when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any
of the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and
wait 1 minute.

If the light is still ON after this, the person should
be advised not to ride in the front passenger
seat and it is recommended that the vehicle
should be checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon
as possible.

A child restraint or other object pressing
against the rear of the seatback.
. A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the
back of the front passenger seat.
. Forcing the front seat or seatback against an
object on the seat or floor behind it.
. An object placed under the front passenger
seat.
. An object placed between the seat cushion
and center console.
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop
when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any
of the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and
wait 1 minute.

NOTE:

NOTE:
A system check will be performed during
which the front passenger air bag status
light will remain lit for about 7 seconds
initially.

.
.

If the light is OFF with a small adult, child or child
restraint occupying the front passenger seat.
This may be due to the following conditions that
may be interfering with the weight sensors:

Small adult or child is not sitting upright,
leaning against the seatback, and centered
on the seat cushion with his/her feet
comfortably extended to the floor.
The child restraint is not properly installed,
as outlined. (See “Child restraints” (P.118).)
An object weighing over 9.1 lbs (4 kg)
hanging on the seat or placed in the
seatback pocket.

A system check will be performed during
which the front passenger air bag status
light will remain lit for about 7 seconds
initially.
If the light is still OFF after this, the small adult,
child or child restraint should be repositioned in
the rear seat and it is recommended that the
vehicle should be checked by a NISSAN dealer
as soon as possible.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

Other supplemental front-impact air bag
precautions

personal injury.

Immediately after inflation, several
front air bag system components
will be hot. Do not touch them; you
may severely burn yourself.

Removing or modifying the front
passenger seat may affect the function of the air bag system and result
in serious personal injury.

No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring
of the supplemental air bag system.
This is to prevent accidental inflation of the supplemental air bag or
damage to the supplemental air bag
system.

Do not make unauthorized changes
to your vehicle’s electrical system,
suspension system or front end
structure. This could affect proper
operation of the front air bag system.

Modifying or tampering with the
front passenger seat may result in
serious personal injury. For example, do not change the front seats by
placing material on the seat cushion
or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, on the
seat that is not specifically designed
to assure proper air bag operation.
Additionally, do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat
or the seat cushion and seatback.
Such objects may interfere with the
proper operation of the occupant
classification sensors.

Tampering with the front air bag
system may result in serious personal injury. Tampering includes
changes to the steering wheel and
the instrument panel assembly by
placing material over the steering
wheel pad and above the instrument
panel or by installing additional trim
material around the air bag system.

No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring
of the seat belt system. This may
affect the front air bag system.
Tampering with the seat belt system
may result in serious personal injury.

It is recommended you visit a
NISSAN dealer for work on and
around the front air bag. It is also

WARNING
.

Do not place any objects on the
steering wheel pad or on the instrument panel. Also, do not place any
objects between any occupant and
the steering wheel or instrument
panel. Such objects may become
dangerous projectiles and cause
injury if the front air bags inflate.

Do not place objects with sharp
edges on the seat. Also, do not
place heavy objects on the seat that
will leave permanent impressions in
the seat. Such objects can damage
the seat or occupant classification
sensors (weight sensors). This can
affect the operation of the air bag
system and result in serious personal injury.

Do not use water or acidic cleaners
(hot steam cleaners) on the seat.
This can damage the seat or occupant classification sensors. This can
also affect the operation of the air
bag system and result in serious

1-50 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

on the side where the vehicle is impacted. They
may not inflate in certain side collisions.

recommended you visit a NISSAN
dealer for installation of electrical
equipment. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) wiring harnesses* should not be modified or
disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing
devices should not be used on the
air bag system.
.

A cracked windshield should be
replaced immediately by a qualified
repair facility. A cracked windshield
could affect the function of the
supplemental air bag system.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the front air bag system
and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections
in this Owner’s Manual.

Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate in
certain types of rollover collisions or near
rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle movements
(for example, during severe off-roading) may
cause the curtain air bags to inflate.
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an
indication of proper side air bag and curtain air
bag operation.

SSS0978

FRONT SEAT-MOUNTED SIDE-IMPACT SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG AND
ROOF-MOUNTED CURTAIN SIDE-IMPACT AND ROLLOVER SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
The side air bags are located in the outside of
the seatback of the front seats. The curtain air
bags are located in the side roof rails. All of the
information, cautions and warnings in this
manual apply and must be followed. The
side air bags and curtain air bags are designed
to inflate in higher severity side collisions,
although they may inflate if the forces in another
type of collision are similar to those of a higher
severity side impact. They are designed to inflate

When the side air bags and curtain air bags
inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed
by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful
and does not indicate a fire. Care should be
taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation
and choking. Those with a history of a breathing
condition should get fresh air promptly.
Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,
help to cushion the impact force on the chest
and pelvic area of the front occupants. Curtain
air bags help to cushion the impact force to the
head of occupants in the front and rear outboard
seating positions. They can help save lives and
reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating
side air bag or curtain air bag may cause
abrasions or other injuries. Side air bags and
curtain air bags do not provide restraint to the
lower body.
The seat belts should be correctly worn and the

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51

driver and passenger seated upright as far as
practical away from the side air bags. Rear seat
passengers should be seated as far away as
practical from the door finishers and side roof
rails. The side air bags and curtain air bags
inflate quickly in order to help protect the
occupants. Because of this, the force of the
side air bags and curtain air bags inflating can
increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too
close to, or is against, these air bag modules
during inflation. In a rollover, the curtain air bags
on both sides are designed to inflate. Under
both side-impact situations, the curtain air bags
will remain inflated for a short period of time.
The side air bags and curtain air bags
operate only when the ignition switch is in
the ON position.
After turning the ignition switch to the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7
seconds if the systems are operational.

WARNING
.

Do not place any objects near the
seatback of the front seats. Also, do
not place any objects (an umbrella,
bag, etc.) between the front door

finisher and the front seat. Such
objects may become dangerous
projectiles and cause injury if a side
air bag inflates.
.

Right after inflation, several side air
bag and curtain air bag system
components will be hot. Do not
touch them; you may severely burn
yourself.

No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring
of the side air bag and curtain air
bag systems. This is to prevent
damage to or accidental inflation
of the side air bag and curtain air
bag systems.

Do not make unauthorized changes
to your vehicle’s electrical system,
suspension system or side panel.
This could affect proper operation
of the side air bag and curtain air
bag systems.

Tampering with the side air bag
system may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not
change the front seats by placing
material near the seatbacks or by
installing additional trim material,
such as seat covers, around the side

1-52 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

air bag.
.

It is recommended you visit a
NISSAN dealer for work on and
around the side air bag and curtain
air bag. It is also recommended you
visit a NISSAN dealer for installation of electrical equipment. The
Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) wiring harnesses* should not
be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment
and probing devices should not be
used on the side air bag or curtain
air bag systems.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the side air bag and
curtain air bag systems and guide the buyer to
the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

SEAT BELTS WITH PRETENSIONERS
(front seats)

WARNING
.

The pretensioners cannot be reused
after activation. They must be re-

placed together with the retractor
and buckle as a unit.
.

If the vehicle becomes involved in a
collision but a pretensioner is not
activated, be sure to have the pretensioner system checked and, if
necessary, repaired. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring
of the pretensioner system. This is
to prevent damage to or accidental
activation of the pretensioners.
Tampering with the pretensioner
system may result in serious personal injury.
It is recommended you visit a
NISSAN dealer for work on and
around the pretensioner system. It
is also recommended you visit a
NISSAN dealer for installation of
electrical equipment. Unauthorized
electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on
the pretensioner system.
If you need to dispose of a pretensioner or scrap the vehicle, it is
recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service. Correct pretensioner disposal procedures are
set forth in the appropriate NISSAN
Service Manual. Incorrect disposal
procedures could cause personal
injury.
The pretensioner system may activate with the
supplemental air bag system in certain types of
collisions. Working with the seat belt retractor, it
helps tighten the seat belt when the vehicle
becomes involved in certain types of collisions,
helping to restrain front seat occupants.

light” (P.1-54). If the operation of the supplemental air bag warning light indicates there is a
malfunction, have the system checked. It is
recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the pretensioner system
and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections
in this Owner’s Manual.

The pretensioner is encased with the seat belt
retractor. These seat belts are used the same
way as conventional seat belts.
When a pretensioner activates, smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard. The
smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a
fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it
may cause irritation and choking. Those with a
history of a breathing condition should get fresh
air promptly.
After pretensioner activation, load limiters allow
the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to
reduce forces against the chest.
The supplemental air bag warning light
is
used to indicate malfunctions in the pretensioner
system. See “Supplemental air bag warning
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53

The supplemental air bag warning light
remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
. The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
. The supplemental air bag warning light does
not come on at all.
Under these conditions, the air bag and/or
pretensioner systems may not operate properly.
They must be checked and repaired. It is
recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
SSS1020

SPA1097

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING
LABELS

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING
LIGHT

Warning labels about the supplemental frontimpact air bag system are placed in the vehicle
as shown in the illustration.

The supplemental air bag warning light, displaying
in the instrument panel, monitors the
circuits for the air bag systems, pretensioners
and all related wiring.

1 SRS air bag
*

The warning labels are located on the surface of
the sun visors.

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off.
This means the system is operational.
If any of the following conditions occur, the air
bag and/or pretensioner systems need servicing:

1-54 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning
light is on, it could mean that the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag
and/or pretensioner systems will not
operate in an accident. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible. It
is recommended you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags
and pretensioners are designed to activate on a
one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is
damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light
will remain illuminated after inflation has occurred. These systems should be repaired and/
or replaced as soon as possible. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
When maintenance work is required on the
vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain
air bags and pretensioners and related parts
should be pointed out to the person performing
the maintenance. The ignition switch should
always be in the LOCK position when working
under the hood or inside the vehicle.

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. However, the air bag modules
and pretensioner system cannot be
repaired.
.

The front air bag, side air bag and
curtain air bag systems, and pretensioner system should be inspected
if there is any damage to the front
end or side portion of the vehicle. It
is recommended you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

If you need to dispose of a supplemental air bag or pretensioner or
scrap the vehicle, it is recommended
you visit a NISSAN dealer. Correct
supplemental air bag and pretensioner system disposal procedures
are set forth in the appropriate
NISSAN Service Manual. Incorrect
disposal procedures could cause
personal injury.

If there is an impact to your vehicle
from any direction, your Occupant
Classification Sensor (OCS) should
be checked to verify it is still
functioning correctly. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. The OCS
should be checked even if no air

WARNING
.

Once a front air bag, side air bag or
curtain air bag has inflated, the air
bag module will not function again
and must be replaced. Additionally,
the activated pretensioners must
also be replaced. The air bag module and pretensioner should be
replaced. It is recommended you

bags deploy as a result of the
impact. Failure to verify proper
OCS function may result in an
improper air bag deployment resulting in injury or death.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55

MEMO

1-56 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

MEMO

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57

MEMO

1-58 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

2 Instruments and controls
Cockpit ........................................................................................ 2-3
Instrument panel ........................................................................ 2-4
Meters and gauges ................................................................... 2-5
Speedometer and odometer ............................................ 2-7
Tachometer ........................................................................... 2-9
Engine coolant temperature gauge (Type B) (if
so equipped) ..................................................................... 2-10
Fuel gauge ......................................................................... 2-11
Vehicle information display (Type A) (if
so equipped) ..................................................................... 2-11
Vehicle information display (Type B) (if
so equipped) ..................................................................... 2-12
Outside air temperature .................................................. 2-12
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) position
indicator (if so equipped) ............................................... 2-12
Trip computer .................................................................... 2-13
Warning lights, indicator lights and
audible reminders ................................................................... 2-15
Checking lights ................................................................. 2-16
Warning lights ................................................................... 2-16
Indicator lights ................................................................... 2-21
Audible reminders ............................................................ 2-23
Integrated control system (if so equipped) ..................... 2-24
Drive mode ......................................................................... 2-24
Setup function ................................................................... 2-25

Drive information ............................................................
Eco information ...............................................................
Security systems ...................................................................
Vehicle Security System ...............................................
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ........................
Wiper and washer switch ...................................................
Rear window wiper and washer switch ..........................
Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch .......
Headlight and turn signal switch .......................................
Xenon headlights (if so equipped) ............................
Headlight switch ............................................................
Turn signal switch ..........................................................
Fog light switch (if so equipped) ..............................
Horn ..........................................................................................
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off switch ....................
Heated seats (if so equipped) ...........................................
Power outlet ............................................................................
Storage ....................................................................................
Cup holders .....................................................................
Cargo floor box ...............................................................
Glove box .........................................................................
Coat hook ........................................................................
Cargo cover (if so equipped) .....................................
Windows .................................................................................
Power windows ..............................................................

2-30
2-31
2-33
2-33
2-34
2-36
2-37
2-38
2-39
2-39
2-40
2-43
2-44
2-44
2-44
2-45
2-46
2-47
2-47
2-48
2-48
2-48
2-49
2-50
2-50

Moonroof (if so equipped) ...................................................
Power moonroof ...............................................................
Interior lights ..........................................................................
Map lights (if so equipped) ...........................................

2-52
2-52
2-54
2-54

Map light control switch (if so equipped) ............... 2-55
Cargo light ....................................................................... 2-55

COCKPIT
6.

7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

12.
13.
*:

Shift lever
— Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
— Manual Transmission (MT)
Fuse box cover
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) switch*
Tilting steering wheel lever
Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side)
— Audio control
— Siri Eyes Free
— Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System control
— NISSAN Voice Recognition System (with
navigation system)*
Steering-wheel-mounted controls (right side)
— Cruise control switches
Heated seat switch*
if so equipped

JVC0725X

1.
2.

Outside mirror remote control switch
Headlight, fog light and turn signal switch
— Headlight
— Turn signal light
— Fog light*
Paddle shifter*

Steering wheel
— Electric power steering
— Horn
— Driver’s supplemental air bag
Wiper and washer switch

Instruments and controls 2-3

INSTRUMENT PANEL
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
*:
**:

JVC0607X

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

2-4

Meters and gauges
Center ventilator
Audio system* or Navigation system**
Hazard warning flasher switch
Integrated Control System*
— Drive mode
— Heater and air conditioner control

Instruments and controls

6.
7.
8.

— Defroster switch
Heater and air conditioner control (models
without Integrated Control System)
— Defroster switch
Front passenger supplemental air bag
Side ventilator
Fuel-filler door release handle

Hood release handle
Push-button ignition switch
Auxiliary input jack/USB connection port*
Parking brake
Cup holder
Power outlet
Glove box
if so equipped
Refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

METERS AND GAUGES
*:

if so equipped

The needle indicators may move slightly
after the ignition switch is placed in the
OFF or LOCK position. This is not a
malfunction.

JVC0850X
Type A (if so equipped)

1.
2.

Tachometer
Vehicle information display
— Odometer/twin trip odometer
— Trip computer
— Torque vectoring AWD (AWD model)
— Outside air temperature
Fuel gauge

4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Speedometer
Warning/indicator lights
Instrument brightness control knob
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) position indicator*
RESET switch for trip odometer/Trip computer
mode switch

Instruments and controls 2-5

9.
*:

RESET switch for trip odometer/Trip computer
mode switch
if so equipped

The needle indicators may move slightly
after the ignition switch is placed in the
OFF or LOCK position. This is not a
malfunction.

CAUTION

SIC4601
Type B (if so equipped)

1.
2.
3.

2-6

Tachometer
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Vehicle information display
— Odometer/twin trip odometer
— Trip computer
— Torque vectoring AWD (AWD model)
— Outside air temperature

Instruments and controls

4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Fuel gauge
Speedometer
Warning/indicator lights
Instrument brightness control knob
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) position indicator*

For cleaning, use a soft cloth, dampened with water. Never use a rough
cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or
any kind of solvent or paper towel
with a chemical cleaning agent.
They will scratch or cause discoloration to the lens.

Do not spray any liquid such as
water on the meter lens. Spraying
liquid may cause the system to
malfunction.

Changing the display:
2
Pushing the reset switch *
located on the
meter panel changes the display as follows:
ODO ? TRIP A ? TRIP B ? Trip computer
mode ? ODO
For trip computer information, see “Trip computer” (P.2-13).
Resetting the trip odometer:
2 for approximately 1
Pushing the reset switch *
second resets the trip odometer to zero.
SIC4504
Speedometer

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed in
miles per hour (MPH) and kilometers per hour
(km/h).

JVI1323X
Odometer/twin trip odometer

Odometer/twin trip odometer (Type A) (if
so equipped)

1 are
The odometer and twin trip odometer *
displayed when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.

The odometer records the total distance the
vehicle has been driven.
The twin trip odometer records the distance of
individual trips.

Instruments and controls 2-7

Changing the display:
3
Pushing the reset switch *
located on the
meter panel changes the display as follows:
TRIP A ? TRIP B ? Trip computer mode ?
TRIP A
For trip computer information, see “Trip computer” (P.2-13).
Resetting the trip odometer:
3 for approximately 1
Pushing the reset switch *
second resets the trip odometer to zero.
SIC4571

SPA2809

Odometer/twin trip odometer

Odometer/twin trip odometer (Type B) (if
so equipped)

1 /twin trip odometer *
2 are
The odometer *
displayed when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.

The odometer records the total distance the
vehicle has been driven.
The twin trip odometer records the distance of
individual trips.

2-8

Instruments and controls

Loose fuel cap warning message

A
Push the reset switch *
for more than 1
second to reset the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning
message after the fuel cap has been tightened.
For additional information see “Fuel-filler cap”
(P.3-18) of this manual.

position as long as the low tire pressure warning
light
remains illuminated.
The CHECK TIRE PRES warning message can
A .
be turned off by pushing the reset switch *
For more information see “Low tire pressure
warning light” (P.2-18), “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P.5-3), and “Wheels and
tires” (P.8-28).

Extended storage fuse warning message

JVI1372X

Check tire pressure warning message
The CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warning
message is displayed when the low tire pressure
warning light
is illuminated and low tire
pressure is detected. Check and adjust the tire
pressure to the recommended COLD tire
pressure shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label. The CHECK TIRE PRES
warning message turns off when the low tire
pressure warning light
turns off.
The low tire pressure warning light
remains
illuminated until the tires are inflated to the
recommended COLD tire pressure. The CHECK
TIRE PRES warning message is displayed each
time the ignition switch is placed in the ON

The SHIP PHASE On/PUSH FUSE In warning
message may be displayed if the extended
storage fuse switch is not pushed in (switched
on). When this message is displayed, push in
(switch on) the extended storage fuse switch to
turn off the message. For more information, see
“Extended storage fuse switch” (P.8-20).

SIC4506

TACHOMETER
The tachometer indicates engine speed in
revolutions per minute (RPM). Do not rev the
1 .
engine into the red zone *

CAUTION
When engine speed approaches the red
zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce
engine speed. Operating the engine in
the red zone may cause serious engine
damage.

Instruments and controls 2-9

normal range, reduce vehicle speed to
decrease temperature. If gauge is over
the normal range, stop the vehicle as
soon as safely possible. If the engine is
overheated, continued operation of the
vehicle may seriously damage the engine. See “If your vehicle overheats”
(P.6-11) for immediate action required.

SIC4123

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
GAUGE (Type B) (if so equipped)

JVI1324X
Type A (if so equipped)

1
The gauge *
indicates the engine coolant
temperature.

The engine coolant temperature is within the
normal range when the gauge is within the zone
2 shown in the illustration.
*
The engine coolant temperature varies with the
outside air temperature and driving conditions.

CAUTION
If the gauge indicates engine coolant
temperature near the hot (H) end of the

2-10 Instruments and controls

SIC4124
Type B (if so equipped)

FUEL GAUGE

1 indicates the approximate fuel
The gauge *
level in the tank.

For additional information, see
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)”
(P.2-22).

The gauge may move slightly during braking,
turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge
registers 0 (empty).
The low fuel warning light
illuminates when
the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.
Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably
before the gauge reaches 0. There will be a
small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel
gauge reaches 0.
The
indicates that the fuel-filler door is
located on the front passenger’s side of the
vehicle.

CAUTION
.

If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the
malfunction indicator light (MIL)
may come on. Refuel as soon as
possible. After a few driving trips,
the
light should turn off. If the
light remains on after a few driving
trips, have the vehicle inspected. It
is recommended you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

JVI1325X

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY
(Type A) (if so equipped)
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the vehicle information display shows
the following information:
1.
2.
3.

Outside air temperature
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) position indicator (if so equipped)
Twin trip odometer/Odometer/Trip computer/
Instrument brightness control display

Instruments and controls 2-11

OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE
The outside air temperature is displayed in 8F or
8C.
When the outside air temperature becomes
378F (38C) or lower, the outside air temperature
display blinks to give a warning. The display will
stop blinking after 1 minute or when the outside
air temperature becomes 398F (48C) or above.
The display may differ from the actual outside
temperature displayed on various signs or billboards.
SIC4531

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY
(Type B) (if so equipped)
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the vehicle information display shows
the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION (CVT) POSITION INDICATOR
(if so equipped)

JVI1326X
Type A (if so equipped)

The Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
position indicator indicates the shift lever position when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.

Outside air temperature
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) position indicator (if so equipped)
Odometer/Instrument brightness control display
Twin trip odometer/Trip computer

SIC4532
Type B (if so equipped)

2-12 Instruments and controls

TRIP COMPUTER

Distance to empty (dte — mls or km)

The switch for the trip computer is located on
the meter panel.

The distance to empty (dte) mode provides you
with an estimation of the distance that can be
driven before refueling. The dte is constantly
being calculated, based on the amount of fuel in
the fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, modes of the trip computer can be
selected by pushing the trip computer mode
A .
switch *

A is
Each time the trip computer mode switch *
pushed, the display will change as follows:

For Type A (if so equipped):
ODO ? (TRIP A ? TRIP B) ? Current fuel
consumption ? Distance to empty (dte) ?
Average fuel consumption ? Torque vectoring
AWD (AWD model) ? ODO
For Type B (if so equipped):
(TRIP A ? TRIP B) ? Current fuel consumption
? Distance to empty (dte) ? Average fuel
consumption ? Elapsed time ? Torque vectoring AWD (AWD model) (? TRIP A)

Current fuel consumption
The current fuel consumption mode shows the
current fuel consumption.

The display is updated every 30 seconds.
The dte mode includes a low range warning
feature. When the fuel level is low, the dte mode
is automatically selected and the dte display will
A
blink. Push the trip computer mode switch *
to return to the mode that was selected before
the warning occurred.

The display is updated every 30 seconds. At
about the first 1/3 mile (500 m) after a reset, the
display shows “---”.

Elapsed time (Type B) (if so equipped)
The elapsed time mode shows the time since
the last reset. The displayed time can be reset
A
by pushing the trip computer mode switch *
for approximately 1 second.

When the fuel level drops even lower, the dte
display will change to “----”.
.
.

If the amount of fuel added is small, the
display just before the ignition switch is
turned off may continue to be displayed.
When driving uphill or rounding curves, the
fuel in the tank shifts, which may momentarily change the display.

Average fuel consumption (mpg or l
(liter)/100 km)
The average fuel consumption mode shows the
average fuel consumption since the last reset.
Resetting is done by pushing the trip computer
A for approximately 1 second.
mode switch *
Instruments and controls 2-13

Torque vectoring AWD (AWD model)
The Torque vectoring mode shows the current
amount of torque distributed to each wheel.
Each torque indicator is displayed as a bar
1 divided into 3 segments. The upper
graph *
indicator displays the current amount of torque
distribution (left and right) for the front wheels.
The lower indicator displays the current amount
of torque distribution (left and right) for the rear
wheels. The number of segments shows the
amount of torque currently distributed to each
wheel.
JVI1327X
Type A (if so equipped)

For Type A (if so equipped):
When the average fuel consumption or TRIP B
is displayed, push the trip computer mode
A
switch *
for longer than 3 seconds. The
average fuel consumption and trip odometer
(TRIP B only) displays will be reset at the same
time.

SIC4600
Type B (if so equipped)

2-14 Instruments and controls

Resetting displays

For Type B (if so equipped):
When the average fuel consumption, elapsed
time or TRIP B is displayed, push the trip
A for longer than 3
computer mode switch *
seconds. The average fuel consumption,
elapsed time and trip odometer (TRIP B only)
displays will be reset at the same time.

WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR
LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) warning light (AWD
model) (if so equipped)

Low fuel warning light

Engine start operation indicator light

Low tire pressure warning light

Exterior light indicator

Low washer fluid warning light (if so
equipped)

Front fog light indicator light (if so equipped)

P position selecting warning light

Front passenger air bag status light

Seat belt warning light

High beam indicator light

Charge warning light

Supplemental air bag warning light

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Door open warning light

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning light

Security indicator light
Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

High temperature warning light (if so
equipped)

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) indicator light (AWD
model) (if so equipped)
All-Wheel Drive (AWD)-V indicator light
(AWD model) (if so equipped)
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
indicator light (if so equipped)

Intelligent Key system warning light

Cruise indicator light

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
light

Brake warning light

Electric power steering warning light
Engine oil pressure warning light

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator
light

Instruments and controls 2-15

CHECKING LIGHTS

(AWD)” (P.5-29).)

With all doors closed, apply the parking brake,
fasten the seat belts and place the ignition
switch in the ON position without starting the
engine. The following lights (if so equipped) will
come on:
,

The following lights (if so equipped) come on
briefly and then go off:
,
,

,
,

If any light does not come on or operates in a
way other than described, it may indicate a
burned-out bulb and/or a system malfunction. It
is recommended you have the system checked
by a NISSAN dealer.

WARNING LIGHTS
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) warning
light (AWD model)
When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position,
the All-Wheel Drive (AWD) warning light will
illuminate. It will turn off soon after the engine is
started.
If the AWD system malfunctions or the revolution or radius of the front and the rear wheel
differs, the AWD warning light will either remain
illuminated or blink. (See “All-Wheel Drive

2-16 Instruments and controls

or
Anti-lock Braking System
(ABS) warning light
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
light illuminates and then turns off. This indicates
the ABS is operational.
If the ABS warning light illuminates while the
engine is running, or while driving, it may
indicate the ABS is not functioning properly.
Have the system checked. It is recommended
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock
function is turned off. The brake system then
operates normally, but without anti-lock assistance. (See “Brake system” (P.5-35).)

Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brake
and the foot brake systems.
Parking brake indicator:
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
the light illuminates when the parking brake is
applied.
Low brake fluid warning light:
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,

the light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the
light illuminates while the engine is running with
the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle
and perform the following:
1. Check the brake fluid level. If brake fluid is
necessary, add fluid and have the system
checked. It is recommended you have this
service performed by a NISSAN dealer.
(See “Brake and clutch fluid” (P.8-9).)
2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the
warning system checked. It is recommended
you have this service performed by a
NISSAN dealer.
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
indicator:
When the parking brake is released and the
brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake
warning light and the Anti-lock Braking System
(ABS) warning light illuminate, it may indicate
the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the
brake system checked, and if necessary repaired. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. (See “Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS) warning light” (P.2-16).)

WARNING
.

Your brake system may not be
working properly if the warning light
is on. Driving could be dangerous. If
you judge it to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest service station
for repairs. Otherwise, have your
vehicle towed because driving it
could be dangerous.

Charge warning light
If the light illuminates while the engine is running,
it may indicate the charging system is not
functioning properly. Turn the engine off and
check the alternator belt. If the belt is loose,
broken, missing or if the light remains on, have
your vehicle serviced immediately. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.

CAUTION

Pressing the brake pedal with the
engine stopped and/or low brake
fluid level may increase your stopping distance and braking will require greater pedal effort as well as
pedal travel.

Do not continue driving if the alternator
belt is loose, broken or missing.

If the brake fluid level is below the
minimum or MIN mark on the brake
fluid reservoir, do not drive until the
brake system has been checked. It
is recommended you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

This light illuminates when any of the doors and/
or liftgate are not closed securely while the
ignition switch is in the ON position.

tional.
If the electric power steering warning light
illuminates while the engine is running, it may
indicate the electric power steering is not
functioning properly and may need servicing.
Have the electric power steering checked. It is
recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
When the electric power steering warning light
illuminates with the engine running, the power
assist to the steering will cease operation but
you will still have control of the vehicle. At this
time, greater steering efforts are required to
operate the steering wheel, especially in sharp
turns and at low speeds.
See “Electric power steering” (P.5-34).

Door open warning light

Electric power steering warning
light
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
the electric power steering warning light illuminates. After starting the engine, the electric
power steering warning light turns off. This
indicates the electric power steering is opera-

Engine oil pressure warning light
This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the
light flickers or illuminates during normal driving,
pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine
immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other
authorized repair shop.
The engine oil pressure warning light is
not designed to indicate a low oil level.
Use the dipstick to check the oil level. (See
“Engine oil” (P.8-5).)

Instruments and controls 2-17

engine. (For the immediate action
required, see “If your vehicle overheats” (P.6-11).)

CAUTION
Running the engine with the engine oil
pressure warning light on could cause
serious damage to the engine almost
immediately. Such damage is not covered by warranty. Turn off the engine as
soon as it is safe to do so.

Intelligent Key system warning light
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, this light comes on for about 2 seconds
and then turns off.
This light illuminates or blinks as follows:

High temperature warning light (if
so equipped)
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
the high temperature warning light illuminates
and then turns off. This indicates that the high
temperature sensor in the engine coolant system
is operational.

CAUTION
.

If the high temperature warning
light illuminates while the engine
is running, it may indicate the engine temperature is extremely high.
Stop the vehicle safely as soon as
possible. If the vehicle is overheated, continuing vehicle operation may seriously damage the

2-18 Instruments and controls

The light blinks in yellow when the door is
closed with the Intelligent Key left outside
the vehicle and the ignition switch in the
ACC or ON position. Make sure that the
Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.
. The light blinks in green when the Intelligent
Key battery is running out of power. Replace
the battery with a new one. (See “Intelligent
Key battery replacement” (P.8-20).)
. The light illuminates in yellow when it warns
of a malfunction with Intelligent Key system.
If the warning light illuminates in yellow while the
engine is stopped, it may be impossible to start
the engine. If the light comes on while the engine
is running, you can drive the vehicle. However in
these cases, it is recommended you visit a
NISSAN dealer for repair as soon as possible.

Low fuel warning light
This light illuminates when the fuel in the tank is
getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient,
preferably before the fuel gauge reaches the 0
(empty) position.
There will be a small reserve of fuel
remaining in the tank when the fuel gauge
reaches the 0 position.

Low tire pressure warning light
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire
pressure of all tires except the spare.
The low tire pressure warning light warns of low
tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not
functioning properly.
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, this light illuminates for about 1 second
and turns off.
Low tire pressure warning:
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire
pressure, the warning light will illuminate. A
CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warning message is also displayed in the vehicle information
display.
When the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates, you should stop and adjust the tire

pressure to the recommended COLD tire
pressure shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label. The low tire pressure warning
light does not automatically turn off when the tire
pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to
the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to
activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire
pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure
gauge to check the tire pressure.
The low tire pressure warning light remains
illuminated until the tires are inflated to the
recommended COLD tire pressure. The CHECK
TIRE PRES warning message is displayed each
time the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position as long as the low tire pressure warning
light remains illuminated.
For additional information, see “Check tire
pressure warning message” (P.2-9), “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P.5-3) and
“Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P.63).
TPMS malfunction:
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low
tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position. The light will remain
on after 1 minute. The CHECK TIRE PRES
warning message is not displayed if the low tire

pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a
TPMS malfunction. Have the system checked. It
is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

recommended COLD tire pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label to turn the low
tire pressure warning light OFF. If
the light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure,
a tire may be flat or the TPMS may
be malfunctioning. If you have a flat
tire, replace it with a spare tire as
soon as possible. If no tire is flat
and all tires are properly inflated, it
is recommended you consult a
NISSAN dealer.

For additional information, see “Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P.5-3).

WARNING
.

If the light does not illuminate with
the ignition switch placed in the ON
position, have the vehicle checked.
It is recommended you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service as
soon as possible.
If the light illuminates while driving,
avoid sudden steering maneuvers or
abrupt braking, reduce vehicle
speed, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop the vehicle as
soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently
damage the tires and increase the
likelihood of tire failure. Serious
vehicle damage could occur and
may lead to an accident and could
result in serious personal injury.
Check the tire pressure for all four
tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the

Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could
affect the proper operation of the
TPMS.
Instruments and controls 2-19

An inside warning chime will also sound.

CAUTION
.

The TPMS is not a substitute for the
regular tire pressure check. Be sure
to check the tire pressure regularly.

If the vehicle is being driven at
speeds of less than 16 MPH (25
km/h), the TPMS may not operate
correctly.

Be sure to install the specified size
of tires to the four wheels correctly.

Low washer fluid warning light
(Canada only)
This light illuminates when the washer fluid is at
a low level. Add washer fluid as necessary. (See
“Window washer fluid” (P.8-9).)

See “Intelligent Key system” (P.3-6).

Seat belt warning light
The light and chime remind you to fasten seat
belts. The light illuminates whenever the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position, and will
remain illuminated until the driver’s seat belt is
fastened. At the same time, the chime will sound
for about 6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt
is securely fastened.
The seat belt warning light for the front
passenger will illuminate if the seat belt is not
fastened when the front passenger’s seat is
occupied. For about 5 seconds after the ignition
switch is in the ON position, the system does
not activate the warning light for the front
passenger.
See “Seat belts” (P.1-10) for precautions on
seat belt usage.

P position selecting warning light
The warning light blinks in red when the ignition
switch is pushed to stop the engine with the
shift lever in any position except the P (Park)
position.
If this warning appears, move the shift lever to
the P (Park) position or push the ignition switch
to the ON position.

2-20 Instruments and controls

Supplemental air bag warning light
After placing the ignition switch in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning light
will illuminate. The supplemental air bag warning
light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the
supplemental front air bag and supplemental
side air bag, curtain air bag systems and/or
pretensioner seat belt are operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and
pretensioner systems need servicing.
.

The supplemental air bag warning light
remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
. The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
. The supplemental air bag warning light does
not illuminate at all.
It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for
these services.
Unless checked and repaired, the Supplemental
Restraint Systems and/or the pretensioners may
not function properly.
For additional information, see “Supplemental
restraint system” (P.1-38).

WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning
light is on, it could mean that the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag
and/or pretensioner systems will not
operate in an accident. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle checked. It is recommended you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
warning light
When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position,
the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning
light illuminates and then turns off.
The light will blink when the Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) system or the traction control
system is operating, thus alerting the driver that
the vehicle is nearing its traction limits. The road
surface may be slippery.
If the VDC warning light illuminates while the
VDC system is on, this light alerts the driver to
the fact that the VDC system’s fail-safe mode is
operating, for example the VDC system may not
be functioning properly. Have the system
checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. If a malfunction occurs in
the system, the VDC system function will be
canceled but the vehicle is still driveable. For
additional information, see “Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) system” (P.5-37) of this manual.

INDICATOR LIGHTS
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) indicator
light (AWD model)
When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position,
the All-Wheel Drive (AWD) indicator light
illuminates and then turns off.
When selecting AWD mode while the engine is
running, the AWD indicator light illuminates.
(See “All-Wheel Drive (AWD)” (P.5-29).)

All-Wheel Drive (AWD-V) indicator
light (AWD model)
When selecting AWD-V mode while the engine
is running, the AWD-V indicator light illuminates.
(See “All-Wheel Drive (AWD)” (P.5-29).)

Cruise indicator light
Cruise main switch indicator:
This light illuminates when the cruise control
main switch is pushed. The light turns off when
the main switch is pushed again. When the
cruise indicator light illuminates, the cruise
control system is operational.
Cruise malfunction:
If the cruise indicator light blinks while the
engine is running, it may indicate the cruise
control system is not functioning properly. Have
the system checked. It is recommended you visit
a NISSAN dealer for this service.
See “Cruise control” (P.5-26).

Engine start operation indicator
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) indicator light (if so equipped)
When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position,
the Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
indicator light illuminates and then turns off.

light
This light appears when the shift lever is in the P
(Park) position (Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) models) or N (Neutral) position
(Manual Transmission (MT) models). This light
means that the engine will start by pushing the
ignition switch with the brake pedal (CVT
models) or clutch pedal (MT models) depressed.
You can start the engine directly in any position.

Instruments and controls 2-21

Exterior light indicator
This indicator illuminates when the headlight
switch is turned to the AUTO (if so equipped),
or
position and the front parking lights,
instrument panel lights, rear combination lights,
license plate lights or headlights are on. The
indicator turns off when these lights are turned
off.

Front fog light indicator light (if so
equipped)
The front fog light indicator light illuminates
when the front fog lights are on. (See “Fog light
switch” (P.2-44).)

Front passenger air bag status light
The front passenger air bag status light (located
on the center of the instrument panel) will be lit
and the passenger front air bag will be OFF
depending on how the front passenger seat is
being used.
For front passenger air bag status light operation, see “NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
(front seats)” (P.1-44) of this manual.

2-22 Instruments and controls

High beam indicator light
This light illuminates when the headlight high
beam is on and goes out when the low beam is
selected.

Operation:
The malfunction indicator light will come on in
one of two ways:
.

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
If the malfunction indicator light comes on
steady or blinks while the engine is running, it
may indicate a potential emission control and/or
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) malfunction.
The malfunction indicator light may also illuminate steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or
missing, or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check
to make sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and
closed tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3
US gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.
After a few driving trips, the
light should
turn off if no other potential emission control
system malfunction exists.
If this indicator light remains on for 20 seconds
and then blinks for 10 seconds when the engine
is not running, it indicates that the vehicle is not
ready for an emission control system inspection/
maintenance test. (See “Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test” (P.10-21).)

Malfunction indicator light illuminated steady
— An emission control system and/or CVT
malfunction has been detected. Check the
fuel-filler cap if the LOOSE FUEL CAP
warning message is displayed on the twin
trip odometer. If the fuel-filler cap is loose or
missing, tighten or install the cap and
continue to drive the vehicle. The
light
should turn off after a few driving trips. If the
light does not turn off after a few driving
trips, have the vehicle inspected. It is
recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service. You do not need to have
your vehicle towed to the dealer.
Malfunction indicator light blinking — An
engine misfire has been detected which may
damage the emission control system.
To reduce or avoid emission control system
damage:
1) Do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH
(72 km/h).
2) Avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.
3) Avoid steep uphill grades.
4) If possible, reduce the amount of cargo
being hauled or towed.
The malfunction indicator light may stop

blinking and remain on.
Have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service. You do not need to have your
vehicle towed to the dealer.

CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation without
having the emission control system
and/or CVT system checked and repaired as necessary could lead to poor
driveability, reduced fuel economy, and
possible damage to the emission control system.

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights
The light flashes when the turn signal switch
lever or hazard switch is turned on.

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off
indicator light
When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position,
the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator
light illuminates and then turns off.
The light comes on when the Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) off switch is pushed to OFF. This
indicates that the VDC system and traction
control system are not operating.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Key reminder chime

Security indicator light
The light blinks when the ignition switch is in the
ACC, OFF or LOCK position. This function
indicates the security system equipped on the
vehicle is operational.
If the security system is malfunctioning, this light
will remain on while the ignition switch is in the
ON position. For additional information, see
“Security systems” (P.2-33).

A chime will sound if the driver side door is
opened while the ignition switch is pushed to
the ACC position.
Make sure the ignition switch is pushed to the
OFF position, and take the Intelligent Key with
you when leaving the vehicle.

Light reminder chime
The light reminder chime will sound when the
driver side door is opened with the headlight
switch in the
or
position, and the
ignition switch is in the ACC, OFF or LOCK
position.
Turn the light switch off when you leave the
vehicle.

Brake pad wear warning
The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it
will make a high pitched scraping sound when
the vehicle is in motion. This scraping sound will
first occur only when the brake pedal is
depressed. After more wear of the brake pad,
the sound will always be heard even if the brake
pedal is not depressed. Have the brakes
checked as soon as possible if the warning
sound is heard.

Parking brake reminder chime
The parking brake reminder chime will sound if
the vehicle is driven at more than 4 MPH (7
km/h) with the parking brake applied. Stop the
vehicle and release the parking brake.

Instruments and controls 2-23

INTEGRATED CONTROL SYSTEM (if
so equipped)
Seat belt warning chime
The seat belt warning chime will sound for about
6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt is
securely fastened.

The Integrated Control System is located below
the audio system or navigation system (if so
equipped). Two Integrated Control System
modes can be selected: Drive mode and
Climate Control mode.
Depending on which Integrated Control System
mode is selected (Drive mode or Climate
Control mode), the screen display and some
button functions will change.
.

2-24 Instruments and controls

Drive mode
In the Drive mode, three types of driving
modes can be selected: NORMAL, SPORT
and ECO. See “Drive mode” (P.5-22). In
addition, while in the Drive mode, SETUP,
Drive information and ECO information can
be displayed and adjusted. See “Drive
mode” (P.2-24).
Climate Control mode
In the Climate Control mode, the climate
control can be set and adjusted. See
“Automatic air conditioner (with Integrated
Control System)” (P.4-32).

DRIVE MODE
When the Drive mode select button is pressed,
the display and buttons appear as shown.

SETUP FUNCTION
While in the Drive mode, the following items can
be set up by pressing the SETUP button.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

SIC4623

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Drive mode select button
SETUP button
Drive mode NORMAL button
Drive mode SPORT button
Drive mode ECO button
Display screen
Drive information button

8.
9.

Display Brightness
Button Brightness
Clock Time Setting
Select Language
Select Units
Auto Interior Illumination
Selective Door unlock
Auto Headlight Sensitivity (if so equipped)
CLIMATE ECO

NOTE:
. The SETUP function cannot be adjusted while driving.
. When the battery is disconnected, the
SETUP memory is erased and reverts to
the default settings. If necessary, reset
the SETUP memory after reconnecting
the battery.

ECO information button
ENTER button/Selection dial

Instruments and controls 2-25

Clock Time Setting
NOTE:
Clock Time Setting is used for displaying
the ECO information. See “Eco information” (P.2-31).

SIC4617

Setting Display Brightness and Button
Brightness
1. Press the Drive Mode Select button.
2. Press the SETUP button.
3. Turn the Selection dial to “Display Brightness” or “Button Brightness” then press the
ENTER button.

SIC4557

4. Turn the Selection dial to + to increase
brightness or to í to decrease brightness,
then press the ENTER button to apply the
selection.
Display Brightness and Button Brightness can
be manually adjusted during the day (when the
headlight switch is off) or at night (when the
headlight switch is on).
When the bar is at the minimum or maximum
brightness level, the brightness level is the same
as the daytime level (headlight switch is on) or
nighttime level (headlight switch off).

2-26 Instruments and controls

SIC4558

1. Press the Drive Mode Select button.
2. Press the SETUP button.
3. Turn the Selection dial to “Clock Time
Setting”, then press the ENTER button.

SIC4559

4. Turn the Selection dial to select the day of
the week, then press the ENTER button to
apply the selection.
5. Turn the Selection dial to select the hour and
AM or PM, then press the ENTER button to
apply the selection.

SIC4560

Select Language
1. Press the Drive Mode Select button.
2. Press the SETUP button.
3. Turn the Selection dial to “Select Language”, then press the ENTER button.

6. Turn the Selection dial to select the minutes,
then press the ENTER button to apply the
selection.

Instruments and controls 2-27

SIC4561

4. Turn the Selection dial to select the preferred language, then press the ENTER
button to apply the selection.

SIC4580

Select Units
1. Press the Drive Mode Select button.
2. Press the SETUP button.
3. Turn the Selection dial to “Select Units” then
press the ENTER button.

2-28 Instruments and controls

SIC4581

4. Turn the Selection dial to select “US” or
“METRIC”, then press the ENTER button to
apply the selection.

SIC4605

SIC4606

Auto Interior Illumination

Selective Door Unlock

Select to turn the illumination of the interior
lights on or off when any door is unlocked.

When this item is turned on, only the driver’s
door is unlocked after the door unlock operation
is performed once. All of the doors can be
unlocked if the door unlock operation is performed again within 1 minute.

1. Press the Drive Mode Select button.
2. Press the SETUP button.
3. Turn the Selection dial to “Auto Interior
Illumination” then press the ENTER button
to switch on or off.

When this item is turned off, all the doors will be
unlocked after the door unlock operation is
performed once.

SIC4607

Auto Headlight Sensitivity (if so
equipped)
Select to adjust the sensitivity of the automatic
headlight.
1. Press the Drive Mode Select button.
2. Press the SETUP button.
3. Turn the Selection dial to “Auto Headlight
Sensitivity” then press the ENTER button.

1. Press the Drive Mode Select button.
2. Press the SETUP button.
3. Turn the Selection dial to “Selective Door
Unlock” then press the ENTER button to
switch on or off.
Instruments and controls 2-29

Average speed (km/h or MPH)
The average speed shows the average vehicle
speed since the last reset.

Trip distance (km or MILES)
The trip distance shows the distance driven
since the last reset.
To reset the elapsed time, average speed and
trip distance, push the ENTER button for more
than one second. All three drive information
displays will reset at the same time.
SIC4583

4. Turn the Selection dial to + to increase
sensitivity or to í to decrease sensitivity,
then press the ENTER button to apply the
selection.

JVI0324X

DRIVE INFORMATION
While in the Drive mode, push the Drive
information button to display elapsed time,
average speed and trip distance. Pressing the
Drive information button a second time will
display the G (gravity)-Force screen.

Elapsed time
The elapsed time shows the time since the last
reset.

2-30 Instruments and controls

The following ECO INFO mode will appear on
the display by pushing the ECO information
button, then turning the selection dial to scroll
through the different screens.
While driving, only one ECO information screen
is displayed. The vehicle must be stopped to
scroll through the different screens.

SIC4618

G-Force screen
The G (gravity)-Force screen displays the
current acceleration and deceleration (front-torear) and cornering (side-to-side) G-Force on
the vehicle.

ECO INFORMATION

CAUTION
Do not adjust the display controls while
driving so that full attention may given
to vehicle operation.

Instruments and controls 2-31

NOTE:
When the clock is not set, the ECO
information (daily and weekly) cannot be
used.

Reset at Start
Records of up to the past 4 times of each time of
ignition switch ON fuel consumption can be
shown on the display.

Manual Reset
Records of up to the past 4 times of resetting
fuel consumption can be shown on the display.
The displayed ECO INFO can be reset by
pushing the ENTER button for longer than 1
second.

JVI1165X

Daily Reset

Weekly Reset

Records of up to the past 4 days of fuel
consumption can be shown on the display.

Records of up to the past 4 weeks of each
week’s fuel consumption can be shown on the
display.

2-32 Instruments and controls

SECURITY SYSTEMS
prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior
or exterior vehicle components in all situations.
Always secure your vehicle even if parking for a
brief period. Never leave your keys in the vehicle,
and always lock it when unattended. Be aware
of your surroundings, and park in secure, well-lit
areas whenever possible.

JVI1163X

Your vehicle has two types of security systems,
as follows:
. Vehicle security system
. NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
The security condition will be shown by the
security indicator light.

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM
The vehicle security system provides visual and
audio alarm signals if someone opens the doors,
or liftgate when the system is armed. It is not,
however, a motion detection type system that
activates when a vehicle is moved or when a
vibration occurs.
The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot

Many devices offering additional protection,
such as component locks, identification markers,
and tracking systems, are available at auto
supply stores and specialty shops. Your
NISSAN dealer may also offer such equipment.
Check with your insurance company to see if
you may be eligible for discounts for various
theft protection features.

SIC2045

How to arm the vehicle security system
1. Close all windows.
The system can be armed even if the
windows are open.
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position
and remove the Intelligent Key from the
vehicle.
3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. The doors
can be locked with:
. the LOCK
button on the Intelligent
Key
. any request switch
. the power door lock switch
Instruments and controls 2-33

. the mechanical key
4. Confirm that the security indicator light
illuminates. The security indicator light stays
on for about 30 seconds. The vehicle
security system is now pre-armed. After
about 30 seconds the vehicle security
system automatically shifts into the armed
phase. The security light begins to flash
once every approximately 3 seconds. If,
during this 30-second pre-arm time period,
the door is unlocked, or the ignition switch is
placed in the ACC or ON position, the
system will not arm.

Even when the driver and/or passengers
are in the vehicle, the system will activate
with all doors locked with the ignition
switch in the LOCK position. When placing
the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position, the system will be released.

Vehicle security system activation
The vehicle security system will give the following alarm:
.
.

The headlights blink and the horn sounds
intermittently.
The alarm automatically turns off after
approximately 50 seconds. However, the
alarm reactivates if the vehicle is tampered
with again.

2-34 Instruments and controls

The alarm is activated by:
.

Unlocking the door without using the
Intelligent Key, the request switch or the
key. (Even if the door is opened by releasing
the door inside lock knob, the alarm will
activate.)

How to stop an activated alarm
The alarm will stop by unlocking a door by
pushing the UNLOCK
button on the
Intelligent Key, pushing the request switch or
using the key. The alarm will not stop if the
ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON
position.

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position
for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
LOCK position and wait approximately 10
seconds.
3. Repeat step 1 and 2 again.
4. Restart the engine while holding the device
(which may have caused the interference)
separate from the registered key.
If this procedure allows the engine to start,
NISSAN recommends placing the registered key on a separate key ring to avoid
interference from other devices.

If the system does not operate as described above, have it checked. It is
recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.

Statement related to section 15 of FCC
rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
System (CONT ASSY-BCM. ANT ASSYIMMOBILISER)

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM

FCC Notice:

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not
allow the engine to start without the use of the
registered key.

This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.

If the engine fails to start using the registered
key, it may be due to interference caused by
another registered key, an automated toll road
device or automated payment device on the key
ring. Restart the engine using the following
procedures:

For USA:

Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible

soon as possible. Please bring all registered keys that you have. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation
of the device.
SIC2045

Security indicator light
The security indicator light is located on the
meter panel. It indicates the status of the
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System.
The light blinks whenever the ignition switch is in
the LOCK, OFF or ACC position. This function
indicates the security systems equipped on the
vehicle are operational.
If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is
malfunctioning, this light will remain on while the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
If the light still remains on and/or the
engine will not start, seek service for the
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System as
Instruments and controls 2-35

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer
solution may freeze on the windshield
and obscure your vision which may lead
to an accident. Warm windshield with
the defroster before you wash the
windshield.

CAUTION
.

Do not operate the washer continuously for more than 30 seconds.

Do not operate the washer if the
reservoir tank is empty.

Do not fill the window washer
reservoir tank with washer fluid
concentrates at full strength. Some
methyl alcohol based washer fluid
concentrates may permanently stain
the grille if spilled while filling the
window washer reservoir tank.

Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates
with water to the manufacturer’s
recommended levels before pouring
the fluid into the window washer

2-36 Instruments and controls

reservoir tank. Do not use the
window washer reservoir tank to
mix the washer fluid concentrate
and water.
If the windshield wiper operation is interrupted by snow or ice, the wiper may stop
moving to protect its motor. If this occurs,
turn the wiper switch to the OFF position
and remove the snow or ice that is on and
around the wiper arms. In approximately 1
minute, turn the switch on again to operate
the wiper.

JVI1010X

The windshield wiper and washer operates
when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the
following speed:
1
*
2
*
3
*

Intermittent — intermittent operation can be
adjusted by turning the knob toward A
(Slower) or B (Faster).
Low — continuous low speed operation
High — continuous high speed operation

4
Push the lever up *
to have one sweep
operation of the wiper.
5
Pull the lever toward you *
to operate the
washer. Then the wiper will also operate several
times.

REAR WINDOW WIPER AND
WASHER SWITCH
Pulling up the wiper arm:

— Make sure the shift lever is in
the P (Park) position (Continuously Variable Transmission
models).

The windshield wipers must be in the service
position in order to replace the wiper blades.
To move the wiper blades to the service position,
follow this procedure:

— Make sure the shift lever is in
the N (Neutral) position, with the
parking brake fully applied
(Manual Transmission models).

When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position or within 60 seconds of placing the
ignition switch to the “OFF” position, lift the
4
lever up *
two times in less than 0.5
seconds. The windshield wipers will move to
the service position automatically, and the
wiper blades can now be replaced. To
replace the wiper blades, see “Windshield
wiper blades” (P.8-15).
To move the wiper blades back to the original
position:
4 or push the lever down
Lift the lever up *
to operate at any wiper speed.

WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer
solution may freeze on the rear window
glass and obscure your vision. Warm
the rear window with the defroster
before you wash the rear window.

— Never allow the passengers to
operate the windshield wiper
switch inadvertently.
.

Do not operate the windshield wiper
while the wiper arm is pulled up. The
wiper arm may be damaged.

CAUTION
.

Do not operate the washer continuously for more than 30 seconds.

Do not operate the washer if the
reservoir tank is empty.

Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates
with water to the manufacturer’s
recommended levels before pouring
the fluid into the window washer
reservoir tank. Do not use the

CAUTION
.

This function can be operated even
if the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position. However, to prevent an
accident or damage when pulling
up the wiper arm, be sure to observe
the following precautions.

Instruments and controls 2-37

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE
MIRROR DEFROSTER SWITCH
window washer reservoir tank to
mix the washer fluid concentrate
and water.
If the rear window wiper operation is
interrupted by snow or ice, the wiper may
stop moving to protect its motor. If this
occurs, turn the wiper switch to the OFF
position and remove the snow or ice that is
on and around the wiper arms. In approximately 1 minute, turn the switch on again
to operate the wiper.
SIC4520

SIC3666

The rear window wiper and washer operate
when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Type A (if so equipped)

Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF position
to operate the wiper.
1
*
2
*

Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation (not
adjustable)
Low (ON) — continuous low speed operation

3
Push the switch forward *
to operate the
washer. Then the wiper will also operate several
times.

SIC4519
Type B (if so equipped)

2-38 Instruments and controls

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH
To defog/defrost the rear window glass and
outside mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine
1 on. The indicator light
and push the switch *
2 will illuminate. Push the switch again to turn
*
the defroster off.

XENON HEADLIGHTS (if so equipped)

WARNING
HIGH VOLTAGE

It will automatically turn off in approximately 15
minutes.

When xenon headlights are on, they
produce a high voltage. To prevent
an electric shock, never attempt to
modify or disassemble. It is recommended to have your xenon headlights replaced at a NISSAN dealer.

Xenon headlights provide considerably more light than conventional
headlights. If they are not correctly
aimed, they might temporarily blind
an oncoming driver or the driver
ahead of you and cause a serious
accident. If headlights are not aimed
correctly, it is recommended to take
your vehicle to a NISSAN dealer and
have the headlights adjusted correctly.

CAUTION
When cleaning the inner side of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the rear window defroster.

tion. It is generally desirable not to turn
off the headlights for short intervals
(for example, when the vehicle stops at
a traffic signal).
If the xenon headlight bulb is close to
burning out, the brightness will drastically decrease, the light will start
blinking, or the color of the light will
become reddish. If one or more of the
above signs appear, it is recommended
you visit a NISSAN dealer.

When the xenon headlight is initially turned on,
its brightness or color varies slightly. However,
the color and brightness will soon stabilize.
.

The life of xenon headlights will be
shortened by frequent on-off operaInstruments and controls 2-39

headlights when it is light.
The headlights will also be turned on automatically at twilight or in rainy weather (when the
windshield wiper is operated continuously).
If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position and one of the doors is opened and this
condition is continued, the headlights remain on
for 5 minutes.

SIC3668

SIC3669

HEADLIGHT SWITCH

Autolight system (if so equipped)

Lighting

The autolight system allows the headlights to be
set so they turn on and off automatically.

1
*

2
*

Turn the switch to the
position:
The front parking, side marker, tail, license plate,
instrument lights will come on. However, the
daytime running light (for NISMO models and
Canada) will turn off.
Turn the switch to the
position:
Headlights will come on and all the other lights
remain on. However, the daytime running light
(for NISMO models and Canada) will turn off.

To set the autolight system:
1. Make sure the headlight switch is in the
1 .
AUTO position *
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
3. The autolight system automatically turns the
headlights on and off.
To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch
to the OFF,
or
position.
The autolight system can turn on the headlights
automatically when it is dark and turn off the

2-40 Instruments and controls

Battery saver system
.

When the headlight switch is in the
or
position while the ignition switch is in
the ON position, the lights will automatically
turn off within a period of time after the
ignition switch has been placed in the OFF
position.
When the headlight switch remains in the
or
position after the lights automatically turn off, the lights will turn on when
the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.

SAA1232

Be sure not to put anything on top of the
1 located on the top of the
photo sensor *
instrument panel. The photo sensor controls the autolight; if it is covered, the
photo sensor reacts as if it is dark and the
headlights will illuminate.

Automatic headlights off delay
You can keep the headlights on for up to 45
seconds after you place the ignition switch in the
OFF position and open any door then close all
the doors.

SIC3670

CAUTION

Headlight beam select
1
*
2
*
3
*

To select the low beam, put the lever in the
neutral position as shown.
To select the high beam, push the lever forward
position. Pull it
while the switch is in the
back to select the low beam.
Pulling the lever toward you will flash the
headlight high beam even when the headlight
switch is in the OFF position.

When you turn on the headlight
switch again after the lights automatically turn off, the lights will not
turn off automatically. Be sure to
turn the light switch to the OFF
position when you leave the vehicle
for extended periods of time, otherwise the battery will be discharged.

Never leave the light switch on
when the engine is not running for
extended periods of time even if the
headlights turn off automatically.

Instruments and controls 2-41

Daytime running light system (for NISMO
models and Canada)
The daytime running lights automatically illuminate when the engine is started with the parking
brake released. The daytime running lights
operate with the headlight switch in the OFF
position. Turn the headlight switch to the
position for full illumination when driving at night.
(The daytime running lights will turn off.)
If the parking brake is applied before the engine
is started, the daytime running lights do not
illuminate. The daytime running lights illuminate
once the parking brake is released. The daytime
running lights will remain on until the ignition
switch is placed in the OFF position.

JVI1342X
Type A (if so equipped)

SIC4517
Type B (if so equipped)

WARNING
When the daytime running light system
is active, tail lights on your vehicle are
not on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on
your headlights. Failure to do so could
cause an accident injuring yourself and
others.

JVI1343X
Type A (if so equipped)

2-42 Instruments and controls

SIC4129
Type B (if so equipped)

Instrument brightness control

Choose the appropriate method to signal a lane
change based on road and traffic conditions.

The instrument brightness control operates
when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
A to adjust the brightPush the control knob *
ness of the instrument panel lights. The brightB will be shown briefly in the
ness indicator *
vehicle information display when the control is
turned.

When the brightness level reaches the maximum
or minimum, a beep will sound.

SIC3671

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
1 Turn signal
*

Move the lever up or down to signal the turning
direction. When the turn is completed, the turn
signals cancel automatically.
2 Lane change signal
*

Move the lever up or down until the turn signal
begins to flash, but the lever does not latch, to
signal a lane change. Hold the lever until the lane
change is completed.
Move the lever up or down until the turn signal
begins to flash, but the lever does not latch, and
release the lever. The turn signal will automatically flash three times.
Instruments and controls 2-43

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
OFF SWITCH

HORN

SIC4521

SIC3672

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)
To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight
switch to the
position, then turn the switch
to the
position. To turn them off, turn the
switch to the OFF position.
The headlights must be on for the fog lights to
operate. The fog lights automatically turn off
when the high beam headlights are selected.

To sound the horn, push the center pad area of
the steering wheel.

WARNING
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so
could affect proper operation of the
supplemental front air bag system.
Tampering with the supplemental front
air bag system may result in serious
personal injury.

SIC4544

The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle
Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most
driving conditions.
If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC
system reduces the engine output to reduce
wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced
even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor.
If maximum engine power is needed to free a
stuck vehicle, turn the VDC system off.
To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF
switch. The
indicator light will illuminate.
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the
engine to turn on the system. (See “Vehicle
Dynamic Control (VDC) system” (P.5-37).)

2-44 Instruments and controls

HEATED SEATS (if so equipped)

WARNING
Do not use or allow occupants to use
the seat heater if you or the occupants
cannot monitor elevated seat temperatures or have an inability to feel pain in
body parts that contact the seat. Use of
the seat heater by such people could
result in serious injury.

CAUTION

damage to the heater.
.

Any liquid spilled on the heated seat
should be removed immediately
with a dry cloth.

When cleaning the seat, never use
gasoline, thinner, or any similar
materials.

If any malfunctions are found or the
heated seat does not operate, turn
the switch off and have the system
checked. It is recommended you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

SIC2770

The battery could run down if the
seat heater is operated while the
engine is not running.

The seats are warmed by built-in heaters. The
switches located on the center console can be
operated independently of each other.

Do not use the seat heater for
extended periods or when no one
is using the seat.

1. Start the engine.

Do not put anything on the seat
which insulates heat, such as a
blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc.
Otherwise, the seat may become
overheated.
Do not place anything hard or heavy
on the seat or pierce it with a pin or
similar object. This may result in

2. Select heat range.
1 For high heat, push the HI (High) side of
*

the switch.

2 For low heat, push the LO (Low) side of
*

the switch.

The indicator light in the switch
illuminate when the heater is on.

3
*

will

3. To turn off the heater, return the switch to
the level position. Make sure the indicator
light goes off.
Instruments and controls 2-45

POWER OUTLET
The heater is controlled by a thermostat,
automatically turning the heater on and off.
The indicator light will remain on as long as
the switch is on.
When the vehicle’s interior is warmed, or
before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn
off the switch.

SIC4525

The power outlet is located in the instrument
panel.

CAUTION

2-46 Instruments and controls

The outlet and plug may be hot
during or immediately after use.

Do not use with accessories that
exceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power
draw. Do not use double adapters or
more than one electrical accessory.

Use power outlet with the engine
running to avoid discharging the
vehicle battery.

Avoid using power outlet when the
air conditioner, headlights or rear
window defroster is on.

This power outlet is not designed
for use with a cigarette lighter unit.

Push the plug in as far as it will go.
If good contact is not made, the plug
may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may open.

Before inserting or disconnecting a
plug, be sure the electrical accessory being used is turned OFF.

When not in use, be sure to close
the cap. Do not allow water or any
liquid to contact the outlet.

STORAGE
Soft bottle holders

CUP HOLDERS

CAUTION

CAUTION
.

Avoid abrupt starting and braking
when the cup holder is being used
to prevent spilling the drink. If the
liquid is hot, it can scald you or your
passenger.

Do not use bottle holder for any
other objects that could be thrown
about in the vehicle and possibly
injure people during sudden braking
or an accident.

Use only soft cups in the cup holder.
Hard objects can injure you in an
accident.

Do not use bottle holder for open
liquid containers.

SIC4527
Center console

SIC4528
Door (front and rear)

Instruments and controls 2-47

SIC4529

CARGO FLOOR BOX
1. To open the cargo floor box, pull the board
A .
*

SIC4526

GLOVE BOX

COAT HOOK

WARNING
Keep glove box lid closed while driving
to help prevent injury in an accident or a
sudden stop.
To open the glove box, pull the handle.
To close, push the lid in until the lock latches.
The glove box light illuminates when the headlight switch is turned on.

2-48 Instruments and controls

SIC3505

The coat hook is located above the rear side
window.

CAUTION
Do not apply a total load of more than 2
kg (4 lb) to the hook.

CARGO COVER (if so equipped)

To remove the cargo cover:
1. Open the liftgate.

WARNING
.

2. Remove the rope from the liftgate side
garnish.

Never put anything on the cargo
cover, no matter how small. Any
object on it could cause an injury
in an accident or sudden stop.

Do not leave the cargo cover in the
vehicle with it disengaged from the
holder.

The child restraint top tether strap
may be damaged by contact with
the cargo cover or items in the
luggage area. Remove the cargo
cover from the vehicle or secure it
and any luggage. Your child could
be seriously injured or killed in a
collision if the top tether strap is
damaged.

3. Remove the clip
garnish.
4. Remove the clip
garnish.

B
*
A
*

from the liftgate side
from the liftgate lower

SIC4584

The cargo cover keeps the luggage compartment contents hidden from the outside.

To install the cargo cover:
1. Open the liftgate.
A on the liftgate lower garnish.
2. Fix the clip *

3. Fix the clip

B
*

on the liftgate side garnish.

4. Hook the rope on the clip located on the
liftgate side garnish.
Instruments and controls 2-49

WINDOWS
POWER WINDOWS

seconds, power to the windows is canceled.

WARNING
.

Make sure that all passengers have
their hands, etc. inside the vehicle
while it is in motion and before
closing the windows. Use the window lock switch to prevent unexpected use of the power windows.

To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of
the vehicle and or its systems,
including entrapment in windows
or inadvertent door lock activation,
do not leave children, people who
require the assistance of others or
pets unattended in your vehicle.
Additionally, the temperature inside
a closed vehicle on a warm day can
quickly become high enough to
cause a significant risk of injury or
death to people and pets.

The power windows operate when the ignition
switch is in the ON position, or for about 45
seconds after the ignition switch is placed in the
OFF position. If the driver’s or front passenger’s
door is opened during this period of about 45

2-50 Instruments and controls

SIC4533

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Window lock button
Driver side window
Rear left passenger side window
Front passenger side window
Rear right passenger side window

Main power window switch (driver’s
side)

A or
To open or close the window, push down *
B the switch and hold it. The main
pull up *
switch (driver side switches) will open or close
all the windows.

Locking passengers’ windows

C is pushed in, only the
When the lock button *
driver side window can be opened or closed.
Push it in again to cancel.

SIC4523

SIC4524

Passenger side power window switch

Automatic operation

The passenger side switch will open or close
only the corresponding window. To open or
close the window, push down or pull up the
switch and hold it.

The automatic operation is available for the
switch that has an
mark on its surface.
To fully open or close the window, completely
push down or pull up the switch and release it;
the switch need not be held. The window will
automatically open or close all the way. To stop
the window, just push or lift the switch in the
opposite direction.
A light push or pull on the switch will cause the
window to open or close until the switch is
released.

Instruments and controls 2-51

MOONROOF (if so equipped)
Auto-reverse function

WARNING
There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which
cannot be detected. Make sure that all
passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the
window.
If the control unit detects something caught in
the window as it is closing, the window will be
immediately lowered.
The auto reverse function can be activated when
the window is closed by automatic operation
when the ignition switch is in the ON position or
for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is placed
in the OFF position.
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the window
occurs.

If the windows do not close automatically
If the power window automatic function (closing
only) does not operate properly, perform the
following procedure to initialize the power
window system.

WARNING
.

In an accident you could be thrown
from the vehicle through an open
moonroof. Always use seat belts
and child restraints.

Do not allow anyone to stand up or
extend any portion of their body out
of the moonroof opening while the
vehicle is in motion or while the
moonroof is closing.

1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
2. Close the door.
3. Open the window completely by operating
the power window switch.
4. Pull the power window switch and hold it to
close the window, and then hold the switch
more than 3 seconds after the window is
closed completely.
5. Release the power window switch. Operate
the window by the automatic function to
confirm the initialization is complete.
If the power window automatic function does
not operate properly after performing the procedure above, it is recommended you have your
vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION
.

Remove water drops, snow, ice or
sand from the moonroof before
opening.

Do not place any heavy object on
the moonroof or surrounding area.

POWER MOONROOF
The moonroof only operates when the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
The moonroof is operational for about 45
seconds, even if the ignition switch is pushed
to the OFF position. If the driver’s door or the

2-52 Instruments and controls

Auto reverse function

passenger’s door is opened during this period of
about 45 seconds, power to the moonroof is
canceled.

WARNING

Sunshade

There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which
cannot be detected. Make sure that all
passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the
moonroof.

The sunshade will open automatically when the
moonroof is opened. However, it must be closed
manually.

SIC4624

Sliding the moonroof
To fully open or close the moonroof, push the
1 or
2 and release
switch toward
*
*
it; it need not be held. The roof will automatically
open or close all the way. To stop the roof, push
the switch in any direction while it is opening or
closing.

Tilting the moonroof
To tilt up, first close the moonroof by pushing the
2 . Push the switch toward
switch toward
*
2 again and release it; it need not be
*
held. To tilt down the moonroof, push the switch
1 .
toward
*

If the control unit detects something caught in
the moonroof when it is closing, the moonroof
will be immediately opened.
The auto reverse function can be activated when
the moonroof is closed by automatic operation
when the ignition switch is in the ON position or
for about 45 seconds after the ignition switch is
pushed to the OFF position.
If the moonroof cannot be closed automatically
when the auto reverse function activates due to
a malfunction, push and hold the switch toward
2 .
*
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the moonroof
occurs.
Instruments and controls 2-53

INTERIOR LIGHTS
If the moonroof does not operate
If the moonroof does not operate properly,
perform the following procedure to initialize the
moonroof operation system.
1. If the moonroof is open, close it fully by
repeatedly pushing the switch toward
2 .
*
2. Push and hold the switch toward
tilt the moonroof up.

CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could
result in a discharged battery.

2 to
*

3. Release the moonroof switch after the
moonroof moves slightly up and down.
4. Push and hold the switch toward
fully tilt the moonroof down.

1 to
*

5. Check if the moonroof switch operates
normally.
If the moonroof does not operate properly after
performing the procedure above, have your
moonroof checked and repaired. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.

2-54 Instruments and controls

SIC4572

MAP LIGHTS (if so equipped)
Operate the map light switch to turn the map
light on or off.
1 : ON position
*
2 : OFF position
*

Center position

CARGO LIGHT

When the switch is in the center position, the
map lights will illuminate under the following
conditions:

The cargo room lights illuminate when the
liftgate is opened. When the liftgate is closed,
the lights will turn off.

SIC4573

MAP LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH (if so
equipped)
The map lights control switch has three posi1 , OFF *
2 and center.
tions: ON *

ON position
When the switch is in the ON position
map lights will illuminate.

OFF position

1 , the
*

2 , the
When the switch is in the OFF position *
map lights will not illuminate, regardless of the
condition.

ignition switch is placed in the OFF position
— remain on for about 15 seconds.
. doors are unlocked by pushing the UNLOCK
button (on the Intelligent Key) or
the request switch with the ignition switch in
the LOCK position
— remain on for about 15 seconds.
. any door is opened and then closed with the
ignition switch in the LOCK position
— remain on for about 15 seconds.
. any door is opened with the ignition switch
in the ACC or ON position
— remain on while the door is opened.
When the door is closed, the lights go
off.
The lights will turn off after a period of
time when the lights remain illuminated to
prevent the battery from becoming discharged.

Instruments and controls 2-55

MEMO

2-56 Instruments and controls

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Keys .............................................................................................. 3-2
Intelligent Keys ..................................................................... 3-2
Doors ............................................................................................ 3-4
Locking with key .................................................................. 3-4
Locking with inside lock knob .......................................... 3-4
Locking with power door lock switch ............................ 3-5
Automatic door locks ......................................................... 3-5
Child safety rear door lock ............................................... 3-6
Intelligent Key system .............................................................. 3-6
Intelligent Key operating range ........................................ 3-8
Door locks/unlocks precaution ........................................ 3-8
Intelligent Key operation .................................................... 3-9
Battery saver system ....................................................... 3-10
Warning lights and audible reminders ........................ 3-10
Troubleshooting guide ..................................................... 3-11
How to use remote keyless entry function ................ 3-12

Hood .........................................................................................
Liftgate .....................................................................................
Front side and rear unique parts (NISMO models) .....
Fuel-filler door ........................................................................
Opening the fuel-filler door .........................................
Fuel-filler cap ..................................................................
Tilt steering column ..............................................................
Tilt operation ...................................................................
Sun visors ................................................................................
Mirrors .....................................................................................
Inside mirror .....................................................................
Outside mirrors ...............................................................
Vanity mirror .....................................................................

3-15
3-16
3-17
3-18
3-18
3-18
3-20
3-20
3-21
3-21
3-21
3-22
3-23

KEYS
nents when registering new keys, be sure to take
all Intelligent Keys that you have to the NISSAN
dealer.

A key number plate is supplied with your keys.
Record the key number and keep it in a safe
place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If
you lose your keys, it is recommended you visit a
NISSAN dealer for duplicates by using the key
number. NISSAN does not record any key
numbers so it is very important to keep track of
your key number plate.

CAUTION
.

A key number is only necessary when you have
lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate
from. If you still have a key, it can be duplicated
without knowing the key number.
SPA2406

1.
2.
3.

Intelligent Key (2 sets)
Mechanical key (inside Intelligent Key) (2 sets)
Key number plate

INTELLIGENT KEYS
Your vehicle can only be driven with the
Intelligent Keys which are registered to your
vehicle’s Intelligent Key system components and
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System components. As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be
registered and used with one vehicle. The new
keys must be registered by a NISSAN dealer
prior to use with the Intelligent Key system and
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System of your
vehicle. Since the registration process requires
erasing all memory in the Intelligent Key compo-

3-2

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key
with you when driving. The Intelligent Key is a precision device with a
built-in transmitter. To avoid damaging it, please note the following.
— The Intelligent Key is water
resistant; however, wetting may
damage the Intelligent Key. If
the Intelligent Key gets wet,
immediately wipe until it is completely dry.
— Do not bend, drop or strike it
against another object.
— If the outside temperature is
below 148F (-108C) degrees, the
battery of the intelligent key
may not function properly.
— Do not place the Intelligent Key
for an extended period in a
place where temperatures exceed 1408F (608C).

— Do not change or modify the
Intelligent Key.

CAUTION

— Do not use a magnet key holder.

Always carry the mechanical key installed in the Intelligent Key.

— Do not place the Intelligent Key
near an electric appliance such
as a television set, personal
computer or cellular phone.
— Do not allow the Intelligent Key
to come into contact with water
or salt water, and do not wash it
in a washing machine. This
could affect the system function.
.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen,
NISSAN recommends erasing the ID
code of that Intelligent Key. This will
prevent the Intelligent Key from
unauthorized use to unlock the
vehicle. For information regarding
the erasing procedure, it is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer.

SPA2033

Mechanical key
To remove the mechanical key, release the lock
knob at the back of the Intelligent Key.
To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into
the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to
the lock position.
Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the
doors. (See “Doors” (P.3-4).)

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

DOORS

WARNING
.

Always have the doors locked while
driving. Along with the use of seat
belts, this provides greater safety in
the event of an accident by helping
to prevent persons from being
thrown from the vehicle. This also
helps keep children and others from
unintentionally opening the doors,
and will help keep out intruders.

Before opening any door, always
look for and avoid oncoming traffic.

3-4

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

SPA2602

SPA2603

LOCKING WITH KEY

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB

The power door lock system allows you to lock
or unlock all doors simultaneously.

To lock the door without the key, move the inside
1 then close the
lock knob to the lock position *
door.

.
.

Turning the driver’s door key cylinder to the
1 will lock all doors and
front of the vehicle *
the liftgate.
Turning the driver’s door key cylinder once
2 will unlock the
to the rear of the vehicle *
driver’s door. After returning the key to the
neutral position, turning it to the rear again
within 5 seconds will unlock all doors and
the liftgate.

To unlock, move the inside lock knob to the
2 .
unlock position *
When locking the door without a key, be
sure not to leave the key inside the vehicle.

Lockout protection
Lockout protection function helps to prevent the
keys from being accidentally locked inside the
vehicle.
.

SPA2803
Driver’s armrest

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK
SWITCH
Operating the power door lock switch will lock
or unlock all the doors. The switch is located on
the driver’s door armrest.
To lock the doors, push the power door lock
1 with the driver’s
switch to the lock position *
door open, then close the door.
When locking the door this way, be sure
not to leave the key inside the vehicle.
To unlock the doors, push the power door lock
2 .
switch to the unlock position *

When the power door lock switch is moved
to the lock position with the ignition switch
placed in the ACC or ON position and any
door open, all doors will lock and then
unlock automatically.
When the power door lock switch is moved
to the lock position with the Intelligent Key
left in the vehicle and any door open, all
doors will unlock automatically and a chime
will sound after the door is closed.

4. When activated, the hazard warning lights
will flash twice. When deactivated, the
hazard warning lights will flash once.
5. The ignition switch must be placed in the
OFF and ON position again between each
setting change.
When the automatic door unlock system is
deactivated, the doors do not unlock when the
ignition is placed in the OFF position. To unlock
the door manually, use the inside lock knob or
the power door lock switch.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS
.

All doors lock automatically when the vehicle
speed reaches 15 MPH (24 km/h).
. All doors unlock automatically when the
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
The automatic unlock function can be
deactivated or activated.
To deactivate or activate the automatic door
unlock system, perform the following procedure.
1. Close all doors.
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
3. Within 20 seconds, push and hold the
power door lock switch to the
(UNLOCK) position for more than 5 seconds.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM

CAUTION

WARNING
.

SPA2801

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK
Child safety rear door locks help prevent the rear
doors from being opened accidentally, especially when small children are in the vehicle.
When the levers are in the lock position
1 , the rear doors can be opened only
*
from the outside.
To disengage, move the levers to the unlock
2 .
position *

3-6

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for the possible influences before use.
The Intelligent Key transmits radio
waves when the buttons are
pushed. The FAA advises that the
radio waves may affect aircraft navigation and communication systems. Do not operate the
Intelligent Key while on an airplane.
Make sure the buttons are not
operated unintentionally when the
unit is stored during a flight.

Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key
with you when operating the vehicle.

Never leave the Intelligent Key in
the vehicle when you leave the
vehicle.

The Intelligent Key is always communicating with
the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The
Intelligent Key system transmits weak radio
waves. Environmental conditions may interfere
with the operation of the Intelligent Key system
under the following operating conditions.
.

The Intelligent Key system can operate all the
door locks using the remote controller function
or pushing the request switch on the vehicle
without taking the key out from a pocket or
purse. The operating environment and/or conditions may affect the Intelligent Key system
operation.

Be sure to read the following before using the
Intelligent Key system.

.
.

When operating near a location where
strong radio waves are transmitted, such
as a TV tower, power station and broadcasting station.
When in possession of wireless equipment,
such as a cellular phone, transceiver, and
CB radio.
When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or
covered by metallic materials.
When any type of radio wave remote control
is used nearby.
When the Intelligent Key is placed near an
electric appliance such as a personal

computer.
When the vehicle is parked near a parking
meter.
In such cases, correct the operating conditions
before using the Intelligent Key function or use
the mechanical key.

water or salt water. This could affect
the system function.

Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

Do not strike the Intelligent Key
sharply against another object.

Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key.

Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving radio waves, if the key is left near equipment
which transmits strong radio waves, such as
signals from a TV and personal computer, the
battery life may become shorter.

Wetting may damage the Intelligent
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet,
immediately wipe until it is completely dry.

For information regarding replacement of a
battery, see “Intelligent Key battery replacement”
(P.8-20).

If the outside temperature is below
148F (í108C) degrees, the battery of
the Intelligent Key may not function
properly.

Do not place the Intelligent Key for
an extended period in an area where
temperatures exceed 1408F (608C).

Do not attach the Intelligent Key
with a key holder that contains a
magnet.

Do not place the Intelligent Key near
equipment that produces a magnetic field, such as a TV, audio
equipment, personal computers or
cellular phone.

Although the life of the battery varies depending
on the operating conditions, the battery’s life is
approximately 2 years. If the battery is discharged, replace it with a new one.

As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered
and used with one vehicle. For information about
the purchase and use of additional Intelligent
Keys, contact a NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION
.

Do not allow the Intelligent Key,
which contains electrical components, to come into contact with

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN
recommends erasing the ID code of that
Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent
the unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to
operate the vehicle. For information regarding
the erasing procedure, it is recommended that
you contact a NISSAN dealer.
The Intelligent Key function can be disabled. For
information about disabling the Intelligent Key
function, it is recommended that you contact a
NISSAN dealer.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

SPA2074

INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATING
RANGE
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used
when the Intelligent Key is within the specified
1 .
operating range from the request switch *
When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or
strong radio waves are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key system’s operating range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent
Key may not function properly.
The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm)
1 .
from each request switch *
If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door
glass, handle or rear bumper, the request

3-8

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

switches may not function.
When the Intelligent Key is within the operating
range, it is possible for anyone who does not
carry the Intelligent Key to push the request
switch to lock/unlock the doors including the
liftgate.

SPA2407

DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS PRECAUTION
.

.
.

Do not push the door handle request switch
with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as
illustrated. The close distance to the door
handle will cause the Intelligent Key system
to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle.
After locking with the door handle request
switch, verify the doors are securely locked
by testing them.
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left
inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the
key with you and then lock the doors.

Do not pull the door handle before pushing
the door handle request switch. The door
will be unlocked but will not open. Release
the door handle once and pull it again to
open the door.

SPA2408

SPA2545

INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION
You can lock or unlock the doors without taking
the key out from your pocket or bag.
When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you
can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door
handle request switch (driver’s or front passenA or liftgate request switch *
B within
ger’s) *
the range of operation.

SPA2710

When you lock or unlock the doors, the hazard
indicator will flash and the horn (or the outside
chime) will sound as a confirmation. For details,
see “Setting hazard indicator and horn mode”
(P.3-13).

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

Locking doors
1. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position
and carry the Intelligent Key with you.*1
2. Close all the doors.*2
3. Push the door handle request switch (driA or the liftgate
ver’s or front passenger’s) *
B
request switch *
while carrying the
Intelligent Key with you.*3
4. All the doors and the liftgate will lock.
5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the
outside chime sounds twice.
*1:
*2:
*3:

Doors will lock with the request switch while the
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.
Doors will not lock with the request switch while
any door is open.
Doors will not lock with the request switch when
the Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle.
However, when an Intelligent Key is inside the
vehicle, doors can be locked with another
registered Intelligent Key.

Unlocking doors

A or
1. Push the door handle request switch *
B while carrythe liftgate request switch *
ing the Intelligent Key with you.

2. The hazard indicator flashes once and outside chime sounds once. The corresponding
door or the liftgate will unlock.

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3. Push the request switch again within 1
minute.
4. The hazard indicator flashes once and outside chime sounds once again. All the doors
and the liftgate will unlock.
All doors will be locked automatically unless one
of the following operations is performed within 1
minute after pushing the request switch while
the doors are locked.
. Opening any door.
. Pushing the ignition switch.
During this 1-minute time period, if the UNLOCK
button on the Intelligent Key is pushed, all
doors will be locked automatically after another
1 minute.

Opening liftgate
1. Carry the Intelligent Key.
2. Push the liftgate opener switch

C .
*

3. The liftgate will unlock.

BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM
When all the following conditions are met for a
period of time, the battery saver system will cut
off the power supply to prevent battery discharge.
.

The ignition switch is in the ACC position,
and

.
.

All doors are closed, and
The shift lever is in the P (Park) position
(Continuously Variable Transmission models).

WARNING LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE
REMINDERS
To help prevent the vehicle from moving
unexpectedly by erroneous operation of the
Intelligent Key listed on the following chart or
to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen,
chime or beep sounds inside and outside the
vehicle and a warning light illuminates or blinks.
When a chime or beep sounds or the warning
light illuminates or blinks, be sure to check the
vehicle and Intelligent Key.
See “Troubleshooting guide” (P.3-11) and
“Warning lights, indicator lights and audible
reminders” (P.2-15).
Intelligent Key system warning light:
P position selecting warning light:

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Symptom

Action to take

Possible cause

The P position selecting warning light in the
When pushing the ignition switch meter illuminates and the inside warning chime The shift lever is not in the P (Park)
to stop the engine
sounds continuously (Continuously Variable
position.
Transmission models).

Shift the shift lever to the P (Park) position.

When shifting the shift lever to the The inside warning chime sounds continuously The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON Push the ignition switch to the OFF position.
P (Park) position.
(Continuously Variable Transmission models). position.
Push the ignition switch to the OFF posiWhen opening the driver’s door
The ignition switch is in the ACC
The inside warning chime sounds continuously.
tion.
to get out of the vehicle
position.
The Intelligent Key system warning light in the
meter blinks in yellow, and the outside chime The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
sounds 3 times and the inside warning chime position.
When closing the door after get- sounds for a few seconds.
ting out of the vehicle
The P position selecting warning light in the
The ignition switch is in the ACC or OFF
meter illuminates and the outside chime
position and the shift lever is not in the P
sounds continuously (Continuously Variable
(Park) position.
Transmission models).
When closing the door with the The outside chime sounds for a few seconds
inside lock knob turned to LOCK and all the doors unlock.

Push the ignition switch to the OFF position.
Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position
and push the ignition switch to the OFF
position.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the request switch
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
or the LOCK
button on the The outside chime sounds for a few seconds.
Close the door securely.
A door is not closed securely.
Intelligent Key to lock the door
Replace the battery with a new one. (See
The Intelligent Key system warning light in the
“Intelligent Key battery replacement” (P.8The battery charge is low.
meter blinks in green.
20).)
When pushing the ignition switch
to start the engine
The Intelligent Key system warning light in the
meter blinks in yellow and the inside warning The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
chime sounds for a few seconds.
It is recommended that you contact a
The Intelligent Key system warning light in the It warns of a malfunction with the
When pushing the ignition switch
NISSAN dealer.
meter illuminates in yellow.
Intelligent Key system.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS
ENTRY FUNCTION

WARNING
.

CAUTION
.

Do not allow the Intelligent Key,
which contains electrical components, to come into contact with
water or salt water. This could affect

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

Do not strike the Intelligent Key
sharply against another object.

function of the Intelligent Key. The remote
keyless entry function can operate at a distance
of approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle.
(The operating distance depends upon the
conditions around the vehicle.)

Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key.

The remote keyless entry function will not
operate:

Wetting may damage the Intelligent
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet,
immediately wipe until it is completely dry.

If the outside temperature is below
148F (-108C) degrees, the battery of
the intelligent key may not function
properly.

Do not place the Intelligent Key for
an extended period in an area where
temperatures exceed 1408F (608C).

Do not attach the Intelligent Key
with a key holder that contains a
magnet.

Do not place the Intelligent Key near
equipment that produces a magnetic field, such as a TV, audio
equipment, personal computers or
cellular phone.

the system function.

The remote keyless entry function can operate
all door locks using the remote keyless entry

When the Intelligent Key is not within the
operational range.
. When the doors are open or not closed
securely.
. When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged.
The remote keyless entry function can also
operate the vehicle alarm.

5. All the doors and the liftgate will lock.

Using panic alarm

6. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the
horn chirps once.

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,
you may activate the alarm to call attention as
follows:

Doors will lock with the Intelligent Key while the
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

Operate the door handles to confirm that the
doors have been securely locked.

Unlocking doors
1. Push the UNLOCK
Intelligent Key once.
SPA2252
1
*
2
*
3
*

LOCK
UNLOCK
PANIC

When you lock or unlock the doors, the hazard
indicator will flash and the horn will sound as a
confirmation. For details, see “Setting hazard
indicator and horn mode” (P.3-13).

Locking doors
1. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position
and carry the Intelligent Key with you.*
2. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
3. Close all the doors.
4. Push the LOCK
Intelligent Key.

button

1
*

on the

2
*

on the

2. The hazard indicator flashes once. The
driver’s door will unlock.
3. Push the UNLOCK
1 minute.

button
button
button

button

button again within

3
1. Push the PANIC
button *
on the
Intelligent Key for more than 1 second.

2. The theft warning alarm and headlights will
stay on for 25 seconds.
3. The panic alarm stops when:
. It has run for 25 seconds, or
. Any of the buttons on the Intelligent Key
is pushed. (Note: the PANIC button must
be pushed for more than 1 second.)

Setting hazard indicator and horn mode

4. The hazard indicator flashes once. All the
doors and the liftgate will unlock.

This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and horn
mode when you first receive the vehicle.

All doors will be locked automatically unless one
of the following operations is performed within 1
minute after pushing the UNLOCK
button
while the doors are locked.

In hazard indicator and horn mode, when the
1 is pushed, the hazard
LOCK
button *
indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps once.
2 is pushed,
When the UNLOCK
button *
the hazard indicator flashes once.

. Opening any door (including the liftgate).
. Pushing the ignition switch.
During this 1-minute time period, if the UNLOCK
button is pushed, all doors will be locked
automatically after another 1 minute.

If horns are not necessary, the system can be
switched to the hazard indicator mode.
In hazard indicator mode, when the LOCK
button is pushed, the hazard indicator flashes
twice. When the UNLOCK
button is
pushed, neither the hazard indicator nor the
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

horn operates.

Hazard indicator and horn mode:
Operation

DOOR LOCK

Pushing door handle request switch
or liftgate request switch
Pushing

button

DOOR UNLOCK

HAZARD - twice
OUTSIDE CHIME - twice

HAZARD - once
OUTSIDE CHIME - once

HAZARD - twice
HORN - once

HAZARD - once
HORN - none

Hazard indicator mode:
Operation

DOOR LOCK

Pushing door handle request switch
or liftgate request switch
Pushing

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

button

DOOR UNLOCK

HAZARD - twice
OUTSIDE CHIME - none

HAZARD - none
OUTSIDE CHIME - none

HAZARD - twice
HORN - none

HAZARD - none
HORN - none

HOOD
Switching procedure:
To switch the hazard indicator and horn (chime)
1
and UNoperation, push the LOCK
*
2
LOCK
buttons on the Intelligent Key
*
simultaneously for more than 2 seconds.
.
.

When the hazard indicator mode is set, the
hazard indicator flashes 3 times.
When the hazard indicator and horn mode is
set, the hazard indicator flashes once and
the horn chirps once.

WARNING
.

Make sure the hood is completely
closed and latched before driving.
Failure to do so could cause the
hood to fly open and result in an
accident.

If you see steam or smoke coming
from the engine compartment, to
avoid injury do not open the hood.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

LIFTGATE

WARNING
.

Always be sure the liftgate has been
closed securely to prevent it from
opening while driving.

Do not drive with the liftgate open.
This could allow dangerous exhaust
gases to be drawn into the vehicle.
See “Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)” (P.5-2) of this manual.

Do not leave children unattended
inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended children could
become involved in serious accidents.

Make sure that all passengers have
their hands, etc. inside the vehicle
before closing the liftgate.

JVP0338X

been stopped.

When opening the hood:
1
located
1. Pull the hood release handle *
below the instrument panel; the hood will
then spring up slightly.
2 in between the hood
2. Locate the lever *
and grille, and pull the lever up with your
fingertips.

3. Raise the hood

3 .
*

4. Remove the support rod
5 .
into the slot *

4
*

When closing the hood:
1. While supporting the hood, return the
support rod to its original position.
2. Slowly lower the hood to about 8 to 12 in
(20 to 30 cm) above the hood lock, then let
it drop.
3. Make sure it is securely latched.

and insert it

A when removing or
Hold the coated part *
resetting the support rod. Avoid direct
contact with the metal parts, as they may
be hot immediately after the engine has

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

FRONT SIDE AND REAR UNIQUE
PARTS (NISMO models)
The NISMO models have the following unique
parts on the front, side and rear of the vehicle.
.
.
.
.

Front bumper
Daytime running light (P.2-42, P.8-23,
P.8-26)
Side sill extensions
Rear spoiler (P.7-3)

JVP0339X

To open the liftgate, unlock it and push the
A . Pull up the liftgate to
liftgate opener switch *
open.
The liftgate can be unlocked by:
.
.
.
.

pushing the UNLOCK
button on the
Intelligent Key twice.
pushing the liftgate request switch with the
Intelligent Key carried with you.
pushing the power door lock switch to the
unlock position.
inserting the key into the driver’s door key
cylinder and turning it to the rear of the
vehicle twice.

JVP0351X

CAUTION
Do not place your foot on or step on the
front bumper. Also, do not step on the
side sill extensions when getting in or
out of the vehicle. Doing so may result
in damage to the front bumper and side
sill extensions.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

FUEL-FILLER DOOR

WARNING

SPA2336

Gasoline is extremely flammable
and highly explosive under certain
conditions. You could be burned or
seriously injured if it is misused or
mishandled. Always stop engine
and do not smoke or allow open
flames or sparks near the vehicle
when refueling.

Do not attempt to top off the fuel
tank after the fuel pump nozzle
shuts off automatically. Continued
refueling may cause fuel overflow,
resulting in fuel spray and possibly
a fire.

Use only an original equipment type
fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It
has a built-in safety valve needed
for proper operation of the fuel
system and emission control system. An incorrect cap can result in a
serious malfunction and possible
injury. It could also cause the malfunction indicator light to come on.

Never pour fuel into the throttle
body to attempt to start your vehicle.

SPA2800

OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER DOOR

FUEL-FILLER CAP

To open the fuel-filler door, pull the release
handle located below the instrument panel. To
lock, close the fuel-filler door securely.

To remove the fuel-filler cap:
1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise
to remove.
2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder
while refueling.

1
*
A
*

To install the fuel-filler cap:
1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the fuelfiller tube.
2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise
single click is heard.

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

2
*

until a

cause the
malfunction indicator
light (MIL) to illuminate. If the
light illuminates because the fuelfiller cap is loose or missing, tighten
or install the cap and continue to
drive the vehicle. The
light
should turn off after a few driving
trips. If the
light does not turn
off after a few driving trips, have the
vehicle inspected. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.

Do not fill a portable fuel container
in the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity can cause an explosion of
flammable liquid, vapor or gas in
any vehicle or trailer. To reduce the
risk of serious injury or death when
filling portable fuel containers:
— Always place the container on
the ground when filling.
— Do not use electronic devices
when filling.
— Keep the pump nozzle in contact
with the container while you are
filling it.
— Use only approved portable fuel
containers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION
.

If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,
flush it away with water to avoid
paint damage.
Insert the cap straight into the fuelfiller tube, then tighten until the
fuel-filler cap clicks. Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap properly may

For additional information, see
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)”
(P.2-22).
.

The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning
message will be displayed if the
fuel-filler cap is not properly tightened. It may take a few driving trips
for the message to be displayed.
Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap
properly after the LOOSE FUEL CAP
warning message is displayed may
cause the
Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) to illuminate.

SPA2809

LOOSE FUEL CAP warning message
The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning message is
displayed on the vehicle information display
when the fuel-filler cap is not tightened correctly
after the vehicle has been refueled. It may take a
few driving trips for the message to be
displayed. To turn off the warning message, do
the following procedure:
1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as
previously described as soon as possible.
2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.
A for
3. Push the trip computer mode switch *
about 1 second to turn off the LOOSE FUEL
CAP warning message after tightening the

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

TILT STEERING COLUMN
fuel cap.

WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving. You could lose control of your
vehicle and cause an accident.

SPA2808

TILT OPERATION

1 and adjust the
Push the lock lever down *
2 to the desired
steering wheel up or down *
position.
3 securely to lock the
Pull the lock lever up *
steering wheel in place.

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

SUN VISORS

MIRRORS

CAUTION
.

Do not store the main sun visor
before storing the extension sun
visor.

Do not pull the extension sun visor
forcedly downward.

1. To block out glare from the front, swing
1 .
down the main sun visor *
2. To block glare from the side, remove the
main sun visor from the center mount and
2 .
swing it to the side *

3 from
3. Draw out the extension sun visor *
the main sun visor to block from further
glare.

SPA2447

INSIDE MIRROR
Adjust the angle of the inside mirror to the
desired position.

SIC3451

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

WARNING
Objects viewed in the outside mirror on
the passenger side are closer than they
appear. Be careful when moving to the
right. Using only this mirror could cause
an accident. Use the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder to properly
judge distances to other objects.
SPA2214

SPA2143
1 will reduce glare from the
The night position *
headlights of vehicles behind you at night.
2 when driving in daylight
Use the day position *
hours.

WARNING
Use the night position only when necessary, because it reduces rear view
clarity.

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Adjusting outside mirrors
The outside mirror control switch is located at
the lower part of the instrument panel.
The outside mirror will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.
1 or left *
2 to select
Move the switch right *
3 using
the right or left side mirror, then adjust *
the control switch.

Defrosting outside mirrors (if so
equipped)
The outside mirrors will be heated when the rear
window defroster switch is operated. (See “Rear
window and outside mirror defroster switch”
(P.2-38).)

SPA1829

SIC3869

Foldable outside mirrors

VANITY MIRROR

Fold the outside mirror by pushing it toward the
rear of the vehicle.

To use the front vanity mirror, pull down the sun
visor and pull up the cover.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23

MEMO

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

4 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Safety note .................................................................................. 4-3
Control buttons and functions (models with
navigation system) .................................................................... 4-3
How to use touch screen ................................................. 4-4
How to use the BACK button ......................................... 4-5
How to use the APPS·i button ........................................ 4-5
How to use brightness control button ........................... 4-8
How to use the ON·OFF button/Volume
control knob .......................................................................... 4-8
How to use the CAMERA button ................................... 4-8
RearView Monitor (models without
navigation system) .................................................................... 4-8
RearView Monitor system operation .............................. 4-9
How to read the displayed lines ..................................... 4-9
Adjusting the screen ....................................................... 4-11
RearView Monitor system limitations .......................... 4-11
System maintenance ....................................................... 4-12
Around View Monitor (AVM) (models with
navigation system) ................................................................. 4-13
Around View Monitor system operation ................... 4-14
How to adjust the screen view ..................................... 4-20
Around View Monitor system limitations .................. 4-20
System maintenance ....................................................... 4-23

Moving Object Detection (MOD) (models with
navigation system) ................................................................
MOD system operation ................................................
MOD system limitations ...............................................
System maintenance .....................................................
Ventilators ................................................................................
Center ventilators ...........................................................
Side ventilators ...............................................................
Heater and air conditioner ..................................................
Manual air conditioner (if so equipped) ...................
Automatic air conditioner (with Integrated
Control System) .............................................................
Operating tips (for automatic air conditioner) ........
In-cabin microfilter .........................................................
Servicing air conditioner ..............................................
Audio system ..........................................................................
Audio operation precautions .......................................
FM-AM radio with Compact Disc (CD) player (if
so equipped) ...................................................................
FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc (CD) player
(Type A) (if so equipped) .............................................
FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc (CD) player
(Type B) (if so equipped) ............................................

4-24
4-24
4-26
4-27
4-27
4-27
4-28
4-28
4-29
4-32
4-35
4-35
4-35
4-35
4-35
4-45
4-53
4-62

CD/USB memory care and cleaning .......................... 4-73
Steering wheel switch for audio control .................... 4-73
Antenna ............................................................................... 4-75
NissanConnectSM App smartphone integration ............. 4-75
Registering with NissanConnectSM App .................... 4-75
Connect phone ................................................................. 4-76
Application download ...................................................... 4-76
Siri Eyes Free ....................................................................... 4-76
General Information ......................................................... 4-76
Requirements .................................................................... 4-77
Siri Eyes Free Activation .............................................. 4-77
Operating Siri Eyes Free ............................................. 4-77
Changing Siri Eyes Free Settings (models without
navigation system) ........................................................... 4-78
Troubleshooting guide ..................................................... 4-79
Car phone or CB radio ........................................................ 4-80
Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System (models without
navigation system) ................................................................. 4-80
Regulatory information .................................................... 4-81
Using the system .............................................................. 4-82
Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System (models with
navigation system) ................................................................. 4-89
Regulatory information .................................................... 4-91

Voice command .............................................................. 4-91
Connecting procedure .................................................. 4-92
Vehicle phonebook ........................................................ 4-92
Making a call ................................................................... 4-92
Receiving a call .............................................................. 4-92
During a call .................................................................... 4-93
Ending a call ................................................................... 4-93
Text messaging ............................................................... 4-93
Bluetooth settings ....................................................... 4-94
Phone settings ................................................................ 4-96
NISSAN Voice Recognition System (models with
navigation system) ................................................................ 4-96
Using the system ........................................................... 4-97
System features .............................................................. 4-98
Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System
voice commands ............................................................ 4-98
Navigation system voice commands ......................... 4-99
Audio system voice commands ............................... 4-100
Information voice commands ................................... 4-100
My APPS voice commands ...................................... 4-100
Help voice commands ............................................... 4-100
Troubleshooting guide ............................................... 4-100

SAFETY NOTE

CONTROL BUTTONS AND
FUNCTIONS (models with
navigation system)

WARNING
.

Do not disassemble or modify this
system. If you do, it may result in
accidents, fire, or electric shock.

Do not use this system if you notice
any abnormality, such as a frozen
screen or lack of sound. Continued
use of the system may result in
accident, fire or electric shock.

In case you notice any foreign
object in the system hardware, spill
liquid on it, or notice smoke or smell
coming from it, stop using the
system immediately. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer
for servicing. Ignoring such conditions may lead to accidents, fire, or
electric shock.

Do not attempt to operate the system in
extreme temperature conditions [below
í48F (í208C) and above 1588F (708C)].
Operating this system under these conditions may result in system malfunctions.

JVH0733X

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

MAP button*
Display screen
button (P.4-89)
button (P.4-5)
(brightness control) button (P.4-8)
BACK button (P.4-5)

7.
8.
9.

ON·OFF button/VOL (volume) control knob
(P.4-8)
CAMERA button (P.4-8)
NAV button*

*For information regarding the Navigation system control buttons, refer to the separate
Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-3

When you use this system, make sure the
engine is running.

the system to malfunction.

If you use the system with the engine not
running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long
time, it will discharge the battery, and the
engine will not start.

To help ensure safe driving, some functions
cannot be operated while driving.

Reference symbols:

Park the vehicle in a safe location and then
operate the navigation system.

“Example” — Words marked in quotes refer to a
key shown only on the display. These keys can
be selected by touching the screen.

The on-screen functions that are not available
while driving will be “grayed out” or muted.

WARNING

HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN

CAUTION
.

The glass screen on the liquid
crystal display may break if it is hit
with a hard or sharp object. If the
glass screen breaks, do not touch it.
Doing so could result in an injury.

To clean the display, never use a
rough cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any kind of solvent or paper
towel with a chemical cleaning
agent. They will scratch or deteriorate the panel.

4-4

ALWAYS give your full attention to
driving.

Avoid using vehicle features that
could distract you. If distracted,
you could lose control of your
vehicle and cause an accident.

Do not splash any liquid such as
water or car fragrance on the display. Contact with liquid will cause
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

JVH1248X

Touch screen operation
Selecting the item:
Touch an item to select. To select the “Audio”
1 on the screen.
key, touch the “Audio” key *
Adjusting the item:
Touch the “+” key or the “í” key to adjust the
settings of an item. Touch the up arrow to scroll
up the page. Touch the down arrow to scroll
down the page.
Inputting characters:
Touch the letter or number key. There are some
options available when inputting characters.

.
.

123/ABC:
Changes the keyboard between numbers
and alphabets.
Space:
Inserts a space.
Delete:
Deletes the last inputted character with one
touch. Touch and hold the “Delete” key to
delete all of the characters.
OK:
Completes the character input.

Touch screen maintenance
If you clean the display screen, use a dry, soft
cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a
small amount of neutral detergent with a soft
cloth. Never spray the screen with water or
detergent. Dampen the cloth first and then wipe
the screen.

HOW TO USE THE BACK BUTTON
Push the BACK button to return to the previous
screen.

JVH0735X

HOW TO USE THE APPS·I BUTTON
For information about the “SiriusXM Travel Link”,
and “SiriusXM Traffic” features, see the separate
Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
For information about the “My Apps” key, see
“NissanConnectSM App smartphone integration”
(P.4-75).

JVH1249X

To select and/or adjust several functions,
features and modes that are available for your
vehicle:
1. Push the

button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the desired item.

For information about the “Voice Commands”
key, see “NISSAN Voice Recognition System
(models with navigation system)” (P.4-96).

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-5

Result

Menu Item
Audio

For more details, see “FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc (CD) player (Type B)” (P.4-62).

Navigation

See the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual for more information.

Phone & Bluetooth

For more details, see “Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System (models with navigation system)” (P.4-89).

System

Touch this key to select and/or adjust various functions of this system. A screen with additional options will
appear.
Display

Touch this key to adjust the appearance of the display.
Brightness

Adjusts the brightness of the display.

Display Mode

Adjusts to fit the level of lighting in the vehicle. Touch key to cycle through options. “Day” and “Night” modes are
suited for the respective times of day while “Auto” controls the display automatically.

Scroll Direction

Adjusts the direction of the menu scroll. Choose to either move up or down.

Time Format

The clock can be set to 12 hours or 24 hours.

Date Format

Select from five possible formats of displaying the day, month, and year.

Clock Mode

Adjust the mode for the clock. “Auto” uses the system’s GPS to automatically maintain the time. “Manual” allows
you to set the clock using the “Set Clock Manually” key.

Set Clock Manually

Adjust the clock manually, Touch the “+” or “-” keys to adjust the hours, minutes, day, month and year up or down.
“Clock Mode” must be set to manual for this option to be available.

Daylight Savings Time

Adjusts the daylight savings time on or off.

Time Zone

Choose the applicable time zone from the list.

Clock

Touch this key to adjust the time.

Language

Touch this key to change the language on the display.

Camera Settings

4-6

Touch this key to change the camera settings.

Display Mode

Touch this key to select the touch-screen display mode (day, night, or automatic).

Brightness

Adjust touch-screen brightness.

Contrast

Adjust touch-screen contrast.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Color

Adjust touch-screen color.

Temperature Unit

Touch this key to change the temperature unit being displayed (Fahrenheit or Celsius).

Touchscreen click

Toggles the touch-screen click feature on or off. When activated a click sound will be heard every time a key on
the screen is touched.

System Beeps

Toggle the system beep tones feature on or off. When activated, a beep sound will be heard when a pop-up
message appears on the screen or a button on the unit (such as the
button) is pushed and held for 2
seconds.

Return to Factory Settings / Clear Memory

Touch this key to return all settings to default and to clear the memory.

Software Licenses

Touch this key to display software licensing information.

Traffic

Touch this key to display traffic settings. See the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual for more
information.

SXM

Touch this key to display SXM status information. For SXM setup, see “FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc
(CD) player (Type B)” (P.4-62).

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-7

REARVIEW MONITOR (models
without navigation system)
HOW TO USE BRIGHTNESS CONTROL BUTTON
To change the display brightness, push the
button. Pushing the button again will change the
display to the day or the night display.
If no operation is performed, the display will
return to the previous display.
Push and hold the
button to turn the display
off. Push the button again to turn the display on.

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and
instructions for proper use of the RearView Monitor could result in serious
injury or death.
.

HOW TO USE THE ON·OFF BUTTON/
VOLUME CONTROL KNOB
Push the ON·OFF button to turn audio function
on and off. Turn the volume control knob to
adjust audio volume.

The system is designed as an aid to
the driver in showing large stationary objects directly behind the vehicle, to help avoid damaging the
vehicle.

The distance guide line and the
vehicle width line should be used
as a reference only when the vehicle
is on a level paved surface. The
distance viewed on the monitor is
for reference only and may be
different than the actual distance
between the vehicle and displayed
objects.

HOW TO USE THE CAMERA BUTTON
For more information regarding the CAMERA
button, see “Around View Monitor (AVM)
(models with navigation system)” (P.4-13).

4-8

The RearView Monitor is a convenience but it is not a substitute for
proper backing. Always turn and
look out the windows, and check
mirrors to be sure that it is safe to
move before operating the vehicle.
Always back up slowly.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

CAUTION
Do not scratch the camera lens when
cleaning dirt or snow from the front of
the camera.
The RearView Monitor system automatically
shows a rear view of the vehicle when the shift
lever is placed in the “R” (Reverse) position.
The radio can still be heard while the RearView
Monitor is active.

Difference between predictive and actual
distances
The displayed guidelines and their locations on
the ground are for approximate reference only.
Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or
projecting objects will be actually located at
distances different from those displayed in the
monitor relative to the guidelines (refer to
illustrations). When in doubt, turn around and
view the objects as you are backing up, or park
and exit the vehicle to view the positioning of
objects behind the vehicle.
SAA2776

JVH1219X

To display the rear view, the RearView Monitor
system uses a camera located just above the
1 .
vehicle’s license plate *

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM OPERATION
With the ignition switch in the ON position,
move the shift lever to the “R” (Reverse) position
to operate the RearView Monitor.

HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED
LINES
Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width
and distances to objects with reference to the
A are displayed on the monitor.
bumper line *
Distance guide lines:
Indicate distances from the bumper.
1 : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)
. Red line *
2 : approx. 3 ft (1 m)
. Yellow line *
3 : approx. 7 ft (2 m)
. Green line *
4 : approx. 10 ft (3 m)
. Green line *
5 :
Vehicle width guide lines *

Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-9

JVH1159X

Backing up on a steep uphill:
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide
lines are shown closer than the actual distance.
Note that any object on the hill is farther than it
appears on the monitor.

JVH1160X

Backing up on a steep downhill:
When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide
lines are shown farther than the actual distance.
Note that any object on the hill is closer than it
appears on the monitor.

4-10 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

SAA3440

Backing up near a projecting object:
The vehicle may seem to nearly clear the object
in the display. However, the vehicle may hit the
object if it projects over the actual backing up
course.

course.

The system cannot completely eliminate blind spots and may not show
every object.

Underneath the bumper and the
corner areas of the bumper cannot
be viewed on the RearView Monitor
because of its monitoring range
limitation. The system will not show
small objects below the bumper,
and may not show objects close to
the bumper or on the ground.

Objects viewed in the RearView
Monitor differ from actual distance
because a wide-angle lens is used.

Do not adjust any of the display settings of
the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is
moving. Make sure the parking brake is
firmly applied.

Objects in the RearView Monitor
will appear visually opposite compared to when viewed in the rear
view and outside mirrors.

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

Use the displayed lines as a reference. The lines are highly affected
by the number of occupants, fuel
level, vehicle position, road conditions and road grade.

Make sure that the liftgate is securely closed when backing up.

Do not put anything on the rearview
camera. The rearview camera is
installed above the license plate.

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
1. Push the ENTER/SETTING button while the
RearView monitor screen is displayed.
2. A d j u s t t h e b r i g h t n e s s u s i n g t h e
TUNE·FOLDER or TUNE·SCROLL control
knob.
3. Push the ENTER/SETTING button and
adjust the contrast using the TUNE·FOLDER
or TUNE·SCROLL control knob.
4. Push the ENTER/SETTING button to return
to the RearView monitor screen.
NOTE:

SAA3475

Backing up behind a projecting object:
C
is shown farther than the
The position *
B
position *
in the display. However, the
C is actually at the same distance
position *
A . The vehicle may hit the
as the position *
A if
object when backing up to the position *
the object projects over the actual backing up

WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for RearView Monitor. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these
system limitations could result in serious injury or death.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-11

When washing the vehicle with
high-pressure water, be sure not to
spray it around the camera. Otherwise, water may enter the camera
unit causing water condensation on
the lens, a malfunction, fire or an
electric shock.
Do not strike the camera. It is a
precision instrument. Otherwise, it
may malfunction or cause damage
resulting in a fire or an electric
shock.

.
.
.

Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a
dark environment.
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the
camera, the RearView Monitor may not
display objects clearly. Clean the camera.
Do not use wax on the camera window.
Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth
dampened with mild detergent diluted with
water.

The following are operating limitations and do
not represent a system malfunction:
.
.
.
.
.

When the temperature is extremely high or
low, the screen may not clearly display
objects.
When strong light is directly coming on the
camera, objects may not be displayed
clearly.
Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the
screen. This is due to strong reflected light
from the bumper.
The screen may flicker under fluorescent
light.
The colors of objects on the RearView
Monitor may differ somewhat from the actual
color of objects.

4-12 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

JVH1219X

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION
.

Do not use alcohol, benzine or
thinner to clean the camera. This
will cause discoloration. To clean
the camera, wipe with a cloth dampened with diluted mild cleaning
agent and then wipe with a dry
cloth.

Do not damage the camera as the
monitor screen may be adversely
affected.

AROUND VIEW MONITOR (AVM)
(models with navigation system)
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the camera
1 , RearView Monitor may not display objects
*
clearly. Clean the camera by wiping it with a
cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning
agent and then wiping it with a dry cloth.

JVH1223X

1. CAMERA button

Around View Monitor system could
result in serious injury or death.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and
instructions for the proper use of the

The Around View Monitor is a
convenient feature but it is not a
substitute for proper vehicle operation because it has areas where

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-13

objects cannot be viewed. The four
corners of the vehicle in particular,
are areas where objects do not
always appear in the bird’s-eye,
front, or rear views. Always check
your surroundings to be sure that it
is safe to move before operating the
vehicle. Always operate the vehicle
slowly. Always look out the windows and check mirrors to be sure
that it is safe to move.
.

Available views:
.
.

.
.

Bird’s-eye view
The surrounding view of the vehicle.
Front-side view
The view around and ahead of the front
passenger’s side wheel.
Front view
The view to the front of the vehicle.
Rear view
The view to the rear of the vehicle.

The driver is always responsible for
safety during parking and other
maneuvers.

CAUTION
Do not scratch the lens when cleaning
dirt or snow from the front of the
camera.
The Around View Monitor system is designed
as an aid to the driver in situations such as slot
parking or parallel parking.
The monitor displays various views of the
position of the vehicle in a split screen format.
All views are not available at all times.

4-14 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

JVH1224X

To display the multiple views, the Around View
1 located in the
Monitor system uses cameras *
front grill, on the vehicle’s outside mirrors and
one just above the vehicle’s license plate.

AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
OPERATION
With the ignition switch in the ON position, push
the CAMERA button on the instrument panel or
move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position
to operate the Around View Monitor.

Available views

Objects in the monitor will appear
visually opposite compared to when
viewed in the rear view and outside
mirrors.

Use the mirrors or actually look to
properly judge distances to other
objects.

The distance between objects
viewed in the rear view differs from
actual distance because a wideangle lens is used.

On a snow-covered or slippery road,
there may be a difference between
the predictive course line and the
actual course line.

WARNING
.

The distance guide lines and the
vehicle width lines should be used
as a reference only when the vehicle
is on a paved, level surface. The
distance viewed on the monitor is
for reference only and may be
different than the actual distance
between the vehicle and displayed
objects.
Use the displayed lines and the
bird’s-eye view as a reference. The
lines and the bird’s-eye view are
greatly affected by the number of
occupants, fuel level, vehicle position, road condition and road grade.

If the tires are replaced with different sized tires, the predictive course
lines and the bird’s-eye view may be
displayed incorrectly.

When driving the vehicle up a hill,
objects viewed in the monitor are
farther than they appear. When
driving the vehicle down a hill,
objects viewed in the monitor are
closer than they appear.

The vehicle width and predictive
course lines are wider than the
actual width and course.

The displayed lines on the rear view
will appear slightly off to the right
because the rear view camera is not
installed in the rear center of the
vehicle.

SAA1840
Front view

SAA1896
Rear view

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-15

Front and rear view:
Guiding lines, which indicate the vehicle width
and distances to objects with reference to the
A
vehicle body line *
, are displayed on the
monitor.
Distance guide lines:

about 90 degrees or less from the
straight ahead position, both the right
6 are
and left predictive course lines *
displayed. When the steering wheel
turns about 90 degrees or more, the
predictive course line is displayed only
on the opposite side of the turn.

Indicate distances from the vehicle body.
1 : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)
. Red line *
2 : approx. 3 ft (1 m)
. Yellow line*
3 : approx. 7 ft (2 m)
. Green line*
4 : approx. 10 ft (3 m)
. Green line*
5 :
Vehicle width guide lines *

JVH1037X

Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.
Predictive course lines

6
*

Indicate the predictive course when operating
the vehicle. The predictive course lines will be
displayed on the monitor when the steering
wheel is turned. The predictive course lines will
move depending on how much the steering
wheel is turned and will not be displayed while
the steering wheel is in the straight ahead
position.

Bird’s-eye view:
The bird’s-eye view shows the overhead view of
the vehicle which helps confirm the vehicle
position and the predicted course to a parking
space.
1 shows the position of the
The vehicle icon *
vehicle. Note that the distance between objects
viewed in the bird’s-eye view differs from the
actual distance.

The front view will not be displayed when the
vehicle speed is above 6 MPH (10 km/h).

2 are
The areas that the cameras cannot cover *
indicated in black.

NOTE:
. When the monitor displays the front
view and the steering wheel turns

After the ignition switch is placed in the ON
2
position, the non-viewable area *
is highlighted in yellow for 3 seconds after the bird’s-

4-16 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

eye view is displayed.

CAUTION

In addition, the non-viewable corners are dis3
played in red (blink for the first 3 seconds) *
to remind the drivers to be cautious.

WARNING
.

Difference between predictive and actual
distances

Objects in the bird’s-eye view will
appear farther than the actual distance because the bird’s-eye view is
a pseudo view that is processed by
combining the views from the cameras on the outside mirrors, the
front and the rear of the vehicle.

Tall objects, such as a curb or
vehicle, may be misaligned or not
displayed at the seam of the views.

Objects that are above the camera
cannot be displayed.

The view for the bird’s-eye view may
be misaligned when the camera
position alters.

A line on the ground may be misaligned and is not seen as being
straight at the seam of the views.
The misalignment will increase as
the line proceeds away from the
vehicle.

The turn signal light may look like
the side-of-vehicle line. This is not a
malfunction.

SAA3571

Front-side view:
Guiding lines:
Guiding lines that indicate the width and the
front end of the vehicle are displayed on the
monitor.

The displayed guidelines and their locations on
the ground are for approximate reference only.
Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or
projecting objects will be actually located at
distances different from those displayed in the
monitor relative to the guidelines (refer to
illustrations). When in doubt, turn around and
view the objects as you are backing up, or park
and exit the vehicle to view the positioning of
objects behind the vehicle.

1 shows the front part
The front-of-vehicle line *
of the vehicle.
2 shows the vehicle
The side-of-vehicle line *
width including the outside mirrors.
3 of both the front *
1 and
The extensions *
2 lines are shown with a green dotted
side *
line.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-17

JVH1159X

JVH1160X

4-18 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

SAA1923

Backing up near a projecting object:
A do not touch the
The predictive course lines *
object in the display. However, the vehicle may
hit the object if it projects over the actual
backing up course.

course.

How to park with predictive course lines

WARNING
.

If the tires are replaced with different sized tires, the predictive course
lines may be displayed incorrectly.

On a snow-covered or slippery road,
there may be a difference between
the predictive course line and the
actual course line.

If the battery is disconnected or
becomes discharged, the predictive
course lines may be displayed incorrectly. If this occurs, please perform the following procedures:
— Turn the steering wheel from
lock to lock while the engine is
running.

SAA1980

SAA1897

— Drive the vehicle on a straight
road for more than 5 minutes.

1. Visually check that the parking space is safe
before parking your vehicle.

When the steering wheel is turned
with the ignition switch in the ACC
position, the predictive course lines
may be displayed incorrectly.

2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed on
A when the shift lever is moved
the screen *
to the R (Reverse) position.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-19

5. When the vehicle is parked in the space
completely, move the shift lever to the P
(Park) position and apply the parking brake.

AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
LIMITATIONS

How to switch the display
The Around View Monitor can display two split
views. Push the CAMERA button, change the
shift lever position, to switch between the
available views.

HOW TO ADJUST THE SCREEN VIEW
The display settings such as Display Mode,
Brightness, Contrast and Color of the Around
View Monitor can be adjusted.
1. Push the

WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for Around View Monitor. Failure to
operate the vehicle in accordance with
these system limitations could result in
serious injury or death.
.

Do not use the Around View Monitor with the outside mirrors in the
stored position, and make sure that
the liftgate is securely closed when
operating the vehicle using the
Around View Monitor.

The distance between objects
viewed on the Around View Monitor differs from the actual distance.

The cameras are installed above the
front grille, the outside mirrors and
above the rear license plate. Do not
put anything on the cameras.

When washing the vehicle with
highpressure water, be sure not to
spray it around the cameras. Otherwise, water may enter the camera
unit causing water condensation on

button.

2. Touch “Settings”.
3. Touch “System” and then touch “Camera
Settings”.
4. Select an item you wish to adjust.
SAA1898

5. Adjust the level of the setting item using the
TUNE knob.
NOTE:

3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the
steering wheel so that the predictive course
B enter the parking space *
C .
lines *
4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make the
D parallel to the
vehicle width guide lines *
C
parking space *
while referring to the
predictive course lines.

Do not adjust any of the display settings of
the Around View Monitor while the vehicle is moving. Make sure the parking brake
is firmly applied.

4-20 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

the lens, a malfunction, fire or an
electric shock.
.

Do not strike the cameras. They are
precision instruments. Doing so
could cause a malfunction or cause
damage resulting in a fire or an
electric shock.

.
.

The following are operating limitations and do
not represent a system malfunction:
.

.
.
.
.

The screen displayed on the Around View
Monitor will automatically return to the
previous screen 3 minutes after the CAMERA button has been pushed while the shift
lever is in a position other than the R
(Reverse) position.
When the view is switched, the display
images on the screen may be displayed with
some delay.
When the temperature is extremely high or
low, the screen may not display objects
clearly.
When strong light is shining directly on the
camera, objects may not be displayed
clearly.
The screen may flicker under fluorescent
light.

The colors of objects on the Around View
Monitor may differ somewhat from the actual
color of objects.
Objects on the monitor may not be clear and
the color of the object may differ in a dark
environment.
There may be differences in sharpness
between each camera view of the bird’seye view.
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the
camera, the Around View Monitor may not
display objects clearly. Clean the camera.
Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off
any wax with a clean cloth that has been
dampened with a mild detergent diluted with
water.

JVH1036X

There are some areas where the system will not
show objects and the system does not warn of
moving objects. When in the front or the rear
view display, an object below the bumper or on
1 . When in the
the ground may not be viewed *
3
bird’s-eye view, a tall object near the seam *
of the camera viewing areas will not appear in
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-21

the monitor

2 .
*

JVH1053X

System temporarily unavailable
When the “
” icon is displayed on the screen,
there will be abnormal conditions in the Around
View Monitor. This will not hinder normal
driving operation but the system should be
inspected. It is recommended you visit a
NISSAN dealer.

4-22 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

JVH1054X

When the “
” icon is displayed on the
screen, the camera image may be receiving
temporary electronic disturbances from surrounding devices. This will not hinder normal
driving operation but the system should be
inspected. It is recommended you visit a
NISSAN dealer.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of the

1 , the Around View Monitor may not
cameras *
display objects clearly. Clean the camera by
wiping with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild
cleaning agent and then wiping with a dry cloth.

JVH1224X

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION
.

Do not damage the camera as the
monitor screen may be adversely
affected.
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-23

MOVING OBJECT DETECTION
(MOD) (models with navigation
system)
vehicle. When maneuvering, always
use the outside mirror and rearview
mirror and turn and check the surrounding to ensure it is safe to
maneuver.
.

The system is deactivated at speeds
above 5 MPH (8 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds.

The MOD system is not designed to
detect the surrounding stationary
objects.

The Moving Object Detection (MOD) system
can inform the driver of moving objects when
driving out of garages, maneuvering into parking
lots and in other such instances.
The MOD system detects moving objects by
using image processing technology on the
image shown in the display.

MOD SYSTEM OPERATION
JVH1223X

1. CAMERA button

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and
instructions for proper use of the Mov-

The MOD system will turn on automatically
under the following conditions:

ing Object Detection system could result in serious injury or death.

The MOD system is not a substitute
for proper vehicle operation and is
not designed to prevent contact
with the objects surrounding the

4-24 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)
position.
When the CAMERA button is pushed to
switch from a different screen to the camera
view on the display.

is not displayed on the screen when in this view.

When the MOD system detects a moving object
near the vehicle, the yellow frame will be
displayed on the view where the objects are
detected and a chime will sound once. While the
MOD system continues to detect moving
objects, the yellow frame continues to be
displayed.

When vehicle speed decreases below
approximately 5 MPH (8 km/h).
The MOD system operates in the following
conditions when the camera view is displayed:
When the shift lever is in the P (Park) or N
(Neutral) position (CVT model) or the shift
lever is out of the R (Reverse) position (MT
model) and the vehicle is stopped, the MOD
system detects the moving objects in the
bird’s-eye view. The MOD system will not
operate if the outside mirrors are moving in
or out or if either door is opened.
. When the shift lever is in the D (Drive)
position (CVT model) or the shift lever is out
of the R (Reverse) position (MT model), and
the vehicle speed is below approximately 5
MPH (8 km/h), the MOD system detects
moving objects in the front view.
. When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)
position and the vehicle speed is below
approximately 5 MPH (8 km/h), the MOD
system detects moving objects in the rear
view. The MOD system will not operate if the
liftgate is open.
. When the ignition switch is placed in the
“OFF” position and then back to the “ON”
position.
The MOD system does not detect moving
objects in the front-side view. The MOD icon

JVH1256X
Front and bird’s-eye views

JVH0872X
Rear and bird’s-eye views

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-25

MOD SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

— When there is dirt, water drops
or snow on the camera lens.

WARNING

— When the position of the moving
objects in the display is not
changed.

Listed below are the system limitations
for MOD. Failure to operate the vehicle
in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or
death.
.

Excessive noise (for example, audio
system volume or open vehicle
window) will interfere with the
chime sound, and it may not be
heard.

The MOD system performance will
be limited according to environmental conditions and surrounding objects such as:

JVH1257X
Rear and front-side views
1 is
In the bird’s-eye view, the yellow frame *
displayed on each camera image (front, rear,
right, left) depending on where moving objects
are detected.
2 is displayed on each view
The yellow frame *
in the front view and rear view modes.
3 is displayed in the view
A blue MOD icon *
where the MOD system is operative. A gray
3 is displayed in the view where the
MOD icon *
MOD system is not operative.

If the MOD system is turned off, the MOD icon
3 is not displayed.
*

— When there is low contrast between background and the moving objects
— When there is blinking source of
light.
— When strong light such as another vehicle’s headlight or sunlight is present.

4-26 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

The MOD system might detect flowing water droplets on the camera
lens, white smoke from the muffler,
moving shadows, etc.

The MOD system may not function
properly depending on the speed,
direction, distance or shape of the
moving objects.

If your vehicle sustains damage to
the parts where the camera is
installed, leaving it misaligned or
bent, the sensing zone may be
altered and the MOD system may
not detect objects properly.

When the temperature is extremely
high or low, the screen may not
display objects clearly. This is not a
malfunction.

VENTILATORS
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of the
1 , the MOD system may not operate
cameras *
properly. Clean the camera by wiping with a
cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning
agent and then wiping with a dry cloth.

SAA3338

JVH1224X

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION
.

Do not damage the camera as the
monitor screen may be adversely
affected.

CENTER VENTILATORS
Adjust the air flow direction of ventilators as
illustrated.
Adjust the air flow direction of the ventilators by
moving the center knob (up/down and left/right)
until the preferred position is achieved.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-27

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

WARNING
.

The air conditioner cooling function
operates only when the engine is
running.

Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the support
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should not be left alone either. On
hot, sunny days, temperatures in a
closed vehicle could quickly become
high enough to cause severe or
possibly fatal injuries to people or
animals.

Do not use the recirculation mode
for long periods as it may cause the
interior air to become stale and the
windows to fog up.

SAA2381

SIDE VENTILATORS
Open or close the vents, and adjust the air flow
direction of ventilators as illustrated.

Start the engine and operate the heater and the
air conditioner system.
NOTE:
. Odors from inside and outside the
vehicle can build up in the air conditioner unit. Odor can enter the passenger compartment through the vents.
. When parking, set the heater and air
conditioner controls to turn off air

4-28 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

recirculation to allow fresh air into the
passenger compartment. This should
help reduce odors inside the vehicle.

MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER (if so
equipped)
To turn off the heater and air conditioner, turn the
fan speed control
dial to the OFF (0)
position.

Controls
Outside air circulation:
position. The
Move the air intake lever to the
air flow is drawn from outside the vehicle.

SAA3447

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Air intake lever (Outside air circulation
/Air
)
recirculation
Air flow control dial
Fan speed control
dial
A/C (Air Conditioner) button
Temperature control dial
Rear window defroster
button (See “Rear
window and outside mirror defroster switch”
(P.2-38).)

Air recirculation:
Move the air intake lever to the
position. The
air flow is circulated inside the vehicle.
Air flow control:
Turn the air flow control dial to change the air
flow mode.
—
—
—
—
—

Air flows from the center and side
ventilators.
Air flows from the center and side
ventilators and foot outlets.
Air flows mainly from the foot outlets.
Air flows from the defroster and foot
outlets.
Air flows mainly from the defroster outlets.

When the
or
position is selected,
the air conditioner will automatically turn on.
This will dehumidify the air and help to defog
the windows.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-29

Fan speed control:
Turn the fan speed control
increase the fan speed.

dial clockwise to

Turn the fan speed control
dial counterclockwise to decrease the fan speed.
A/C (Air Conditioner) operation:
Push the A/C button to turn on or off the air
conditioner. When the air conditioner is on, the
A/C indicator light on the button illuminates.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the
desired position between the middle and the
hot (right) position.
Ventilation:
This mode directs outside air to the side and
center ventilators.
1. Move the air intake lever to the

position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
3. Turn the fan speed control
desired position.

dial to the

When the
position is selected, the air
conditioner will automatically turn on. This
will dehumidify the air and help to defog the
windows.

Bi-level heating:
This mode directs cool air from the side and
center vents and warm air from the foot outlets.
When the temperature control dial is turned to
the maximum hot or cool position, the air
between the ventilators and the foot outlets is
the same temperature.

Temperature control:
Turn the temperature control dial to set the
desired temperature. Turn the dial between the
middle and the right position to select the hot
temperature. Turn the dial between the middle
and the left position to select the cool temperature.

Defrosting or defogging:
This mode directs the air to the defroster outlets
to defrost/defog the windows.

Heater operation

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the
desired position.

Heating:
This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot
outlets.

3. Turn the fan speed control
desired position.

Heating and defogging:
This mode heats the interior and defogs the
windows.

1. Move the air intake lever to the

position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
3. Turn the fan speed control
desired position.

dial to the

1. Move the air intake lever to the

position.

dial to the

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the
desired position between the middle and the
hot (right) position.
.

To remove frost from the outside surface of
the windshield quickly, turn the temperature
control dial to the maximum hot position and
the fan speed control
dial to the
maximum position.

4-30 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
3. Turn the fan speed control
desired position.

1. Move the air intake lever to the

dial to the

position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
3. Turn the fan speed control
desired position.

dial to the

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the
desired position.
When the
position is selected, the air
conditioner will automatically turn on. This will
dehumidify the air and help to defog the
windows.

Air conditioner operation
The air conditioner system should be operated
for approximately 10 minutes at least once a
month. This helps prevent damage to the air
conditioner system due to the lack of lubrication.

cooling.
A visible mist may be seen coming from the
ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air
is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a
malfunction.

Dehumidified heating:
This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the
air.
1. Move the air intake lever to the

position.

3. Turn the fan speed control
desired position.

1. Move the air intake lever to the

4. Push the A/C button on. (The A/C indicator
light will illuminate.)

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
3. Turn the fan speed control
desired position.

dial to the

4. Push the A/C button on. (The A/C indicator
light will illuminate.)
5. Turn the temperature control dial to the
desired position between the middle and the
cool (left) position.
.

For quick cooling when the outside temperature is high, move the air intake lever to
the
position. Be sure to move the air
intake lever to the
position for normal

When the
position is selected, the air
conditioner will automatically turn on. This will
dehumidify the air and help to defog the
windows.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.

Cooling:
This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.
position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the
desired position.

dial to the

5. Turn the temperature control dial to the
desired position between the middle and the
hot (right) position.
Dehumidified defogging:
This mode is used to defog the windows and
dehumidify the air.
1. Move the air intake lever to the

position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
3. Turn the fan speed control
desired position.

dial to the

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-31

AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONER (with
Integrated Control System)
Automatic operation (AUTO)
The AUTO mode may be used year-round as the
system automatically controls constant temperature, air flow distribution and fan speed.
To turn off the heater and air conditioner, push
the CLIMATE button to change to the Climate
Control Mode, then push the OFF button.
Cooling and dehumidified heating:
1. Push the AUTO button. (The AUTO indicator
will be displayed.)
2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the
preferred temperature. The temperature
range is between 608F (188C) and 908F
(328C).

SAA3443

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

AUTO button/Temperature control dial
OFF button
A/C button
CLIMATE button
Display screen*
Air flow control buttons
Fan speed control
dial

8.
9.
10.

button
Front defroster
/Air
Air intake button (Outside air circulation
)
recirculation
Rear window defroster
button (See “Rear
window and outside mirror defroster switch”
(P.2-38).)
Temperature is displayed in 8F (US) or 8C
(Canada).

4-32 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

A visible mist may be seen coming from the
ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air is
cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a malfunction.
Dehumidified defrosting/defogging:
1. Push the front defroster
button. (The
indicator light will illuminate.)
2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the
preferred temperature.

To remove moisture or fog on the front
window quickly, set the temperature to
the high temperature and the fan speed
to their maximum level.
After the windshield is cleared, push the
front defroster
button again. (The
indicator light will turn off.)
When the front defroster
button is
pushed, the air conditioner will automatically turn on to defog the windshield.
The outside air circulation mode will be
selected to improve the defogging performance.
When the
position is selected, the
air recirculation mode cannot be turned
on to prevent the windows from being
fogged up.

Manual operation
The manual mode can be used to control the
heater and air conditioner to your desired
settings.
To turn off the heater and air conditioner, push
the OFF button.
If the Drive Mode is indicated on the screen,
push the CLIMATE button to change to the
Climate Control Mode, then push the OFF
button.

Fan speed control:
Turn the fan speed control
fan speed.

.
dial to adjust the

Air flow control:
Push the air flow control buttons to change the
air flow mode:
—
—
—
—

Temperature control:
Turn the temperature control dial to set the
preferred temperature.

Push the air intake button to change the air
circulation mode. When the indicator light
on “
” side illuminates, the flowing air is
drawn from outside the vehicle.
Push and hold the air intake button for more
than 1.5 seconds to set the automatic
control between the outside air circulation
and air recirculation modes.
When the “
” or “
” position is
selected, the air recirculation mode does
not activate.
When setting the automatic control mode,
the indicator lights “
” and “
” will
blink twice indicating that the system is in
the automatic control mode.

The temperature range is between 608F (188C)
and 908F (328C).
Air intake control:
. Push the air intake button to change the air
circulation mode. When the indicator light
on “
” side illuminates, the flowing air is
recirculated inside the vehicle.
When the
or
position is selected,
the air recirculation mode cannot be turned
on to prevent the windows from being
fogged up.
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-33

Displaying Climate control
When in Climate Control Mode, the selected
temperature and airflow, and automatic mode or
manual mode are indicated on the display.
When in Drive Mode, the same items as above
are indicated, but on the bottom of the display.
To switch to Climate Control Mode, push the
CLIMATE control mode select button.

Setting climate ECO

JVH1245X
Air conditioner mode screen

When in Drive Mode, CLIMATE ECO can be
switched on or off. When CLIMATE ECO is
switched on, the climate control system operates to enhance fuel economy.

SAA2368

See “Setting the climate ECO mode” (P.5-24).

SAA3379
Drive mode screen

4-34 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

SAA3441

AUDIO SYSTEM
OPERATING TIPS (for automatic air
conditioner)
.

When the engine coolant temperature and
outside air temperature are low, the air flow
from the foot outlets may not operate. This is
not a malfunction. After the coolant temperature warms up, air will flow normally
from the foot outlets.
The automatic air conditioner is equipped
A
with sensors as illustrated. The sensors *
B
and *
on the instrument panel help
maintain a constant temperature. Do not
put anything on or around these sensors.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
The air conditioning system is equipped with an
in-cabin microfilter which collects dirt, pollen,
dust, etc. To make sure the air conditioner heats,
defogs, and ventilates efficiently, replace the
filter in accordance with the specified maintenance intervals listed in the “9. Maintenance
and schedules” section. It is recommended to
see a NISSAN dealer to replace the filter.
The filter should be replaced if the air flow
decreases significantly or if windows fog
up easily when operating the heater or air
conditioning system.

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

The air conditioner system in your vehicle is
charged with a refrigerant designed with the
environment in mind. This refrigerant will not
harm the earth’s ozone layer. Special charging equipment and lubricant are required when
servicing your vehicle air conditioner. Using
improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause
severe damage to your air conditioner system.
(See “Capacities and recommended fluids/
lubricants” (P.10-2) for air conditioner system
refrigerant and lubricant recommendations.)

Radio

Your NISSAN dealer will be able to service your
environmentally friendly air conditioner system.

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and push the FM·AM button to turn on
the radio. If you listen to the radio with the
engine not running, the ignition switch should be
placed in the ACC position.
Radio reception is affected by station signal
strength, distance from radio transmitter, buildings, bridges, mountains and other external
influences. Intermittent changes in reception
quality normally are caused by these external
influences.
Using a cellular phone in or near the
vehicle may influence radio reception
quality.

WARNING
The system contains refrigerant under
high pressure. To avoid personal injury,
any air conditioner service should be
done only by an experienced technician
with the proper equipment.

Radio reception:
Your vehicle radio system is equipped with
state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance
radio reception. These circuits are designed to
extend reception range, and to enhance the
quality of that reception.
However there are some general characteristics
of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect
radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even
when the finest equipment is used. These
characteristics are completely normal in a given
reception area, and do not indicate any mal-

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-35

Static and flutter: During signal interference from
buildings, large hills or due to antenna position,
usually in conjunction with increased distance
from the station transmitter, static or flutter can
be heard. This can be reduced by lowering the
treble setting to reduce the treble response.

function in your vehicle radio system.
Reception conditions will constantly change
because of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,
signal distance and interference from other
vehicles can work against ideal reception.
Described below are some of the factors that
can affect your radio reception.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflective
characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected signals reach the receiver at the same
time. The signals may cancel each other,
resulting in momentary flutter or loss of sound.

Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to come
from the audio system speakers. Storing the
device in a different location may reduce or
eliminate the noise.
SAA0306

FM radio reception:
Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 to 30
miles (40 to 48 km), with monaural (single
station) FM having slightly more range than
stereo FM. External influences may sometimes
interfere with FM station reception even if the
FM station is within 25 miles (40 km). The
strength of the FM signal is directly related to the
distance between the transmitter and receiver.
FM signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhibiting
many of the same characteristics as light. For
example they will reflect off objects.
Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from
a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade
and/or drift.

4-36 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

AM radio reception:
AM signals, because of their low frequency, can
bend around objects and skip along the ground.
In addition, the signals can be bounced off the
ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of
these characteristics. AM signals are also
subject to interference as they travel from
transmitter to receiver.
Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing
through freeway underpasses or in areas with
many tall buildings. It can also occur for several
seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in
areas where no obstacles exist.
Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical
power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

Satellite radio reception (if so equipped):
When the satellite radio is used for the first time
or the battery has been replaced, the satellite
radio may not work properly. This is not a
malfunction. Wait more than 10 minutes with the
satellite radio ON and the vehicle away from any
metal or large buildings for the satellite radio to
receive all of the necessary data.

.
.

The satellite radio mode requires an active
SiriusXM Satellite Radio subscription. The satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and
Guam.

Satellite radio performance may be affected if
cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite
radio signal.

.
.

If possible, do not put cargo near the satellite
antenna.
A buildup of ice on the satellite radio antenna
can affect satellite radio performance. Remove
the ice to restore satellite radio reception.

.
SAA0480

Compact Disc (CD) player
.
.

Do not force a compact disc into the CD
insert slot. This could damage the CD
and/or CD player.
During cold weather or rainy days, the
player may malfunction due to the
humidity. If this occurs, remove the CD

and dehumidify or ventilate the player
completely.
The player may skip while driving on
rough roads.
The CD player sometimes cannot function when the passenger compartment
temperature is extremely high. Decrease the temperature before use.
Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)
round discs that have the “COMPACT
disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc
or packaging.
Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight.
CDs that are of poor quality, dirty,
scratched, covered with fingerprints,
or that have pin holes may not work
properly.
The following CDs may not work properly:
— Copy control compact discs (CCCD)
— Recordable compact discs (CD-R)
— Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)
Do not use the following CDs as they
may cause the CD player to malfunction.
— 3.1 in (8 cm) discs

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-37

.
.

— CDs that are not round
— CDs with a paper label
— CDs that are warped, scratched, or
have abnormal edges
This audio system can only play prerecorded CDs. It has no capabilities to
record or burn CDs.
If the CD cannot be played, error
messages as the following examples
will be displayed.
Check Disc:
— Confirm that the CD is inserted
correctly (the label side is facing
up, etc.).
— Confirm that the CD is not bent or
warped and it is free of scratches.
Push Eject:
This is an error due to the temperature
inside the player is too high. Remove
the CD by pushing the EJECT button,
and after a short time reinsert the CD.
The CD can be played when the temperature of the player returns to normal.
Unplayable Track:
The file is unplayable in this audio
system (only MP3 or WMA CD).

USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection
Port

WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect or operate
the USB device while driving. Doing so
can be a distraction. If distracted you
could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION
.

Do not grab the USB port cover (if
so equipped) when pulling the USB
device out of the port. This could
damage the port and the cover.

Do not leave the USB cable in a
place where it can be pulled unintentionally. Pulling the cable may
damage the port.

4-38 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

The vehicle is not equipped with a USB device.
USB devices should be purchased separately
as necessary.
This system cannot be used to format USB
devices. To format a USB device, use a personal
computer.
In some states/area, the USB device for the
front seats plays only sound without images for
regulatory reasons, even when the vehicle is
parked.
This system supports various USB memory
devices, USB hard drives and iPod players.
Some USB devices may not be supported by
this system.
.

Partitioned USB devices may not be played
correctly.
. Some characters used in other languages
(Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are not displayed
properly on display. Using English language
characters with a USB device is recommended.
General notes for USB use:
Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner
information regarding the proper use and care
of the device.

Notes for iPod use:

Compressed Audio Files (MP3/WMA)

iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.

Explanation of terms:
. MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures
Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the
most well known compressed digital audio
file format. This format allows for near “CD
quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of
normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an
audio track can reduce the file size by
approximately a 10:1 ratio (Sampling: 44.1
kHz, Bit rate: 128 kbps) with virtually no
perceptible loss in quality. The compression
reduces certain parts of sound that seem
inaudible to most people.
. WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA) is a
compressed audio format created by Microsoft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA
codec offers greater file compression than
the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more
digital audio tracks in the same amount of
space when compared to MP3s at the same
level of quality.
. Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of
bits per second used by a digital music file.
The size and quality of a compressed digital
audio file is determined by the bit rate used
when encoding the file.
. Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency
is the rate at which the samples of a signal

.
.
.
.
.

Improperly plugging in the iPod may cause
a checkmark to be displayed on and off
(flickering). Always make sure that the iPod
is connected properly.
An iPod nano (1st Generation) may remain
in fast forward or rewind mode if it is
connected during a seek operation. In this
case, please manually reset the iPod.
An iPod nano (2nd Generation) will continue to fast-forward or rewind if it is
disconnected during a seek operation.
An incorrect song title may appear when the
Play Mode is changed while using an iPod
nano (2nd Generation)
Audiobooks may not play in the same order
as they appear on an iPod.
Large video files cause slow responses in an
iPod. The vehicle center display may
momentarily black out, but will soon recover.
If an iPod automatically selects large video
files while in the shuffle mode, the vehicle
center display may momentarily black out,
but will soon recover.

are converted from analog to digital (A/D
conversion) per second.
. Multisession — Multisession is one of the
methods for writing data to media. Writing
data once to the media is called a single
session, and writing more than once is
called a multisession.
. ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the
part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that
contains information about the digital music
file such as song title, artist, album title,
encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc.
ID3 tag information is displayed on the
Album/Artist/Track title line on the display.
* Windows and Windows Media are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States of America
and/or other countries.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-39

Playback order:

If there is a file in the top level of the disc,
“Root Folder” is displayed.
The playback order is the order in which the
files were written by the writing software.
Therefore, the files might not play in the
desired order.

SAA1025
Playback order chart

Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or
WMA files is as illustrated.
.

The names of folders not containing MP3 or
WMA files are not shown in the display.

4-40 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Specification chart (for models without navigation system):
CD, CD-R, CD-RW, USB2.0

Supported media

CD, CD-R, CD-RW: ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet
* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
* Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vista-based computer) are
not supported.

Supported file systems

USB memory: FAT16, FAT32
MP3
Supported versions*1
WMA*2

Version

MPEG1 Audio Layer 3

Sampling frequency

32 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate

32 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4

Version

WMA7, WMA8, WMA9

Sampling frequency

32 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate

32 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR4, 32 kbps - 320 kbps (WMA9 only)

Tag information (Song title and Artist name)

Folder levels
Displayable character codes*3
*1
*2
*3
*4

ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3, VER2.4 (MP3 only)
WMA tag (WMA only)

CD, CD-R, CD-RW

Folder levels: 8, Folders: 255, Files: 999 (Max. 255 files for one folder)

USB

Folder levels: 8, Folders 255, Files: 2500 (Max. 255 files for one folder)
Memory size: 4GB
01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16
Non-BOM Big Endian), 05: UNICODE (UTF-8)

Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.
Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played.
Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.
When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-41

Specification chart (for models with navigation system):
Supported media

CD, CD-R, CD-RW

Supported file systems

ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not
supported.

MP3
Supported
versions*1
WMA*2

Version

MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5

Sampling frequency

8 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate

8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR

Version

WMA7, WMA8, WMA9

Sampling frequency

32 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate

48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR

Tag information

ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)

Folder levels

Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)

Text character number limitation

128 characters

Displayable character codes*2

01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big
Endian), 05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)

*1
*2

Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.
Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.

4-42 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Troubleshooting guide:
Cause and Countermeasure

Symptom

Check if the disc or USB device was inserted correctly.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.
Cannot play

If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be
played.
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of
characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.
Check if the disc or USB device is protected by copyright.

Poor sound quality

Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Bit rate may be too low.

It takes a relatively long time before If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, or USB device, some time may be required
before the music starts playing.
the music starts playing.
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not
Music cuts off or skips
match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Skipping with high bit rate files

Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

Move immediately to the next song
when playing

When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3” or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by
copyright protection, there will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.

Songs do not play back in the
desired order

The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired
order.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-43

Bluetooth Audio player
Bluetooth is a trademark owned
by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and licensed to Robert Bosch GmbH
and Visteon Corporation.

.
.

Some Bluetooth audio devices may not be
recognized by the in-vehicle audio system.
It is necessary to set up the wireless
connection between a compatible Bluetooth audio device and the in-vehicle
Bluetooth module before using the Bluetooth audio player.
Operating procedure of the Bluetooth
audio player will vary depending on the
device. Make sure it is understood how to
operate an audio device before using it with
this system.
The Bluetooth audio player may be
stopped under the following conditions:
— Receiving a hands-free call.
— Checking the connection to the handsfree phone.
Do not place a Bluetooth audio device in
an area surrounded by metal or far away
from the in-vehicle Bluetooth module to
prevent tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption.
While an audio device is connected through
a Bluetooth wireless connection, the bat-

.
.

tery power of the device may discharge
quicker than usual.
This system supports the Bluetooth Audio
Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP).
Wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) and the Bluetooth
functions share the same frequency band
(2.4 GHz). Using the Bluetooth and the
wireless LAN functions at the same time may
slow down or disconnect the communication and cause undesired noise. It is
recommended that you turn off the wireless
LAN (Wi-Fi) when using the Bluetooth
functions.

4-44 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

15.
16.
17.

Radio station preset select buttons
TUNE·FOLDER knob
ENTER/SETTING button

FM-AM RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC
(CD) PLAYER (if so equipped)
Audio main operation
Head unit:
The auto loudness circuit enhances the low and
high frequency ranges automatically.
Power button/VOL (volume) control
knob:
Push the Power button/VOL (volume) control
knob to turn on and off the audio system.
Turn the Power button/VOL (volume) control
knob to adjust the volume.

JVH0866X

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

DISP (display) button
MEDIA button
CD eject button
FM·AM button
CD button
Color display
Apps button

8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.

SEEK TRACK (rewind) button
Radio SCAN tuning button
SEEK TRACK (forward) button
BACK button
Power button/VOL (volume) control knob
RPT (repeat) play button
RDM (random) play button

Audio settings:
The settings screen will appear when the
ENTER/SETTING button is pushed.
The following items are available in the settings
screen.
.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-45

Balance adjusts the sound between the left
and right speakers. Fade adjusts the sound
between the front and rear speakers.
Select the “Bass”, “Treble”, “Balance” or
“Fade” using the TUNE·FOLDER knob, and
then push the ENTER/SETTING button.
Turn the TUNE·FOLDER knob to adjust the
Bass, Treble, balance and Fade of the
screen to the preferred level. Push the
ENTER/SETTING button to apply the
setting.
Speed Sensitive Vol.
To change the Speed Sensitive Volume
(Speed Sensitive Vol.) level from off (0) to
5, turn the TUNE·FOLDER knob.
AUX Vol.
Controls the volume level of incoming sound
when an auxiliary device is connected to the
system. Choose a setting between +1 and
+3 or choose 0 to disable the feature
entirely.
Brightness and Contrast
Adjust the brightness and contrast of the
screen.
Select “Brightness” or “Contrast” using the
TUNE·FOLDER knob and then push the
E N T E R / S E T T I N G b u t t o n . Tu r n t h e
TUNE·FOLDER knob to adjust the brightness and contrast of the screen to the

preferred level. Push the ENTER/SETTING
button to apply the setting.
Clock Adjust
Adjust the clock according to the following
procedure.
1) Select “Clock Adjust” using the
TUNE·FOLDER knob and then push
the ENTER/SETTING button.
2) Adjust the hour with the TUNE·FOLDER
knob and then push the ENTER/
SETTING button.
3) Adjust the minute with the
TUNE·FOLDER knob and then push
the ENTER/SETTING button.
24 hour clock is not available.
On-Screen Clock
When this item is turned on, a clock is
always displayed in the upper right corner of
the screen.
Select the “On-Screen Clock” using the
TUNE·FOLDER knob and then push the
ENTER/SETTING button. You can toggle
between ON and OFF using the
TUNE·FOLDER knob.
RDS Display (if so equipped)
RDS (radio data system) information can be
shown on the display. Select “RDS Display”
using the TUNE·FOLDER knob and then
push the ENTER/SETTING button. You can

4-46 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

toggle between ON and OFF using the
TUNE·FOLDER knob. Push the ENTER/
SETTING button to apply the setting.
Language Select
The language settings can be changed.
Select “Language Select” using the
TUNE·FOLDER knob and then push the
ENTER/SETTING button. Use the
TUNE·FOLDER knob to select the preferred
language. Push the ENTER/SETTING button to apply the setting.

DISP button:
Display of the screen can be canceled by
pushing the
button. You can still listen to
music that is being played back even while the
screen display is turned off. If you want to
display the screen again, push the
button
once more. Pushing some of the audio source
buttons will also turn the screen back on and
display the screens of the corresponding
sources.
MEDIA button:
button will switch the audio
Pushing the
source as follows:
USB/iPod ? Bluetooth Audio ? AUX ? USB/
iPod

Apps button:
button launches the Smartphone
The
Integration mode. See “NissanConnectSM App
smartphone integration” (P.4-75).

FM-AM Radio operation
radio (FM·AM) band select:
button to change the band as
Push the
follows:

to
Radio memory buttons:
Up to 12 stations can be set for the FM band (6
each for FM1 and FM2) and 6 stations can be
set for the AM band.

If the system has been turned off while the CD
was playing, pushing the Power button will start
the CD.

1. Choose the radio band using the
button.

CD PLAY:
When the CD button is pushed while a CD is
loaded, the CD will start playing.

2. Tune to the desired station.
3. Push and hold the desired station preset
button
to
until beep sounds.

AM ? FM1 ? FM2? AM

4. The station indicator will then come on. The
station is now set to the button memory.

TUNE (Tuning):
Turn the TUNE·FOLDER knob for manual tuning.

5. Other buttons can be set in the same
manner.

SEEK tuning:
Push the
or
button to tune from low to
high or high to low frequencies and to stop at
the next broadcasting station.
SCAN tuning:
button to tune from low to high
Push the
frequencies and stop at each broadcasting
station for several seconds. Pushing the button
again during this several seconds period will
stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain
tuned to that station.
If the
button is not pushed within this
period, SCAN tuning moves to the next station.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse
opens, the station memory will be erased. In that
case, reset the desired stations.

CD player operation

SEEK TRACK:
or
button is pushed and hold
When the
while the CD is being played, the CD will play
while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the
button is released, the CD will return to normal
play speed.
When the
or
button is pushed while
the CD is being played, the next track or the
beginning of the current track on the CD will be
played. Push the
button again to select the
previous track.

Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC
position. Insert the Compact Disc (CD) into the
slot with the label side facing up. The CD will be
guided automatically into the slot and start
playing.
After loading the CD, the number of tracks on
the CD and the play time will appear on the
display.
If another audio source is already operating, it
will automatically turn off and the CD will play.
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-47

REPEAT (RPT):
When the RPT button is pushed while the CD is
played, the play pattern can be changed as
follows:
(CD)
(Normal) ⇔ 1 Track Repeat
(CD with compressed audio files)
(Normal) ? 1 Folder Repeat ? 1 Track Repeat
? (Normal)
RANDOM (RDM):
When the RDM button is pushed while a CD is
being played, the play pattern can be changed
as follows:
(CD)
(Normal) ⇔ 1 Disc Random

CD eject:
button is pushed with the CD
When the
loaded, the CD will be ejected.
If the CD comes out and is not removed, it
will be pulled back into the slot to protect
it.

USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection
port

(CD with compressed audio files)
(Normal) ? 1 Disc Random ? 1 Folder
Random ? (Normal)

CAUTION
.

Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Inserting a USB device
tilted or upside-down into the port
may damage the port. Make sure
that the USB device is connected
correctly to the USB port.

4-48 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Do not grab the USB port cover (if
so equipped) when pulling a USB
device out of the port. This could
damage the port and the cover.

Do not leave a USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally. Pulling the cable may damage
the port.

Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner
information regarding the proper use and care
of the device.

Next/Previous File and Fast
Forward/Rewind:
When the
or
button is pushed and hold
while a USB memory is being played, the USB
memory will play while forwarding or rewinding.
When the button is released, the USB memory
will return to normal play speed.
When the
or
button is pushed while
the USB memory is being played, the next track
or the beginning of the current track on the USB
memory will be played. Push the
button
again to select the previous track.
SAA3444

USB main operation:
The USB connection port is located on the
lower part of the instrument panel. Connect a
USB memory device into the connector. When
the audio system operates, the system will
switch to the USB memory device mode
automatically.
If the system has been turned off while the USB
memory device was playing, pushing the Power
button will start the USB memory device.
MEDIA button:
To change to the USB mode, push the
button with a USB connected until the USB
mode is selected.

Folder selection:
To change to another folder in the USB memory,
choose a folder displayed on the screen using
the TUNE·SCROLL knob.
REPEAT (RPT):
When the RPT button is pushed while the USB
memory is played, the play pattern can be
change as follows.
To change the play mode, push the RPT button
repeatedly and the mode will change as follows.

RANDOM (RDM):
When the RDM button is pushed while a USB
memory is being played, the play pattern can be
changed as follows.
To change the play mode, push the RDM button
repeatedly, and the mode will change as follows.
(Normal) ? All Random ? 1 Folder Random ?
(Normal)
BACK button:
When the BACK button is pushed, it returns to
the previous display.

iPod player operation

(Normal) ? 1 Folder Repeat ? 1 Track Repeat
? (Normal)

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-49

connected to the vehicle.

CAUTION
.

Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Inserting the USB device
tilted or up-side-down into the port
may damage the port. Make sure
that the USB device is connected
correctly into the USB port.
Do not grab the USB port cover (if
so equipped) when pulling the USB
device out of the port. This could
damage the port and the cover.
Do not leave the USB cable in a
place where it can be pulled unintentionally. Pulling the cable may
damage the port.

Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner
information regarding the proper use and care
of the device.
Connecting iPod:
The USB connection port is located on the
lower part of the instrument panel. Connect the
iPod cable to the USB connector. See “USB
(Universal Serial Bus) connection port” (P.4-48).
When the audio system operates, the system
will switch to the iPod mode automatically. The
battery of the iPod is charged while the cable is

Depending on the version of the iPod , the
display on the iPod shows a NISSAN or
Accessory Attached screen when the connection is completed. When the iPod is connected
to the vehicle, the iPod music library can only
be operated by the vehicle audio controls.
* iPod and iPhone are a trademark of Apple
Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Compatibility:
The following models are compatible:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

iPod nano 1G (Firmware version 1.3.1 -)
iPod nano 2G (Firmware version 1.1.3 -)
iPod nano 3G (Firmware version 1.0.0 -)
iPod nano 4G (Firmware version 1.0.2 -)
iPod nano 5G (Firmware version 1.0.1 -)
iPod nano 6G (Firmware version 1.0 -)
iPod nano 7G (Firmware version 1.0.0 -)
iPod 5G (Firmware version 1.2.1 -)
iPod classic (Firmware version 1.0.0 -)
iPod Touch (iOS 1.1 -)
iPod Touch 2G (iOS 2.1.1 -)
iPod Touch 3G (iOS 3.1 -)
iPod Touch 4G (iOS 4.1 -)
iPod Touch 5G (iOS 6.0.0 -)

4-50 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

. iPhone (iOS 1.0.0 - 2.2.1)
. iPhone 3G (iOS 2.1 -)
. iPhone 3GS (iOS 3.0 -)
. iPhone 4/4S (iOS 4.0 -)
. iPhone 5 (iOS 6.0.0 -)
Operations attributable to firmware update by
Apple are not guaranteed.
iPod main operation:
The system operates when the ignition switch is
in the ON or ACC position. Push the
button
repeatedly to switch to the iPod mode.
If the system was turned off while the iPod was
playing, pushing the Power button will start the
iPod.
If another audio source is playing and the iPod
is connected, pushing the
button repeatedly will change the system to the iPod mode.
When in the iPod mode, the interface for iPod
operation is shown on the audio display. The
items on the menu list can be scrolled by turning
the TUNE·FOLDER dial while the iPod is
operational. To select an item, push the
ENTER/SETTING button. The following items
in the iPod menu appear on the display.
.
.

Now playing
Playlists

. Artists
. Albums
. Songs
. Podcasts
. Genres
. Composers
. Audiobooks
. Shuffle Songs
For more information about each item, see the
iPod Owner’s Manual.
Next/Previous Track and Fast
Forward/Rewind:
When the
or
button is pushed and hold
while the iPod is playing, the iPod will play
while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the
button is released, the iPod will return to the
normal play speed.
When the
or
button is pushed while the
iPod is playing, the next track or the beginning
of the current track on the iPod will be played.
Push the
button again to select the previous
track.

RPT (repeat) button:
button is pushed while a track is
When the
being played, the play pattern can be changed
as follows:
(Repeat Off) ? 1 Track Repeat? All Repeat ?
(Repeat Off)
RDM (random) button:
button is pushed while a track is
When the
being played, the play pattern can be changed
as follows:

Regulatory information:
Bluetooth trademark:
Bluetooth is a trademark owned
by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and licensed to Visteon Corporation.

Connecting Bluetooth device:
To connect your Bluetooth device to the
vehicle, follow the procedure below:
1. Push the ENTER/SETTING button.

(Shuffle Off) ? Track Shuffle ? (Shuffle Off)
BACK button:
The display will return to the previous screen.

Bluetooth audio player operation
If you have a compatible Bluetooth audio
device that is capable of playing audio files,
the device can be connected to the vehicle’s
audio system so that the audio files on the
device play through the vehicle’s speakers.

Push the
or
button more than once to
skip through the tracks.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-51

audio mode is displayed on the screen.
The controls for the Bluetooth audio are
displayed on the screen. Use the Preset
button to play and use the Preset
button to
pause.

JVH0620X

JVH0370X

2. Select “Bluetooth” .

AUX (Auxiliary) input jack

3. Select “Add Phone or Device” . This same
screen can be accessed to remove, replace
or select a different Bluetooth device.

The AUX input jack is located on the lower part
of the instrument panel. The AUX input jack
accepts any standard analog audio input such
as from a portable cassette tape/CD player,
MP3 player or laptop computer.

4. The system acknowledges the command
and asks you to initiate a connection from
the Bluetooth device. The procedure for
connecting a Bluetooth device varies
according to the cellular phone model. See
the Owner’s manual of the Bluetooth
device for details.
Bluetooth audio main operation:
To switch to the Bluetooth audio mode, push
the
button repeatedly until the Bluetooth

4-52 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Push the
button repeatedly to play a
compatible device when it is plugged into the
AUX input jack.
NISSAN strongly recommends using a stereo
mini plug cable when connecting your music
device to the audio system. Music may not play
properly when a monaural cable is used.

14.
15.
16.

RDM (random) play button
Radio station preset select buttons
ENTER/SETTING button/TUNE·SCROLL control knob

FM-AM-SAT RADIO WITH COMPACT
DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type A) (if so
equipped)
For all operation precautions, see “Audio operation precautions” (P.4-35).
.

.
JVH1055X

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

XM band select button
CD eject button
FM·AM button
MEDIA button
Color display
Apps button
Radio CAT (category)/REW (rewind) button for
SEEK/TRACK

8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.

Radio SCAN tuning button
Radio CAT (category)/FF (fast forward) button
for SEEK/TRACK
BACK button
DISP (display) button
Power button/VOL (volume) control knob
RPT (repeat) play button

No satellite radio reception is available when
the SAT band option is selected unless the
optional satellite receiver and antenna are
installed, and there is an active SiriusXM
Satellite Radio subscription.
The satellite radio mode requires an active
SiriusXM Satellite Radio subscription. The
satellite radio is not available in Alaska,
Hawaii and Guam.
It may take some time to receive the
activation signal after subscribing the SiriusXM Satellite Radio. After receiving the
activation signal, an available channel list will
be automatically updated in the radio. Push
the ignition switch from LOCK to ACC to
update the channel list.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-53

Audio main operation
The audio system operates when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON or ACC position.
Head unit:
The auto loudness circuit enhances the low and
high frequency ranges automatically.
Power button / VOL (volume) control
knob:
Push the Power button/VOL (volume) control
knob to turn on and off the audio system.

Turn the Power button/VOL (volume) control
knob to adjust the volume.
Audio settings:
The settings screen will appear when pushing
the ENTER/SETTING button.
The following items are available in the settings
screen.
.

Bluetooth
It is possible to set the Bluetooth settings.
For details of the Bluetooth settings, see
“Bluetooth settings” (P.4-88).
Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade
Controls the sound of the audio system.
Balance adjusts the sound between the left
and right speakers. Fade adjusts the sound
between the front and rear speakers.
Select the “Bass”, “Treble”, “Balance” or

“Fade” using the TUNE·SCROLL control
knob and then push the ENTER/SETTING
button. Turn the TUNE·SCROLL control
knob to adjust the Bass, Treble, balance
and Fade of the screen to the preferred
level. Push the ENTER/SETTING button to
apply the setting.
Brightness and Contrast
Adjust the brightness and contrast of the
screen.
Select the “Brightness” or “Contrast” using
the TUNE·SCROLL control knob and then
push the ENTER/SETTING button. Turn the
TUNE·SCROLL control knob to adjust the
brightness and contrast of the screen to the
preferred level. Push the ENTER/SETTING
button to apply the setting.
Clock Adjust
Adjust the clock according to the following
procedure.
1) Select “Clock Adjust” using the TUNE·SCROLL control knob and then
push the ENTER/SETTING button.
2) Adjust the hour with the TUNE·SCROLL
control knob and then push the ENTER/
SETTING button.
3) Adjust the minute with the TUNE·SCROLL control knob and then push the
ENTER/SETTING button.

4-54 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

24 hour clock is not available.
On-Screen Clock
When this item is turned on, a clock is
always displayed in the upper right corner of
the screen.
Select the “On-Screen Clock” using the
TUNE·SCROLL control knob and then push
the ENTER/SETTING button. You can toggle between ON and OFF using the
TUNE·SCROLL control knob.
RDS Display (if so equipped)
RDS (radio data system) information can be
shown on the display. Select “RDS Display”
using the TUNE·SCROLL control knob and
then push the ENTER/SETTING button. You
can toggle between ON and OFF using the
TUNE·SCROLL control knob. Push the
ENTER/SETTING button to apply the
setting.
Speed Sensitive Vol.
To change the Speed Sensitive Volume
(Speed Sensitive Vol.) level from off (0) to
5, turn the TUNE·SCROLL control knob.
AUX Vol.
Controls the volume level of incoming sound
when an auxiliary device is connected to the
system. Choose a setting between +1 and
+3 or choose 0 to disable the feature
entirely.

Language Select
The language settings can be changed.
Select “Language Select” using the TUNE·SCROLL control knob and then push the
ENTER/SETTING button. Use the TUNE·SCROLL control knob to select the
preferred language. Push the ENTER/
SETTING button to apply the setting.

smartphone integration” (P.4-75).

FM-AM-SAT Radio operation
radio (FM·AM) band select:
Pushing the FM·AM button will change the band
as follows:
AM ? FM1 ? FM2 ? AM

DISP button:
Display of the screen can be canceled by
button. You can still listen to
pushing the
music that is being played back even while the
screen display is turned off. If you want to
display the screen again, push the
button
once more. Pushing some of the audio source
buttons will also turn the screen back on and
display the screens of the corresponding
sources.

radio (SAT) band select:
Pushing the XM band select button will change
the band as follows:

MEDIA button:
Pushing the
button will switch the audio
source as follows:

The satellite radio is not available in Alaska,
Hawaii and Guam.

TUNE (Tuning):
. For AM and FM radio
Turn the radio TUNE·SCROLL control knob
for manual tuning.
. For SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Turn the radio TUNE·SCROLL control knob
to seek channels from all of the categories
when any category is not selected.

XM1 ? XM2 ? XM3 ? XM1
When the XM band select button is pushed
while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
position, the radio will come on at the channel
last played.
The last channel played will also come on when
the Power button is pushed to ON.

CD ?USB/iPod ? Bluetooth Audio ? AUX ?
CD

If another audio source is playing when the radio
band select button is turned to ON, the audio
source will automatically be turned off and the
last radio channel played will come on.

Apps button:
The
button launches the Smartphone
Integration mode. See “NissanConnectSM App

When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the
radio will automatically change from stereo to
monaural reception.

SEEK tuning/CAT (category):
For AM and FM radio
or
to tune
Push the SEEK button
from low to high or high to low frequencies
and to stop at the next broadcasting station.
For SiriusXM Satellite Radio
or
to tune to
Push the SEEK button
the first channel of the next or previous
category.

SCAN tuning:
Push the SCAN tuning button to tune from low
to high frequencies and stop at each broadcasting station for several seconds. Pushing the
button again during this several seconds period
will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain
tuned to that station.
If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 5
seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-55

station.

CD player operation

to
Station memory operations:
12 stations can be set for the FM band (6 each
for FM1 and FM2) and 6 stations can be set for
the AM band.

Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC
position, and insert the compact disc (CD) into
the slot with the label side facing up. The CD will
be guided automatically into the slot and start
playing.

1. Choose the radio band using the
button.

beginning of the current track on the CD will be
played. Push the
button again to select the
previous track.
RPT (repeat) button:
button is pushed while the CD is
When the
played, the play pattern can be changed as
follows:

2. Tune to the desired station.

After loading the CD, the number of tracks on
the CD and the play time will appear on the
display.

3. Push and hold the desired station preset
button
to
until beep sounds.

If another audio source is already operating, it
will automatically turn off and the CD will play.

4. The station indicator will then come on.
Memorizing is now complete.

If the system was turned off while the CD was
playing, pushing the Power button will start the
CD.

(Normal) ? 1 Folder Repeat ? 1 Track Repeat
? (Normal)

PLAY:
button until
With a CD loaded, press the
the CD mode is displayed on the screen.

RDM (random) button:
button is pushed while a CD is
When the
being played, the play pattern can be changed
as follows:

5. Other buttons can be set in the same
manner.
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse
opens, the station memory will be erased. In that
case, reset the desired stations.

Next/Previous Track and Fast
Forward/Rewind :
When the
or
button is pushed and hold
while the CD is being played, the CD will play
while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the
button is released, the CD will return to normal
play speed.
When the
or
button is pushed while
the CD is being played, the next track or the

4-56 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

(CD)
(Normal) ⇔ 1 Track Repeat
(CD with compressed audio files)

(CD)
(Normal) ⇔ 1 Disc Random
(CD with compressed audio files)
(Normal) ? 1 Disc Random ? 1 Folder
Random ? (Normal)
CD eject button:
button is pushed with the CD
When the
loaded, the CD will be ejected.

If the CD comes out and is not removed, it
will be pulled back into the slot to protect
it.

USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection
port

CAUTION
.

Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Inserting a USB device
tilted or upside-down into the port
may damage the port. Make sure
that the USB device is connected
correctly to the USB port.
Do not grab the USB port cover (if
so equipped) when pulling a USB
device out of the port. This could
damage the port and the cover.

Do not leave a USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally. Pulling the cable may damage
the port.

Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner
information regarding the proper use and care
of the device.

SAA3444

USB main operation:
The USB outlet connector is located on the
lower part of the instrument panel. Connect a
USB memory device into the connector. When
the audio system operates, the system will
switch to the USB memory device mode
automatically.
If the system has been turned off while the USB
memory device was playing, pushing the Power
button will start the USB memory device.
MEDIA button:
To change to the USB mode, push the
button with a USB connected until the USB
mode is selected.
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-57

Next/Previous File and Fast
Forward/Rewind:
When the
or
button is pushed and held
while a USB memory is being played, the USB
memory will play while forwarding or rewinding.
When the button is released, the USB memory
will return to normal play speed.
When the
or
button is pushed while
the USB memory is being played, the next track
or the beginning of the current track on the USB
memory will be played. Push the
button
again to select the previous track.
Folder selection:
To change to another folder in the USB memory,
choose a folder displayed on the screen using
the TUNE·SCROLL knob.
REPEAT (RPT):
When the RPT button is pushed while the USB
memory is played, the play pattern can be
change as follows.
To change the play mode, push the RPT button
repeatedly and the mode will change as follows.

RANDOM (RDM):
When the RDM button is pushed while a USB
memory is being played, the play pattern can be
changed as follows.

CAUTION
.

Do not grab the USB port cover (if
so equipped) when pulling the USB
device out of the port. This could
damage the port and the cover.

Do not leave the USB cable in a
place where it can be pulled unintentionally. Pulling the cable may
damage the port.

To change the play mode, push the RDM button
repeatedly, and the mode will change as follows.
(Normal) ? All Random ? 1 Folder Random ?
(Normal)
BACK button:
When the BACK button is pushed, it returns to
the previous display.

iPod player operation

(Normal) ? 1 Folder Repeat ? 1 Track Repeat
? (Normal)

4-58 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner
information regarding the proper use and care
of the device.
Connecting iPod:
The USB port is located on the lower part of the
instrument panel. Connect the iPod cable to
the USB connector. See “USB (Universal Serial
Bus) connection port” (P.4-57). When the audio
system operates, the system will switch to the
iPod mode automatically. The battery of the
iPod is charged while the cable is connected to

the vehicle.

. iPhone (iOS 1.0.0 - 2.2.1)
. iPhone 3G (iOS 2.1 -)
. iPhone 3GS (iOS 3.0 -)
. iPhone 4/4S (iOS 4.0 -)
. iPhone 5 (iOS 6.0.0 -)
Operations attributable to firmware update by
Apple are not guaranteed.
iPod main operation:
The system operates when the ignition switch is
in the ON or ACC position. Push the
button
repeatedly to switch to the iPod mode.
If the system was turned off while the iPod was
playing, pushing the Power button will start the
iPod.
If another audio source is playing and the iPod
is connected, pushing the
button repeatedly will change the system to the iPod mode.
When in the iPod mode, the interface for iPod
operation is shown on the audio display. The
items on the menu list can be scrolled by turning
the TUNE·SCROLL dial while the iPod is
operational. To select an item, push the
ENTER/SETTING button. The following items
in the iPod menu appear on the display.
.
.

. Artists
. Albums
. Songs
. Podcasts
. Genres
. Composers
. Audiobooks
. Shuffle Songs
For more information about each item, see the
iPod Owner’s Manual.
Next/Previous Track and Fast
Forward/Rewind:
When the
or
button is pushed and hold
while the iPod is playing, the iPod will play
while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the
button is released, the iPod will return to the
normal play speed.
When the
or
button is pushed while
the iPod is playing, the next track or the
beginning of the current track on the iPod will
be played. Push the
button again to select
the previous track.

Now playing
Playlists

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-59

Regulatory information:
Bluetooth trademark:
Bluetooth is a trademark owned
by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and licensed to Visteon Corporation.

Connecting Bluetooth device:
To connect your Bluetooth device to the
vehicle, follow the procedure below:
1. Push the ENTER/SETTING button.

(Shuffle Off) ? Track Shuffle ? (Shuffle Off)
BACK button:
The display will return to the previous screen.

JVH0620X

2. Select “Bluetooth” .
3. Select “Add Phone” . This same screen can
be accessed to remove, replace or select a
different Bluetooth device.
4. The system acknowledges the command
and asks you to initiate a connection from
the Bluetooth device. The procedure for
connecting a Bluetooth device varies
according to the cellular phone model. See
the Owner’s manual of the Bluetooth
device for details.
Bluetooth audio main operation:
To switch to the Bluetooth audio mode, push
the
button repeatedly until the Bluetooth

4-60 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

audio mode is displayed on the screen.
The controls for the Bluetooth audio are
displayed on the screen. Use the Preset
button to play and use the Preset
button to
pause.

JVH0370X

AUX (Auxiliary) input jack
The AUX input jack is located on the lower part
of the instrument panel. The AUX input jack
accepts any standard analog audio input such
as from a portable cassette tape/CD player,
MP3 player or laptop computer.
Push the
button repeatedly to play a
compatible device when it is plugged into the
AUX input jack.
NISSAN strongly recommends using a stereo
mini plug cable when connecting your music
device to the audio system. Music may not play
properly when a monaural cable is used.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-61

12.

SXM button*

FM-AM-SAT RADIO WITH COMPACT
DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type B) (if so
equipped)
*No satellite radio reception is available when
the SXM button is pushed to access satellite
radio stations unless optional satellite receiver
and antenna are installed and a SiriusXM
Satellite Radio service subscription is active.
Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii
and Guam.
For all operation precautions, see “Audio operation precautions” (P.4-35).

Audio main operation

JVH0738X

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

CD eject button
FM·AM button
AUX button
CD insert slot
button
Push to display the apps information screen. For
details, see “How to use the APPS·i button”
(P.4-5).

6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

Backward seek button and
Forward
seek button
BACK button
TUNE knob / AUDIO button
Display screen
ON·OFF button / VOL (volume) control knob
CD button

4-62 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

ON·OFF button / VOL (volume) control
knob:
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and push the ON·OFF button while the
system is off to call up the available audio source
that was playing immediately before the system
was turned off.
To turn the system off, push the ON·OFF button.
Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to adjust the
volume.
This vehicle may be equipped with Speed
Sensitive Volume. When this feature is active,
the audio volume changes as the driving speed

changes.
Audio settings:
button.
1. push the
2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “Audio” key.
Use the touch-screen to adjust the following
items to the desired setting:
. Bass:
Adjusts the bass to the desired level.
. Treble:
Adjusts the treble to the desired level.
. Balance:
Adjusts the balance to the desired level.
Balance adjusts the sound level between
the left and right speakers.
. Fade:
Adjusts the fade to the desired level.
Fade adjusts the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
. Speed Sensitive Vol.:
Adjusts the speed sensitive volume
function, which increases the volume of
the audio system as the speed of the
vehicle increases. Set to “OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting,
the more the volume increases in relation
to vehicle speed.

AUX Volume Level:
Controls the volume level of incoming
sound when an auxiliary device is connected to the system. Available options
are Low (Quiet), Medium, and High
(Loud).

Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be
adjusted by pushing the AUDIO control knob
and turning it to select the item to adjust. When
the desired item is shown on the display, turn the
tuning to adjust and then push the AUDIO
button until the display returns to the main audio
screen. If the button is not pushed for approximately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display will
automatically reappear.
SXM settings:
To view the SXM settings:
1. Push the

FM/AM/SAT radio operation
FM·AM button:
Push the FM·AM button to change the band as
follows:
AM ? FM1 ? FM2 ? AM
If another audio source is playing when the
FM·AM button is pushed, the audio source
playing will automatically be turned off and the
last radio station played will begin playing.
The FM stereo indicator (ST) is shown on the
screen during FM stereo reception. When the
stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio
automatically changes from stereo to monaural
reception.
SXM band select:
Pushing the SXM button will change the band
as follows:

button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

SXM1* ? SXM2* ? SXM3* ? SXM1*
(satellite, if so equipped)

3. Touch the “SXM” key.
The signal strength, activation status and other
information are displayed on the screen.

When the SXM button is pushed while the
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the
radio will come on at the last station played.
The last station played will also come on when
the ON·OFF button is pushed.
*When the SXM button is pushed, the satellite
radio mode will be skipped unless an optional
satellite receiver and antenna are installed and a

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-63

SiriusXM Satellite Radio service subscription is
active. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska,
Hawaii and Guam.
If a compact disc is playing when the SXM
button is pushed, the compact disc will automatically be turned off and the last radio station
played will come on.
While the radio is in SXM mode, the operation
can be controlled through the touch-screen.
Touch the “Channels” key to display a list of
channels. Touch a channel displayed on the list
to change to that channel. Touch the “Categories” key to display a list of categories. Touch
a category displayed on the list to display
options within that category.

Tuning with the TUNE knob:
The radio can also be manually tuned using the
TUNE knob. When in FM or AM mode, turn the
TUNE knob to the left for lower frequencies or to
the right for higher frequencies. When in SXM
mode, turn the TUNE knob to change the
channel.
SEEK tuning:
When in FM or AM mode, push the seek buttons
or
to tune from low to high or high to
low frequencies and to stop at the next broadcasting station.
When in SXM mode, push the seek buttons
or
to change the category.

Tuning with the touch-screen:
When in AM or FM mode, the radio can be
tuned using the touch-screen. To bring up the
visual tuner, touch the “Tune” key on the lower
right corner of the screen. A screen appears
with a bar running from low frequencies on the
left to high frequencies on the right. Touch the
screen at the location of the frequency you wish
to tune and the station will change to that
frequency. To return to the regular radio display
screen, touch the “OK” key.

4-64 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

JVH0741X

1 to 6 Station memory operations:
Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (6
for FM1, 6 for FM2) and six stations can be set
for the AM band. Eighteen stations can be set
for the SXM band (6 for SXM1, 6 for SXM2, 6
for SXM3).
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
using the FM·AM select button or choose
the radio band SXM1, SXM2, SXM3 using
the SXM button.
2. Tune to the desired station using manual or
seek tuning. Touch and hold any of the
desired station memory keys (1 – 6) until a
beep sound is heard.

3. The channel indicator will then come on and
the sound will resume. Programming is now
complete.
4. Other keys can be set in the same manner.
If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse
opens, the radio memory will be erased. In that
case, reset the desired stations.
Presets can also be selected by touching the
desired preset number on the screen.

Compact Disc (CD) player operation
If the radio is already operating, it automatically
turns off and the compact disc begins to play.
CD button:
When the CD button is pushed with the system
off and the compact disc loaded, the system will
turn on and the compact disc will start to play.

CD/MP3/WMA display mode:
Menu item
CD/MP3 display mode

While listening to a CD or an MP3/WMA CD, certain text may be displayed (when a
CD encoded with text is being used). Depending on how the CD or MP3/WMA CD
is encoded, the text is displayed listing the artist, album and song title. There are
other keys displayed on the screen when a CD is playing:

Random

Touch the “Random” key to apply a random play pattern to the CD. If an MP3 CD is
playing, touching “Random” or alternates between Random Folder, and Random All.
This text will appear on the display. To cancel Random mode, touch the “Random”
key until the key is no longer highlighted.

Repeat

Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play pattern to the CD. If an MP3 CD is
playing, touching “Repeat” alternates between repeating the current song and
repeating the current folder. This text will appear on the display. To cancel Repeat
mode, touch the “Repeat” key until the key is no longer highlighted.

Browse

Touch the “Browse” key to display the titles on the CD in list format. Touch the title of
a song in the list to begin playing that song. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching the
“Browse” key will also list the folders on the disc. Follow the procedure for selecting
a song with the touch-screen to choose a folder.

When the CD button is pushed with a compact
disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio will
automatically be turned off and the compact
disc will start to play.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-65

SEEK (Fast Forward/Rewind)
buttons:
Push and hold the seek buttons
or
for
1.5 seconds while the compact disc is playing to
reverse or fast forward the track being played.
The compact disc plays at an increased speed
while reversing or fast forwarding. When the
button is released, the compact disc returns to
normal play speed.

CD eject button:
When the button is pushed with a compact disc
loaded, the compact disc will eject and the last
source will be played.
If the disc is not removed within 10 seconds, the
disc will reload.

SEEK (Previous/Next Track)
buttons:
while a CD or MP3/
Push the seek button
WMA CD is playing to return to the beginning of
the current track. Push the seek button
several times to skip backward several tracks.
while a CD or MP3/
Push the seek button
WMA CD is playing to advance one track. Push
the seek button
several times to skip
forward several tracks. If the last track on a
CD is skipped, the first track on the disc is
played. If the last track in a folder of an MP3/
WMA CD is skipped, the first track of the next
folder is played.

4-66 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

JVH0370X

AUX (Auxiliary) input
The AUX IN jack is located on the lower center
of the instrument panel. The AUX IN jack
accepts any standard analog audio input such
as from a portable cassette tape/CD player,
MP3 player or a laptop computer. Push the AUX
button to play a compatible device plugged into
the AUX IN jack.
NISSAN strongly recommends using a stereo
mini plug cable when connecting your music
device to the audio system. Music may not play
properly when a monaural cable is used.

Audio file operation:
AUX button:

CAUTION

JVH0742X

USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection
port
Connecting a device to the USB port:

WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect, or operate
the USB device while driving. Doing so
can be a distraction. If distracted you
could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident or serious injury.

Do not grab the USB port cover (if
so equipped) when pulling the USB
device out of the port. This could
damage the port and the cover.

Do not leave the USB cable in a
place where it can be pulled unintentionally. Pulling the cable may
damage the port

Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC
position and push the AUX button to switch to
the USB input mode. If another audio source is
playing and a USB memory device is inserted,
push the AUX button until the center display
changes to the USB memory mode.
If the system has been turned off while the USB
memory was playing, push the ON·OFF button
to restart the USB memory.

Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner
information regarding the proper use and care
of the device.
The USB port is located on the lower center of
the instrument panel. Insert the USB device into
the port.
When a compatible storage device is plugged
into the port, compatible audio files on the
storage device can be played through the
vehicle’s audio system.
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-67

Push the
button several times to skip
forward several tracks. If the last track in a folder
on the USB device is skipped, the first track of
the next folder is played.
Random and repeat play mode:
While files on a USB device are playing, the play
pattern can be altered so that songs are
repeated or played randomly.
.

JVH0743X

Play information:
Information about the audio files being played is
shown on the display screen of the vehicle’s
audio system. Touch “Browse” to display the list
of categories that can be used to narrow the
search. Touch the name of a song on the screen
to begin playing that song.

Random:
Touch the “Random” key to apply a random
play pattern to the USB device. To cancel
Random mode, touch the “Random” key
again.
Repeat:
Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat
play pattern to the USB device. To cancel
Repeat mode, touch the “Repeat” key again.

Seek button:
Push the
button while an audio file on the
USB device is playing to return to the beginning
of the current track. Push the
button several
times to skip backward several tracks.
Push the
button while an audio file on the
USB device is playing to advance one track.

4-68 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

SAA3445

iPod player operation (if so equipped)
Connecting iPod:

CAUTION
.

battery will be charged while connected to the
vehicle with the ignition switch in the ACC or
ON position.
While connected to the vehicle, the iPod may
only be able to be operated by the vehicle audio
controls.
To disconnect the iPod from the vehicle,
remove the USB end of the cable from the
USB port on the vehicle, then remove the cable
from the iPod.
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
Compatibility:
The following models are compatible:
.
.

Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner
information regarding the proper use and care
of the device.
To connect an iPod to the vehicle so that the
iPod can be controlled with the audio system
controls and display screen, use the USB port
located on the lower center of the instrument
panel. Connect the iPod-specific end of the
cable to the iPod and the USB end of the cable
to the USB port on the vehicle. If your iPod
supports charging via a USB connection, its

.
.
.
.

iPod Classic 5th generation (firmware
version 1.3.0 or later)
iPod Classic 6th generation (firmware
version 2.0.1 or later)
iPod Classic 6th (6.1) generation (firmware
version 2.0.1 or later)
iPod Classic 6th (6.2) generation (firmware
version 2.0.4 or later)
iPod Touch 2nd generation (firmware version 4.2.1 or later)*
iPod Touch 3rd generation (firmware version 5.1.1 or later)

iPod Touch 4th generation (firmware version 6.1.3 or later)
. iPod Touch 5th generation (firmware version 6.1.3 or later)
. iPod nano - 2nd generation (firmware
version 1.1.3 or later)
. iPod nano - 3rd generation (firmware
version 1.1.3 or later)
. iPod nano - 4th generation (firmware
version 1.0.4 or later)
. iPod nano - 5th generation (firmware
version 1.0.2 or later)
. iPod nano - 6th generation (firmware
version 1.2 or later)
. iPod nano - 7th generation (firmware
version 1.2 or later)
. iPhone 3G (firmware version 4.2.1 or later)
. iPhone 3GS (firmware version 5.1.1or
later)
. iPhone 4 (firmware version 6.1.3 or later)
. iPhone 4S (firmware version 6.1.3 or later)
. iPhone 5 (firmware version 6.1.3 or later)
* Some features of this iPod may not be fully
functional.
Make sure that your iPod firmware is updated
to the version indicated above.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-69

. Artists
. Albums
. Genres
. Songs
. Composers
. Audiobooks
. Podcasts
Shuffle and repeat play mode:
While the iPod is playing, the play pattern can
be altered so that songs are repeated or played
randomly.
JVH0746X

Audio main operation:
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position. Push the AUX button repeatedly to
switch to the iPod mode.
If the system has been turned off while the iPod
was playing, pushing the ON·OFF button will
start the iPod.
AUX button:
When the AUX button is pushed with the system
off and the iPod connected, the system will turn
on. If another audio source is playing and the
iPod is connected, push the AUX button
repeatedly until the center display changes to
the iPod mode.

JVH0747X

Interface:
The interface for iPod operation shown on the
vehicle’s audio system display screen is similar
to the iPod interface. Use the touch-screen,
BACK button or the TUNE knob to navigate the
menus on the screen.
When the iPod is playing, touch the “Menu”
key to bring up the iPod interface.
Depending on the iPod model, the following
items may be available on the menu list screen.
For further information about each item, see the
iPod Owner’s Manual.
.

Playlists

4-70 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Shuffle:
Touch the “Shuffle” key to apply a random
play pattern to the iPod. When the Shuffle
mode is active, the text is highlighted. To
cancel Shuffle mode, touch the “Shuffle” key
again until the text is no longer highlighted.
Repeat:
Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat
play pattern to the iPod. When the repeat
mode is active, the text is highlighted. To
cancel Repeat mode, touch the “Repeat”
key again until the text is no longer highlighted.
Seek button:

Push the seek button
or
backward or forward one track.

to skip

Bluetooth streaming audio

Push and hold the seek button
or
for
1.5 seconds while a track is playing to reverse or
fast forward the track being played. The track
plays at an increased speed while reversing or
fast forwarding. When the button is released,
the track returns to normal play speed.

If you have a compatible Bluetooth audio
device that is capable of playing audio files,
the device can be connected to the vehicle’s
audio system so that the audio files on the
device play through the vehicle’s speakers.

JVH0748X

Scrolling menus:
While navigating long lists of artists, albums or
songs in the music menu, it is possible to scroll
the list by the first character in the name. To
activate character indexing, touch the “A-Z” key
in the upper right corner of the screen. Turn the
TUNE knob to choose the number or letter to
jump to in the list and then push the AUDIO
button.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-71

The controls for the Bluetooth audio are
displayed on the screen.

JVH0735X

Connecting Bluetooth audio:
To connect your Bluetooth audio device to the
vehicle, follow the procedure below:
1. Push the

button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.

JVH0750X

4. Touch the “Connect New Device” key.
5. The system acknowledges the command
and asks you to initiate connecting from the
phone handset. The connecting procedure
of the cellular phone varies according to
each cellular phone model. See the cellular
phone Owner’s Manual for details. You can
also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for
instructions on connecting NISSAN recommended cellular phones.
Audio main operation:
To switch to the Bluetooth audio mode, push
the AUX button repeatedly until the Bluetooth
audio mode is displayed on the screen.

4-72 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

A new disc may be rough on the inner and
outer edges. Remove the rough edges by
rubbing the inner and outer edges with the
side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

USB memory
.

SAA0451

CD/USB MEMORY CARE AND
CLEANING
CD
.
.
.

Handle a CD by its edges. Never touch the
surface of the disc. Do not bend the disc.
Always place the discs in the storage case
when they are not being used.
To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the
center to the outer edge using a clean, soft
cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular
motion.
Do not use a conventional record cleaner or
alcohol intended for industrial use.

Do not touch the terminal portion of the USB
memory.
. Do not place heavy objects on the USB
memory.
. Do not store the USB memory in very humid
locations.
. Do not expose the USB memory to direct
sunlight.
. Do not spill any liquids on the USB memory.
Refer to the USB memory Owner’s Manual for
the details.

SAA3383

1.
2.
3.

SOURCE select switch
Tuning switch
VOLUME control switch

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR
AUDIO CONTROL
The audio system can be operated using the
controls on the steering wheel.

SOURCE select switch
Push the SOURCE select switch to change the
mode to available audio source.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-73

VOLUME control switch
Push up or down the VOLUME control switch to
increase or decrease the volume.

Tuning switch
AM and FM radio:
. Push the tuning switch for less than 1.5
seconds to change the next or previous
radio preset.
. Push the tuning switch for more than 1.5
seconds to seek the next or previous radio
station.
SXM operation (if so equipped):
. Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the preset station.
. Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to
go to the next or previous category.
iPod:
. Push the tuning switch for less than 1.5
seconds to return to the beginning of the
present program or skip to the next program.
Push several times to skip back or skip
through programs.
. This system searches for the blank intervals
between selections. If there is a blank
interval within one program or there is no
interval between programs, the system may

not stop in the desired or expected location.
CD:
. Push the tuning switch for less than 1.5
seconds to return to the beginning of the
present program or skip to the next program.
Push several times to skip back or skip
through programs.
. This system searches for the blank intervals
between selections. If there is a blank
interval within one program or there is no
interval between programs, the system may
not stop in the desired or expected location.
. Push the tuning switch for more than 1.5
seconds to change the folders (if there are
any folders).
USB:
. Push the tuning switch for less than 1.5
seconds to return to the beginning of the
present program or skip to the next program.
Push several times to skip back or skip
through programs.
. This system searches for the blank intervals
between selections. If there is a blank
interval within one program or there is no
interval between programs, the system may
not stop in the desired or expected location.
. If there are any folders, push the tuning
switch for more than 1.5 seconds to change

4-74 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

the folders (if so equipped).
Bluetooth Audio operation:
. Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
skip ahead or back to the next song.
. Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to
reverse or fast forward the current track.

NISSANCONNECTSM APP
SMARTPHONE INTEGRATION
ANTENNA
To remove the antenna, hold the bottom of the
antenna and turn it counterclockwise.
To install the antenna, turn the antenna clockwise and tighten.

CAUTION
.

SAA2102

To avoid damaging or deforming the
antenna, be sure to fold down (if so
equipped) or remove the antenna
under the following conditions.
— The vehicle enters a garage with
a low ceiling.

Type A (if so equipped)

— The vehicle is covered with a car
cover.
.

Be sure that antenna is removed
before the vehicle enters an automatic car wash.

Always properly tighten the antenna
rod during installation. Otherwise,
the antenna rod may break during
vehicle operation.

This vehicle is equipped with Smartphone
Integration technology. This allows many compatible Smartphone applications to be displayed
and easily controlled through the vehicle’s
touchscreen.
NOTE:
A compatible smartphone and registration
is required to use mobile applications or to
access connected features of certain vehicle applications.

REGISTERING WITH NISSANCONNECTSM APP
To use the Smartphone Integration feature, it is
necessary for the user to register. In order to
register, visit the NissanConnectSM website and
sign up or create an account through the
prompts on the NissanConnectSM App. Once
registered, download the NissanConnectSM App
from your compatible phone’s application download source and then log into the application. If
you already have an account created through
the App, please log in.
NissanConnectSM website:
For U.S.
www.nissanusa.com/connect/
For Canada

SAA2374

Canada.NissanConnect.com

Type B (if so equipped)

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-75

SIRI EYES FREE
CONNECT PHONE
To use this feature, a compatible smartphone
must be connected via Bluetooth or USB to
the vehicle. For more information on connecting
your phone, see “Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone
System (models without navigation system)”
(P.4-80) or “Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone
System (models with navigation system)” (P.489).

application availability see NissanConnectSM
website.
NissanConnectSM website:
For U.S.
www.nissanusa.com/connect/
For Canada
www.Nissan.ca/NissanConnect (English)
www.Nissan.ca/NissanConnect/fr (French)

NOTE:
. For Apple iPhones, NissanConnectSM
Apps REQUIRES the phone to be
plugged in via USB.
. For Android phones, NissanConnectSM
Apps REQUIRES the phone to be
paired via Bluetooth.

APPLICATION DOWNLOAD
Once connected, the NissanConnectSM App
will search your phone to determine which
compatible applications are currently installed.
The user will then choose which apps they want
to bring into their vehicle from the list of apps
within the “Manage My Apps” section of the
NissanConnectSM App on their smartphone. The
vehicle will then download the in-vehicle interface for each of these compatible applications.
Once downloaded, the user can access their
selected smartphone applications through the
vehicle touchscreen. For more information on

4-76 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

GENERAL INFORMATION
Apple Siri Eyes Free personal assistant can be
accessed from the vehicle. Siri Eyes Free can
be accessed in Siri Eyes Free mode to reduce
user distraction. In this mode, Siri Eyes Free is
available for interaction by voice control. After
connecting a compatible Apple device by using
Bluetooth, Siri Eyes Free can be activated
using the
TALK switch on the steering
wheel.
Siri is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
INFO:
.
.
.

Some Siri Eyes Free functions, such as
opening apps, may not be available during
driving.
For best results, always update your device
to the latest software version.
Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
possible. Close the windows to eliminate the
surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration
sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system
from recognizing the voice commands correctly.
For functions that can be used in Siri Eyes
Free, please refer to the Apple website.

2. After the Bluetooth connection is established, the switch operation select screen is
displayed.

REQUIREMENTS

Siri is available on the iPhone 4S or later.
Devices released before iPhone 4S are not
supported by the Siri Eyes Free system.

3. Select “Short Press” or “Long Press” for
Siri Eyes Free activation. Switch action can
also be changed from the Bluetooth
settings menu. (See “Changing Siri Eyes
Free Settings (models without navigation
system)” (P.4-78).)

Visit www.apple.com/ios/siri for details about
device compatibility.
Siri must be enabled on the phone. Please
check phone settings.
If the device has a lock screen, Siri must be
accessible from the lock screen. Please check
phone settings.

OPERATING SIRI EYES FREE
1. Push or push and hold the

For best results, always update your device to
the latest software version.

SAA3385

SIRI EYES FREE ACTIVATION
Siri Eyes Free function can be activated by
using the
TALK switch on the steering
wheel.

TALK switch.

2. Speak your command and then listen to the
Siri Eyes Free reply.
After starting Siri Eyes Free, push the
TALK switch again within 5 seconds of the end
of the Siri Eyes Free announcement to extend
the session.
Example 1 - Playing music

Models with navigation system
1. Connect a Siri Eyes Free enabled iPhone
to the vehicle. (See “Connecting procedure”
(P.4-92).)
2. After the Bluetooth connection is established, push and hold the
TALK switch
to activate the Siri Eyes Free function.
Models without navigation system
1. Connect a Siri Eyes Free enabled iPhone
to the vehicle. (See “Initialization” (P.4-83).)

1. Push or push and hold the

TALK switch.

2. Say “Play (artist name, song name, etc.)”.
3. Your vehicle will automatically change to
Bluetooth Audio or iPod mode* when the
music starts playing. Mode selection is
determined by the phone.
*: If the iPhone is also connected with the
USB cable.
If the audio track does not start playing

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-77

automatically after Siri Eyes Free ends, try
changing the track or audio source to resume
playback.
NOTE:
For best results, use the native music app.
Performance of music control function
while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other
3rd party music apps may vary and is
controlled by the iPhone.
Example 2 - Replying to text messages

1. Push the ENTER/SETTING button.
2. Use the TUNE·FOLDER or TUNE·SCROLL
knob to select “Bluetooth” and then push
the ENTER/SETTING button.
3. Use the TUNE·FOLDER or TUNE·SCROLL
knob to select “Siri” and then push the
ENTER/SETTING button.
4. Select “Short Press” or “Long Press” using
the TUNE·FOLDER or TUNE·SCROLL knob
and then push the ENTER/SETTING button.

1. If a compatible iPhone is connected and
“Show Notifications” of the iPhone settings
is enabled, the vehicle will display a notification for new incoming text messages.
2. After reading the message, push or push
and hold the
TALK switch to reply using
Siri Eyes Free.
3. After a beep sounds, say “Text message” or
a similar command to reply using Siri Eyes
Free.

CHANGING SIRI EYES FREE SETTINGS (models without navigation system)
Settings for Siri Eyes Free can be found in the
Bluetooth settings menu. (See “Bluetooth
settings” (P.4-88).)

4-78 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Symptom

Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot access Siri Eyes Free from the switch on the steering wheel Check if a Bluetooth connection is established between the iPhone and the system.
Check if Siri is enabled on the device. On your phone, go to Siri setting.
Check that Siri can be accessed from the device lock screen. This can be set in the settings menu
of your phone.
Models without navigation system:
Check the settings for Siri Eyes Free activation on the vehicle audio system. If the setting is “Long
Press”, you must push and hold the
TALK switch on the steering wheel for more than 1.5
seconds to start Siri Eyes Free. If the setting is “Short Press”, a short push and release of the switch

should start Siri Eyes Free.
Audio source does not change automatically to iPod or Bluetooth For best results, use the native music app. Performance of music control function while using
Audio mode
Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party music apps may vary.
For best results, play media already stored on your device. Streaming music or playback from cloud
storage may degrade performance.
Switch the source manually by pushing the AUX or MEDIA button on the vehicle audio system or the
SOURCE select switch on the steering wheel.
Play, pause, next track, previous track or play timer does not work

For best results, use the native music app. Performance of music control function while using
Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party music apps may vary and is controlled by the device.

Cannot hear any music/audio being played back from a connected
iPhone

Check that the audio source is set to Bluetooth Audio or iPod mode. A USB connection is
required for iPod mode.

Cannot hear map turn-by-turn direction guidance from a connected Check that the audio source is set to Bluetooth Audio or iPod mode. A USB connection is
iPhone
required for iPod mode.
Cannot receive text message notifications on the vehicle audio
system

Check if “Show Notifications” is enabled on your phone. On your phone, go to Bluetooth settings.
Find the device name, like “My Car”. Tap
on your phone. Turn on “Show Notifications”.

Cannot reply to text message notifications using Siri Eyes Free

After receiving an incoming text message, follow the on-screen guidance. Push or push and hold the
TALK switch on the steering wheel for Siri Eyes Free. After Siri Eyes Free starts, say “Text
Message”.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-79

Bluetooth HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM (models without
navigation system)

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO
When installing a car phone or a CB radio in
your vehicle, be sure to observe the following
precautions, otherwise the new equipment may
adversely affect the electronic control modules
and electronic control system harness.

WARNING
.

A cellular phone should not be used
for any purpose while driving so full
attention may be given to vehicle
operation. Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of cellular phones while
driving.
If you must make a call while your
vehicle is in motion, the hands-free
cellular phone operational mode (if
so equipped) is highly recommended. Exercise extreme caution
at all times so full attention may be
given to vehicle operation.

CAUTION
.

Keep the antenna as far away as
possible from the electronic control
modules.

Keep the antenna wire more than 8
in (20 cm) away from the electronic
control system harness. Do not
route the antenna wire next to any
harness.

Adjust the antenna standing-wave
ratio as recommended by the manufacturer.

Connect the ground wire from the
CB radio chassis to the body.

For details, it is recommended you
visit a NISSAN dealer.

If a conversation in a moving vehicle
requires you to take notes, pull off
the road to a safe location and stop
your vehicle before doing so.

4-80 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

WARNING
.

Use a phone after stopping your
vehicle in a safe location. If you
have to use a phone while driving,
exercise extreme caution at all
times so full attention may be given
to vehicle operation.

If you are unable to devote full
attention to vehicle operation while
talking on the phone, pull off the
road to a safe location and stop
your vehicle.

CAUTION
To avoid draining the vehicle battery,
use a phone after starting the engine.
Your vehicle is equipped with the Bluetooth
Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a
compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone,
you can set up the wireless connection between
your cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone
module. With Bluetooth wireless technology,
you can make or receive a hands-free telephone
call with your cellular phone in the vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is connected to the invehicle phone module, no other phone connecting procedure is required. Your phone is
automatically connected with the in-vehicle
phone module when the ignition switch is
placed in the ACC or ON position with the
previously connected cellular phone turned on
and carried in the vehicle.

NOTE:
Some devices require the user to accept
connections to other Bluetooth devices. If
your phone does not connect automatic
ally to the system, consult the phone’s
Owner’s Manual for details on device
operation.

You can connect up to 5 different Bluetooth
cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.
However, you can talk on only one cellular phone
at a time.

Before using the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone
System, refer to the following notes.
.

Set up the wireless connection between a
compatible cellular phone and the in-vehicle
phone module before using the Hands-Free
Phone System.
Some Bluetooth enabled cellular phones
may not be recognized by the in-vehicle
phone module. Please visit www.nissanusa.
com/bluetooth for a recommended phone

list.
You will not be able to use a hands-free
phone under the following conditions:
— Your vehicle is outside of the cellular
service area.
— Your vehicle is in an area where it is
difficult to receive a cellular signal; such
as in a tunnel, in an underground parking
garage, near a tall building or in a
mountainous area.
When the radio wave condition is not ideal
or ambient sound is too loud, it may be
difficult to hear the other person’s voice
during a call.
Do not place the cellular phone in an area
surrounded by metal or far away from the invehicle phone module to prevent tone quality
degradation and wireless connection disruption.
While a cellular phone is connected through
the Bluetooth wireless connection, the
battery power of the cellular phone may
discharge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System cannot
charge cellular phones.
If the Hands-Free Phone System seems to
be malfunctioning, see “Troubleshooting
guide” in this section. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble-

shooting help.
Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to
come from the audio system speakers.
Storing the device in a different location
may reduce or eliminate the noise.
Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual
regarding the telephone charges, cellular
phone antenna and body, etc.

REGULATORY INFORMATION
FCC Regulatory information
.

CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only
the supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,
modification, or attachments could damage
the transmitter and may violate FCC regulations.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1) this device may not cause interference
and
2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-81

IC Regulatory information
.

button to interrupt the
You can also use the
system feedback and give a command at once.
See “List of voice commands” and “During a
call” in this section for more information.

Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the
device.
This Class B digital apparatus meets all
requirements of the Canadian InterferenceCausing Equipment Regulations.

PHONE END:
While the voice recognition system is active,
push and hold the
button to quit the voice
recognition system at any time.
Microphone:
Microphone is located near the map lights.

Bluetooth trademark
Bluetooth is a trademark owned
by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and
licensed to Visteon Corporation.

USING THE SYSTEM
The voice recognition system allows hands-free
operation of the Bluetooth Phone System.
If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may
not be available so full attention may be given to
vehicle operation.

SAA3385

Control buttons and microphone
The control buttons for the Bluetooth HandsFree Phone System are located on the steering
wheel.
PHONE SEND:
button to initiate a VR session or
Push the
answer an incoming call.
INFO:
If the “Siri” on the Bluetooth settings menu is
set to “Short Press”, pushing and holding the
PHONE SEND button initiates a VR
session for Hands-Free Phone operation. (See
“Bluetooth settings” (P.4-88).)

4-82 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Manual control:
While using the Voice Recognition system, it is
possible to select menu options by using the
steering wheel controls instead of speaking
voice commands. To activate manual control
mode, push the
button on the steering
wheel to access the phone menu and then tilt
the tuning switch (
or
) up or down.
The manual control mode does not allow dialing
a phone number by digits. The user may select
an entry from the Phonebook or Recent Calls
lists. To reactivate Voice Recognition, exit the
manual control mode by pushing and holding the
button. At that time, pushing the
button
will start the Hands-Free Phone System.

Choosing a language
You can interact with the Bluetooth HandsFree Phone System using several languages
that are available. For operations to change the
language, see “Audio main operation” (P.4-45)
or “Audio main operation” (P.4-54).

Changing voice feedback volume
If you want to adjust the volume of the voice
feedback, push the volume control switch on the
steering wheel while being provided with feedback. You can also use the VOL (volume) control
knob on the audio unit.

Giving voice commands

Connecting procedure:
NOTE:
The connecting procedure must be performed when the vehicle is stationary. If
the vehicle starts moving during the procedure, the procedure will be cancelled.
You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth
cellular phones in the in-vehicle phone module.
However, you can talk on only one cellular phone
at a time.
To connect a phone to the Bluetooth HandsFree Phone System;

Initialization

1. Push the ENTER/SETTING button.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ACC
or ON position, voice recognition is initialized,
which takes a few seconds. If the
button is
pushed before the initialization completes, the
system will announce “Hands-free phone system not ready” and will not react to voice
commands.

2. Use the TUNE·FOLDER or TUNE·SCROLL
control knob to select “Bluetooth” and then
push the ENTER/SETTING button.
3. Select “Add Phone” and then push the
ENTER/SETTING button.
4. When a message with a PIN appears on the
screen, operate the Bluetooth phone to
enter the PIN.
The connecting procedure varies according to
each phone. See the phone’s Owner’s Manual
for details.

To operate voice recognition, push and release
the
button located on the steering wheel.
After the tone sounds, speak a command.
The command given is picked up by the
microphone, and voice feedback is given when
the command is accepted.
.
.

.
.

If you need to hear the available commands
for the current menu again, say “Help” and
the system will repeat them.
If a command is not recognized, the system
announces, “Command not recognized.
Please try again.” Make sure the command
is said exactly as prompted by the system
and repeat the command in a clear voice.
If you want to go back to the previous
command, you can say “Go back” any time
the system is waiting for a response.
You can cancel a command when the
system is waiting for a response by saying,
“Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces
“Cancel” and ends the VR session. You can
also push and hold the
button on the
steering wheel at any time to end the VR
session. Whenever the VR session is
cancelled, a double beep is played to
indicate you have exited the system.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-83

If you want to adjust the volume of the voice
feedback, push the (
- or
+) button
on the steering wheel while being provided
with feedback. You can also use the radio
volume control knob.

Voice Prompt Interrupt:
In most cases you can interrupt the voice
feedback to speak the next command by
pushing the
button on the steering wheel.
After interrupting the system, wait for a beep
before speaking your command.

.
.

Start speaking a command within 5 seconds
after the tone sounds.
Speak in a natural voice without pausing
between words.

Voice commands
Voice commands can be used to operate the
Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System. Push
the
button and say “Phone” to bring up the
phone command menu. The available options
are:

One Shot Call:
To use the system faster, you may speak the
second level commands with the main menu
command on the main menu. For example, push
the
button and after the tone say, “Call
Redial”.

.
.
.
.
.
.

Operating tips:
To get the best performance out of the voice
recognition system, observe the following:

Call:
For more information on the “Call” command,
see “Making a call” (P.4-85).

Phonebook:
The following commands are available under
“Phonebook”:

Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
possible. Close the windows to eliminate
surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration
sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system
from recognizing voice commands correctly.
Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a
command. Otherwise, the command will not
be received properly.

Call
Phonebook
Recent Calls
Show Applications
Messaging
Select Phone

(A Name)
Say a name in the phonebook to bring up a
list of options for that phonebook entry. The
system will say the name it interpreted
based on the voice command provided. If

4-84 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

the name is incorrect, say “Correction” to
hear another name.
Once the correct phonebook entry is
identified, say “Dial” to dial the number or
“Send Text” to send a text message to that
number. Say “Record Name” to record a
name for the phonebook entry. Say “Delete
Recording” to delete a recorded name for
the phonebook entry.
List Names
Speak this command to have the system list
the names in the phonebook one by one
alphabetically. Say “Dial” to dial the number
of the current name or “Send Text” to send a
text message to that number. Say “Next
Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move through
the list alphabetically. Say “Record Name” to
record a name for the current phonebook
entry. Say “Delete Recording” to delete a
recorded name for the current phonebook
entry.
Delete Entry
Speak this command to delete an entry in
the phonebook. Choose an entry to delete
by speaking the desired name or say “List
Names”.

Recent Calls:
The following commands are available under
“Recent Calls”:
.

Incoming (Calls)
Speak this command to list the last five
incoming calls to the vehicle. If the call is
from an entry in the phonebook, the name
will be displayed. Otherwise, the phone
number of the incoming call will be displayed.
Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send Text”
to send a text message to that number. Say
“Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move
through the list of incoming calls.
Missed (Calls)
Speak this command to list the last five
missed calls to the vehicle. If the call is from
an entry in the phonebook, the name will be
displayed. Otherwise, the phone number of
the missed call will be displayed.
Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send Text”
to send a text message to that number. Say
“Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move
through the list of missed calls.
Outgoing (Calls)
Speak this command to list the last five
outgoing calls from the vehicle. If the call
was to an entry in the phonebook, the name
will be displayed. Otherwise, the phone

number of the outgoing call will be displayed.
Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send Text”
to send a text message to that number. Say
“Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move
through the list of outgoing calls.
Redial
Speak this command to call the last number
dialed.
Call Back
Speak this command to call the number of
the last incoming call to the vehicle.

Show Applications:
Select this command to display list of smartphone apps available.
Messaging:
Speak this command to access text messaging
functions. For more information on these commands, see “Text messaging” (P.4-86).
Select Phone:
Speak this command to select a phone to use
from a list of those phones connected to the
vehicle.

Making a call
To make a call from a phone connected to the
vehicle’s Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System:
1. Push the

button.

2. The system will prompt you for a command.
Say “Call”.
3. Select one of the available voice commands
to continue:
. (A Name)
Speak the name of a phonebook entry to
place a call to that entry. The system will
respond with the name it interpreted from
your command and will prompt you to
confirm that the name is correct. Say
“Yes” to initiate the call or “No” to hear
another name from the phonebook.
. List Names
Select this command to call a phone
number that is stored in the phonebook.
. Phone Number
Speak this command to place a call by
inputting numbers.
For 7- and 10-digit phone numbers,
speak the numbers. When finished, say
“Dial” to initiate the call. Say “Correction”
at any time in the process to correct a
misspoken or misinterpreted number.
For phone numbers with more digits or
special characters, say “Special Num-

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-85

ber”, then speak the digits. Up to 24
digits can be entered. Available special
characters are “star”, “pound”, “plus” and
“pause”. When finished, say “Dial” to
initiate the call. Say “Correction” at any
time in the process to correct a misspoken or misinterpreted number or
character.
Redial
Speak this command to dial the number
of the last outgoing call. The system will
display “Redialing (name/number)”. The
name of the phonebook entry will be
displayed if it available, otherwise the
number being redialed will be displayed.
Call Back
Speak this command to dial the number
of the last incoming call. The system will
display “Calling back (name/number)” .
The name of the phonebook entry will be
displayed if it available, otherwise the
number being called back will be displayed.

Receiving a call
When a call is received by the phone connected
to the vehicle’s Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone
System, the call information is displayed on
either the vehicle information display or both the
vehicle information display and the control panel
display.

During a call
While a call is active, push the
button to
access additional options. Speak one of the
following commands:
.

Send
Speak this command followed by the digits
to enter digits during the phone call.
. Mute On or Mute Off
Speak the command to mute or unmute the
system.
. Transfer Call
Speak this command to transfer the call to
the handset. To transfer the call back from
the handset to the Bluetooth Hands-Free
Phone System, push the
button and
confirm when prompted.
If supported by the phone, the Bluetooth
Hands-Free Phone System allows for call waiting functionality. If a call is received while
another call is already active, a message will
be displayed on the screen. Push the
button to hold the active call and switch to the
second call. Push the
button to reject the
second call.

Push the
button to accept the call. Push the
button to reject the call.

4-86 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

While the second call is active, pushing the
button will allow the same commands that
available during any call as well as two additional
commands:
.

Switch Call
Speak this command to hold the second call
and switch back to the original call.
. End Other Call
Speak this command to stay with the
second call and end the original call.
Push the
button to accept the call. Push the
button to reject the call.

Ending a call
To end an active call, push the

button.

Text messaging

WARNING
.

Laws in some jurisdictions may
restrict the use of some of the
applications and features, such as
social networking and texting.

Laws in some jurisdictions may
restrict the use of “Text-to-Speech”.
Check local regulations before
using this feature.

If you are unable to devote full
attention to vehicle operation while
using the text messaging feature,
pull off the road to a safe location
and stop your vehicle.

NOTE:
. This feature is automatically disabled if
the connected device does not support
the Message Access Profile (MAP). See
the phone’s Owner’s Manual for details
and instructions.
. Many phones may require special permission to enable text messaging.
Check the phone’s screen during Bluetooth pairing. For some phones, you
may need to enable “Notifications” in
the phone’s Bluetooth menu for text
messages to appear on the vehicle
audio system. See the phone’s Owner’s
Manual for details. Text message integration requires that the phone support

MAP (Message Access Profile) for both
receiving and sending text messages.
Some phones may not support all text
messaging features. Refer to www.
nissanusa.com/bluetooth or www.
nissan.ca/bluetooth for compatibility
information, as well as your device’s
Owner’s Manual.

If “Incoming Calls”, “Outgoing Calls”, or
“Missed Calls” is selected, the following
additional commands will be displayed:
. Send Text
. Next Entry
. Previous Entry
For more information about these options,
see “Voice commands” (P.4-84).

The system allows for the sending and receiving
of text messages through the vehicle interface.

5. Once a recipient is chosen, the system
prompts for which message to send. Five
predefined messages are available as well
as three custom messages. To choose one
of the predefined messages, speak one of
the following:
. “Driving, can’t text”
. “Call me”
. “On my way”
. “Running late”
. “Okay”
To send one of the custom messages, say
“Custom Message”. If more than one custom message is stored, the system will
prompt for the number of the desired
custom message. For more information on
setting and managing custom text messages, see “Bluetooth settings” (P.4-88).

Sending a text message:
1. Push the
button.
2. Say “Messaging”.
3. Say “Send Text”.
4. The system will provide a list of available
commands in order to determine the recipient of the text message. Choose from the
following:
. (A name)
. Number
. Incoming Calls
. Outgoing Calls
. Missed Calls

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-87

Reading a received text message:
button.
1. Push the
2. Say “Messaging”.
3. Say “Read Text”.
The text message, sender and delivery time are
shown on the screen. Use the tuning switch on
the steering wheel to scroll through all text
messages if more than one are available. Push
the
button to exit the text message screen.
Push the
button to access the following
options for replying to the text message:
.

Call Back
Speak this command to call the sender of
the text message using the Bluetooth
Hands-Free Phone System.
Send Text
Speak this command to send a text message response to the sender of the text
message.
Read Text
Speak this command to read the text
message again.
Previous Text
Speak this command to move to the
previous text message (if available).
Next Text
Speak this command to move to the next
text message (if available).

NOTE:
. Text messages are only displayed if the
vehicle speed is less than 5 MPH (8
km/h).
. iPhones can only send text messages
via Siri Eyes Free.
Making custom messages with Siri Eyes
Free:
If a connected iPhone is equipped with Siri, it
can also be used to create custom messages.
(See “Siri Eyes Free” (P.4-76).)

Bluetooth settings
To access and adjust the settings for the
Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System:

1. Push the ENTER/SETTING button.
2. Use the TUNE·FOLDER or TUNE·SCROLL
knob to select “Bluetooth” and then push
the ENTER/SETTING button:
. Bluetooth
Select “ON” or “OFF” to turn the
vehicle’s Bluetooth system on or off.
. Add Phone
To connect a phone to the system, see
“Initialization” (P.4-83).
. Delete Phone
Select to delete a phone from the
displayed list. The system will ask to
confirm before deleting the phone.

4-88 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Replace Phone
Select to replace a phone from the
displayed list. When a selection is made,
the system will ask to confirm before
proceeding. The recorded phonebook for
the phone being deleted will be saved as
long as the new phone’s phonebook is
the same as the old phone’s phonebook.
Select Phone
Select to connect to a previously connected phone from the displayed list.
Phonebook Download
Select to turn on or off the automatic
download of a connected phone’s phonebook.
Siri
Select the
PHONE SEND button
operation for Siri Eyes Free function
from “Short Press” and “Long Press” (if
available). (see “Siri Eyes Free” (P.476).)
“Siri” is displayed only when a Siri Eyes
Free enabled iPhone is connected to
the vehicle.
Show Incoming Calls
Select “Driver Only” to have incoming
call information displayed only in the
vehicle information display. Select “Both”
to have incoming call information displayed in both the vehicle information
display and the center display screen

Bluetooth HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM (models with navigation
system)
.

Text Message
Select to turn on or off the vehicle’s text
messaging feature.
New Text Sound
Select to adjust the volume of the sound
that plays when a new text is received by
a phone connected to the Bluetooth
Hands-Free Phone System. The setting
all the way to the left indicates that the
new text sound will be muted.
Show Incoming Text
Select “Driver Only” to have incoming
text messages displayed only in the
vehicle information display. Select “Both”
to have incoming text messages displayed in both the vehicle information
display and the center display screen.
Select “None” to have no display of
incoming text messages.
Edit Custom Messages
Select to set a custom message that will
be available with the standard options
when sending a text message. To set a
custom message, send a text message to
your own phone number while the phone
is connected to the system. Three
custom messages can be set. Custom
messages can only be set while the
vehicle is stationary.
Auto Reply
Select to turn on or off the Auto Reply
function. When enabled, the vehicle will
automatically send a predefined text

message to the sender when a text
message is received while driving.
Auto Reply Message
Select to choose the message that is
sent when the Auto Reply function is
enabled. Choose from “I’m Driving” or
one of the three custom messages
stored in the system.
Vehicle Signature On/Off
Select to choose whether or not the
vehicle signature is added to outgoing
text messages from the vehicle. This
message cannot be changed or customized.

WARNING
.

Use a phone after stopping your
vehicle in a safe location. If you
have to use a phone while driving,
exercise extreme caution at all
times so full attention may be given
to vehicle operation.

If you are unable to devote full
attention to vehicle operation while
talking on the phone, pull off the
road to a safe location and stop
your vehicle.

CAUTION
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery, use a phone after starting the
engine.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-89

you can make or receive a hands-free telephone
call with your cellular phone in the vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is connected to the invehicle phone module, no other phone connecting procedure is required. Your phone is
automatically connected with the in-vehicle
phone module when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position with the connected
cellular phone turned on and carried in the
vehicle.

SAA3446

1.
2.
3.
4.

Volume control switch í/+
button
PHONE SEND
PHONE END
button
Microphone

You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth
cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.
However, you can talk on only one cellular phone
at a time.

The phone
button is located on the control
panel can also use to control the Bluetooth
Hands-Free Phone System. (See “Control buttons and functions (models with navigation
system)” (P.4-3).)

NISSAN Voice Recognition system supports the
phone commands, so dialing a phone number
using your voice is possible. For more details,
see “NISSAN Voice Recognition System (models with navigation system)” (P.4-96).
Before using the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone
System, refer to the following notes.

Your vehicle is equipped with the Bluetooth
Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a
compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone,
you can set up the wireless connection between
your cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone
module. With Bluetooth wireless technology,

Set up the wireless connection between a
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone
module before using the Hands-Free Phone
System.
Some Bluetooth enabled cellular phones
may not be recognized by the in-vehicle
phone module. Please visit www.nissanusa.
com/bluetooth for a recommended phone

4-90 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

list and connecting.
You will not be able to use a hands-free
phone under the following conditions:
— Your vehicle is outside of the cellular
service area.
— Your vehicle is in an area where it is
difficult to receive cellular signal; such as
in a tunnel, in an underground parking
garage, near a tall building or in a
mountainous area.
— Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it
from being dialed.
When the radio wave condition is not ideal
or ambient sound is too loud, it may be
difficult to hear the other person’s voice
during a call.
Immediately after the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position, it may be
impossible to receive a call for a short
period of time.
Do not place the cellular phone in an area
surrounded by metal or far away from the invehicle phone module to prevent tone quality
degradation and wireless connection disruption.
While a cellular phone is connected through
the Bluetooth wireless connection, the
battery power of the cellular phone may
discharge quicker than usual. The Blue-

.
.

tooth Hands-Free Phone System cannot
charge cellular phones.
If the Hands-Free Phone System seems to
be malfunctioning, visit www.nissanusa.
com/bluetooth for troubleshooting help.
Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to
come from the audio system speakers.
Storing the device in a different location
may reduce or eliminate the noise.
Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual
regarding the telephone charges, cellular
phone antenna and body, etc.
The signal strength display on the monitor
will not coincide with the signal strength
display of some cellular phones.

REGULATORY INFORMATION
FCC Regulatory information
– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the
supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna, modification, or attachments could damage the
transmitter and may violate FCC regulations.
– Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference and
2. This device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause un-

desired operation of the device.

mand (displayed on the touch-screen).

IC Regulatory information

One Shot Call

– Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.

To use the system faster, you may speak the
second level commands with the main menu
command on the main menu. For example, push
the
button and after the tone say, “Call
Redial”.

– This Class B digital apparatus meets all
requirements of the Canadian InterferenceCausing Equipment Regulations.
Bluetooth is a trademark
owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and licensed to Robert Bosch
GmbH.

VOICE COMMAND
You can use voice commands to operate various
Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System features
using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system.
For more details, see “NISSAN Voice Recognition System (models with navigation system)”
(P.4-96).

Voice Prompt Interrupt
While using the voice recognition system, the
system voice can be interrupted to allow the
user to speak commands. While the system is
speaking, push the
button on the steering
wheel. The system voice will stop and a tone will
be heard. After the tone, speak desired comHeater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-91

on your Bluetooth device, select “Yes” to
complete the pairing process.

2. Select one of the following options to make
a call:

For more information, see the Bluetooth
device’s Owner’s Manual.

VEHICLE PHONEBOOK

To access the vehicle phonebook:
1. Push the

button on the control panel.

2. Touch the “Phonebook” key.

.
.

3. Choose the desired entry from the displayed
list.
JVH0735X

CONNECTING PROCEDURE
NOTE:
The connecting procedure must be performed when the vehicle is stationary. If
the vehicle starts moving during the procedure, the procedure will be cancelled.
1. Push the

button on the control panel.

4. The number of the entry will be displayed on
the screen. Touch the number to initiate
dialing.
NOTE:
To scroll quickly through the list, touch the
“A-Z” key in the upper right corner of the
screen. Turn the TUNE knob to choose a
letter or number and then push AUDIO
button. The list will move to the first entry
that begins with that number or letter.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

MAKING A CALL

3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.

To make a call, follow the procedure below:

4. Touch the “Connect New Device” key.

1. Push the
button on the control panel.
The “Phone” screen will appear on the
display.

5. Initiate the connecting process from the
handset. The system will display the message: “Is PIN XXXXXX displayed on your
Bluetooth device?”. If the PIN is displayed

4-92 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

“Phonebook”: Select the name from an entry
stored in the vehicle phonebook.
“Call Lists”: Select the name from the
incoming, outgoing or missed.
“Redial”: Dial the last outgoing call from the
vehicle.
“
”: Input the phone number manually
using a keypad displayed on the screen. For
information on how to use the touch-screen,
see “Control buttons and functions (models
with navigation system)” (P.4-3).

RECEIVING A CALL
When a call is placed to the connected phone,
the display will change to phone mode.
To accept the incoming call:
. Push the
button on the steering wheel.
. Touch the green phone icon on the screen.
To reject the incoming call:
.
.

Push the
button on the steering wheel.
Touch the red phone icon on the screen.

DURING A CALL

While a call is active, the following options are
available on the screen:
.

“Handset”
Select this option to switch control of the
phone call over to the handset.
“Mute Mic.”
Select this option to mute the microphone.
Select again to unmute the microphone.
Red phone (
) icon
Select to end the phone call.

Use the text messaging feature after
stopping your vehicle in a safe
location. If you have to use the
feature while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full
attention may be given to vehicle
operation.
If you are unable to devote full
attention to vehicle operation while
using the text messaging feature,
pull off the road to a safe location
and stop your vehicle.

ENDING A CALL
To end a phone call, select the red phone (
)
icon on the screen or push the
button on
the steering wheel.

TEXT MESSAGING

WARNING
.

Laws in some jurisdictions may
restrict the use of some of the
applications and features, such as
social networking and texting.

Laws in some jurisdictions may
restrict the use of “Text-to-Speech”.
Check local regulations before
using this feature.

NOTE:
Many phones may require special permission to enable text messaging. Check the
phone’s screen during Bluetooth pairing.
For some phones, you may need to enable
“Notifications” in the phone’s Bluetooth
menu for text messages to appear on the
vehicle audio system. See the phone’s
Owner’s Manual for details. Text message
integration requires that the phone support MAP (Message Access Profile) for
both receiving and sending text messages.
Some phones may not support all text
messaging features. Refer to www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or www.nissan.ca/
bluetooth for compatibility information,

as well as your device’s Owner’s Manual.
The system allows for the sending and receiving
of text messages through the vehicle interface.

Sending a text message
1. Push the

button on the steering wheel.

2. Say “Phone” after the tone.
3. Say “Send Text” after the tone.
4. The system will provide a list of available
commands in order to determine the recipient of the text message. Choose from the
following:
. To (a name)
. Enter Number
. Missed Calls
. Incoming Calls
. Outgoing Calls
For more information about these options,
see “Voice command” (P.4-91).
5. Once a recipient is chosen, the system
prompts for which message to send. Nine
predefined messages are available as well
as three custom messages. To choose one
of the predefined messages, speak one of
the following after the tone:
. “Driving, can’t text”
. “Call me”

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-93

“On my way”
“Running late”
. “Okay”
. “Yes”
. “No”
. “Where are you?”
. “When?”
To send one of the custom messages, say
“Custom Messages”. If more than one
custom message is stored, the system will
prompt for the number of the desired
custom message. For more information on
setting and managing custom text messages, see “Phone settings” (P.4-96).
.

Reading a received text message
1. Push the

button on the steering wheel.

2. Say “Phone” after the tone.
3. Say “Read Text” after the tone.
The text message, sender and delivery time are
shown on the screen. Use the tuning switch to
scroll through all text messages if more than one
are available. Push the
button to exit the text
message screen. Push the
button to
access the following options for replying to the
text message:
.

Call Back
Speak this command to call the sender of
the text message using the Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone System.
Send Text
Speak this command to send a text message response to the sender of the text
message.
Read Text
Speak this command to read the text
message again.
Previous Text
Speak this command to move to the
previous text message (if available).
Next Text
Speak this command to move to the next
text message (if available).

NOTE:
. Text messages are only displayed if the
vehicle speed is less than 5 MPH (8
km/h).
. iPhones can only send text messages
via Siri Eyes Free.

Making custom messages with Siri
Eyes Free
If a connected iPhone is equipped with Siri, it
can also be used to create custom messages.
(See “Siri Eyes Free” (P.4-76).)

4-94 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

JVH0750X

Bluetooth SETTINGS
To access the phone settings:
1. Push the

button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.

Result

Menu Item
Phone Settings

For detailed information, see “Phone settings” (P.4-96).

Connect New Device

Touch to connect a new Bluetooth device to the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System.

Select Connected Device

Touch to choose a Bluetooth device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System.

Replace Connected Device

Touch to replace a Bluetooth device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System.

Delete Connected Device

Touch to delete a Bluetooth device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System.

Bluetooth

Touch to toggle Bluetooth on and off.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-95

NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION
SYSTEM (models with navigation
system)
PHONE SETTINGS
To access the phone settings:
1. Push the

button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.

4. Touch the “Phone Settings” key and adjust
the following settings as desired:
.

Sort Phonebook By:
Touch “First Name” or “Last Name” to
choose how phonebook entries are alphabetically displayed on the screen.
Use Phonebook From:
Touch “Handset” to use the phone’s phonebook. Select “SIM” to use the phonebook on
the SIM card. Touch “Both” to use both
sources.
Download Phonebook Now:
Touch to download the phonebook to the
vehicle from the chosen source.
Record Name for Phonebook Entry:
Touch to record a name for a phonebook
entry for use with the NISSAN Voice
Recognition System.
Phone Notifications for:
Touch “Driver” to have phone notifications
shown in the vehicle information display.
Touch “Both” to have phone notifications

shown in both the vehicle information display and the center display screen.
Text Messaging:
Touch to toggle the text message functionality on or off.
Show Incoming Text for:
Touch “Driver” to have incoming text notifications shown in the vehicle information
display. Touch “Both” to have text notifications shown in both the vehicle information
display and the center display screen. Touch
“Off” to turn off all text notifications.
Auto Reply:
Touch to toggle the auto reply functionality
on or off.
Auto Reply Message:
Touch to indicate preferred message to be
sent when “Auto Reply” function is activated.
Use Vehicle’s Signature:
Touch to toggle on or off the addition of the
vehicle signature to outgoing messages
Custom Text Messages:
Touch this option to select a custom
message to edit. There are 4 customer
message slots available.

4-96 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows
hands-free operation of the systems equipped
on this vehicle, such as the phone and navigation systems.
To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, push the
button located on the steering wheel.
When prompted, speak the command for the
system you wish to activate. The command given
is picked up by the microphone and performed
when it is properly recognized. NISSAN Voice
Recognition will provide a voice response as
well as a message in the center display to inform
you of the command results.

USING THE SYSTEM
Initialization
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized, which
takes a few seconds. When completed, the
system is ready to accept voice commands. If
the
button is pushed before the initialization
completes, the system will announce: “Voice
Recognition System not ready. Please wait.”

SAA3385

Giving voice commands
1. Push the

button.

2. The system announces: “Please say a
category like phone or a command like
points of interest followed by a brand name”.
A list of available commands is then spoken
by the system.
3. After the tone sounds and the face icon on
the display changes, speak a command.
Available commands are discussed in this
section.
4. Voice and display feedback are provided
when the command is accepted.

If the command is not recognized, the
system announces: “Command not recognized”. Repeat the command in a clear
voice.
. If you want to cancel the command or go
back to the previous menu of commands,
push the
button. The system will
announce: “Cancelling voice recognition”
or “Go back” depending on the current
menu level.
. Push the BACK button on the control panel
to move back through the menus displayed
on the screen.
. If you want to adjust the volume of the voice
feedback, use the volume control switches
on the steering wheel or the volume knob on
the control panel.
. The voice command screen can also be
accessed using the control panel display:
1. Push the
button.
2. Touch the “Voice Commands” key.

Operating tips
To get the best performance out of NISSAN
Voice Recognition, observe the following:
.

Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
possible. Close the windows to eliminate the
surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration
sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-97

.
.
.

How to say numbers

from recognizing the voice commands correctly.
Wait until a tone sounds before speaking a
command. Otherwise, the command will not
be received properly.
Start speaking a command within 3.5
seconds after the tone sounds.
Speak in a natural voice without pausing
between words.

NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain
way to speak numbers in voice commands.
Refer to the following examples.
General rule: Either “zero” or “oh” can be used
for “0”.
Phone numbers:
Speak phone numbers according to the following example. For 1-800-662-6200, say dial
number and then speak the phone number in
any of the following formats:
JVH0865X

SYSTEM FEATURES
NISSAN Voice Recognition can activate the
following systems:
. Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System
. Navigation
. Audio
. Information
. My Apps
For additional information on the navigation
system, see the separate Navigation System
Owner’s Manual.

.
.
.

“one eight oh oh six six two six two oh oh”
“one eight hundred six six two six two oh oh”
“one eight zero zero six six two six two oh
oh”
For the best voice recognition phone dialing
results, say phone numbers as single digits.
Also, full numbers can only be spoken for “800”.
For example, you cannot say 555-6000 as “five
five five six thousand”.

Bluetooth HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM VOICE COMMANDS
To access the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone
System voice commands:
1. Push the

button.

2. Say “Call” and then a name in the vehicle
phonebook to call that entry. Otherwise, say

4-98 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

“Phone” to access various phone commands.
If the Bluetooth has been set to “Off”, the
system announces: “Bluetooth is off. Would
you like to turn Bluetooth on?”
If no phone is connected to the system and the
vehicle is stationary, the system announces:
“There is no phone connected. Would you like to
connect a phone now?” Say “Yes” to connect a
phone. All further Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone
System voice commands are only available if a
phone is connected.

If a phone is connected and Bluetooth is set to
“On”, the following voice commands are available:
.

Call (a name)
Speak the name of the contact in which you
are trying to call. System will confirm correct
contact. Say “Dial” to initiate dialing.
Dial Number
Allows for up to 24 digits to be dialed. After
the number is entered, say “Dial” to initiate
dialing. Say “Correction” to correct the
number entered. Say “Go Back” to return
to the main menu.
List Phonebook
Starting with the first alphabetical entry in
the vehicle phonebook, the system prompts

.
.

for an additional command. Say “Dial” to call
the number of the phonebook entry. Say
“Send Text” to send a text message to the
number of the phonebook entry. Say “Next
Entry” to skip to the next alphabetical entry
in the vehicle phonebook, where the same
options will then be available.
Recent Calls
The system prompts for an additional
command. Say “Missed Calls”, “Incoming
Calls” or “Outgoing Calls” to display a list of
such calls on the screen.
Speak the number of the entry displayed on
the screen to dial that number or say “Next
Page” to view entries on the next page (if
available).
Redial
Redials the last called number.
Read Text
Reads an incoming text message. For more
information about text messaging with the
Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System, see
“Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System
(models with navigation system)” (P.4-89).
Send Text
Sends a text message. For more information
about text messaging with the Bluetooth
Hands-Free Phone System, see “Bluetooth
Hands-Free Phone System (models with

navigation system)” (P.4-89).
Select Phone
The system replies “Please use manual
controls to continue”. Use manual controls
to change the active phone from among the
listed phones connected to the vehicle.
For more information about the Bluetooth
Hands-Free Phone System, see “Bluetooth
Hands-Free Phone System (models with navigation system)” (P.4-89).
.

NAVIGATION SYSTEM VOICE COMMANDS
The following voice commands are available for
the Navigation System:
. Street Address (address)
. Points of Interest (name)
. POI by Category
. Home
. Address Book
. Previous Destinations
. Enter Address in Steps
. Cancel Route
For more information about these commands,
see the separate Navigation System Owner’s
Manual.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-99

AUDIO SYSTEM VOICE COMMANDS
To access the audio system voice commands:
1. Push the

button.

2. Say “Audio”.
3. Speak a command from the following
available commands:
.
.

.
.

Play (AM, FM, etc.)
Allows user to select radio band
Tune AM (number)
Allows user to tune directly to a desired AM
frequency
Tune FM (number)
Allows user to tune directly to a desired FM
frequency
SXM channel (number)
Allows user to tune directly to a desired
SXM station (if so equipped)
CD Track (number)
Allows user to select track to be played
Play Song (name)
Allows user to select song name to be
played
Play Artist (name)
Allows user to select artist to be played
Play Album (name)
Allows user to select album name to be
played

For more information about the audio system,
see “FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc (CD)
player (Type B)” (P.4-62).

INFORMATION VOICE COMMANDS
The following voice commands are available for
the information functions of the Navigation
System:
. Traffic
. Fuel Prices
. Stocks
. Movie Listings
. Current Weather
. Weather Map
. 5 — day Forecast
. 6 — hour Forecast
For more information about these commands,
see the separate Navigation System Owner’s
Manual.

MY APPS VOICE COMMANDS
Many Apps can be accessed using this voice
command. See “NissanConnectSM App smartphone integration” (P.4-75).

4-100 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

HELP VOICE COMMANDS
The following voice commands can be spoken
to have the system provide instructions and tips
for using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system.
.
.
.
.
.

List Commands
What Can I Say?
General Help
Quit
Exit

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all voice
commands without difficulty. If problems are
encountered, follow the solutions given in this
guide for the appropriate error. Where the
solutions are listed by number, try each solution
in turn, starting with number one, until the
problem is resolved.

Solution
Symptom/error message
The system responds “Command
1. Ensure that the command format is valid. Use the “List Commands” or “What Can I Say?” command under the “Help” menu.
Not Recognized” or the system fails 2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.
to recognize the command correctly.
3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, with the windows open or the defroster on).
NOTE:
If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.
4. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then the command should be tried with these in place.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-101

MEMO

4-102 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

5 Starting and driving
Precautions when starting and driving ................................ 5-2
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ...................................... 5-2
Three-way catalyst .............................................................. 5-3
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .................... 5-3
Avoiding collision and rollover ......................................... 5-6
Off-road recovery ................................................................ 5-6
Rapid air pressure loss ...................................................... 5-6
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving ................................. 5-7
Driving safety precautions ................................................. 5-7
Push-button ignition switch .................................................... 5-9
Operating range for engine start function ................. 5-10
Push-button ignition switch operation ........................ 5-10
Push-button ignition switch positions ......................... 5-11
Emergency engine shut off ............................................ 5-11
Intelligent Key battery discharge .................................. 5-12
Before starting the engine ................................................... 5-12
Starting the engine ................................................................ 5-13
Driving the vehicle ................................................................. 5-14
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) ................ 5-14
Manual Transmission (MT) ............................................. 5-19
Integrated control system (if so equipped) ..................... 5-21
Drive mode ......................................................................... 5-22
Parking brake .......................................................................... 5-25
Cruise control ......................................................................... 5-26
Precautions on cruise control ....................................... 5-26

Cruise control operations ............................................
Break-in schedule .................................................................
Fuel Efficient Driving Tips ...................................................
Increasing fuel economy ......................................................
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) (if so equipped) ........................
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) mode
switch operations ...........................................................
AWD warning light ........................................................
Parking/parking on hills ........................................................
Electric power steering ........................................................
Brake system ..........................................................................
Braking precautions ......................................................
Brake assist ............................................................................
Brake assist .....................................................................
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ...............................
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system .........................
Cold weather driving ............................................................
Freeing a frozen door lock ...........................................
Anti-freeze ........................................................................
Battery ...............................................................................
Draining of coolant water .............................................
Tire equipment ................................................................
Special winter equipment ............................................
Driving on snow or ice .................................................
Engine block heater (if so equipped) .......................

5-26
5-27
5-28
5-29
5-29
5-29
5-31
5-33
5-34
5-35
5-35
5-36
5-36
5-36
5-37
5-39
5-39
5-39
5-39
5-39
5-39
5-39
5-39
5-40

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING
AND DRIVING
EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING
.

5-2

WARNING
Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the support
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should not be left alone either. They
could accidentally injure themselves
or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,
sunny days, temperatures in a
closed vehicle could quickly become
high enough to cause severe or
possibly fatal injuries to people or
animals.
Properly secure all cargo with ropes
or straps to help prevent it from
sliding or shifting. Do not place
cargo higher than the seatbacks. In
a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal
injury.

Starting and driving

Do not breathe exhaust gases; they
contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is
dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or death.

If you suspect that exhaust fumes
are entering the vehicle, drive with
all windows fully open, and have the
vehicle inspected immediately.

Do not run the engine in closed
spaces such as a garage.

Do not park the vehicle with the
engine running for any extended
length of time.

Keep the liftgate closed while driving, otherwise exhaust gases could
be drawn into the passenger compartment. If you must drive with the
liftgate open, follow these precautions:

circulate the air.
.

If electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass to a trailer
through the seal on the liftgate or
the body, follow the manufacturer’s
recommendation to prevent carbon
monoxide entry into the vehicle.

If a special body, camper or other
equipment is added for recreational
or other usage, follow the manufacturer’s recommendation to prevent
carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle. (Some recreational vehicle
appliances such as stoves, refrigerators, heaters, etc. may also generate carbon monoxide.)

The exhaust system and body
should be inspected by a qualified
mechanic whenever:
— The vehicle is raised for service.
— You suspect that exhaust fumes
are entering into the passenger
compartment.

1. Open all the windows.

— You notice a change in the
sound of the exhaust system.

2. Set the
air recirculation to off
and the fan control to high to

— You have had an accident involving damage to the exhaust

system, underbody, or rear of
the vehicle.

haust pollutants.
.

THREE-WAY CATALYST
The three-way catalyst is an emission control
device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust
gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at
high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

WARNING
.

The exhaust gas and the exhaust
system are very hot. Keep people,
animals or flammable materials
away from the exhaust system components.
Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry
grass, waste paper or rags. They
may ignite and cause a fire.

CAUTION
.

Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits from leaded gasoline will seriously reduce the three-way
catalyst’s ability to help reduce ex-

Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunctions in the ignition, fuel injection, or electrical systems can cause
overrich fuel flow into the three-way
catalyst, causing it to overheat. Do
not keep driving if the engine misfires, or if noticeable loss of performance or other unusual operating
conditions are detected. Have the
vehicle inspected. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.

Avoid driving with an extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, damaging the three-way catalyst.

Do not race the engine while warming it up.

Do not push or tow your vehicle to
start the engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper
tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your tires
is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
Starting and driving 5-3

pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale
after replacing one or more tires or wheels on
your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.

Additional information
.
.

5-4

Since the spare tire is not equipped with the
TPMS, the TPMS does not monitor the tire
pressure of the spare tire.
The TPMS will activate only when the
vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH
(25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect
Starting and driving

a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a
flat tire while driving).
The low tire pressure warning light does not
automatically turn off when the tire pressure
is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the
recommended pressure, the vehicle must be
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)
to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire
pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure
gauge to check the tire pressure.
The CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warning
message is displayed in the vehicle information display when the low tire pressure
warning light is illuminated and low tire
pressure is detected. The CHECK TIRE
PRES warning message turns off when the
low tire pressure warning light turns off. The
low tire pressure warning light remains
illuminated until the tires are inflated to the
recommended COLD tire pressure. The
CHECK TIRE PRES warning message is
displayed each time the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position as long as the low
tire pressure warning light remains illuminated. “Check tire pressure warning message” (P.2-9).
The CHECK TIRE PRES warning message
is not displayed if the low tire pressure
warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS
malfunction.

Tire pressure rises and falls depending on
the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation
and the outside temperature. Do not reduce
the tire pressure after driving because the
tire pressure rises after driving. Low outside
temperature can lower the temperature of
the air inside the tire which can cause a
lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause
the low tire pressure warning light to
illuminate. If the warning light illuminates in
low ambient temperature, check the tire
pressure for all four tires.
For additional information, see “Low tire pressure warning light” (P.2-18) and “Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P.6-3).

WARNING
.

If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt
braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull
off the road to a safe location and
stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires
may permanently damage the tires
and increase the likelihood of tire
failure. Serious vehicle damage
could occur and may lead to an

as this may cause a malfunction of
the tire pressure sensors.

accident and could result in serious
personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire
pressure to the recommended COLD
tire pressure shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label to turn
the low tire pressure warning light
OFF. If you have a flat tire, replace it
with a spare tire as soon as possible. (See “Flat tire” (P.6-3) for changing a flat tire.)
.

Since the spare tire is not equipped
with the TPMS, when a spare tire is
mounted or a wheel is replaced, the
TPMS will not function and the low
tire pressure warning light will flash
for approximately 1 minute. The
light will remain on after 1 minute.
Have your tires replaced and/or
TPMS system reset as soon as
possible. It is recommended you
visit a NISSAN dealer for these
services.
Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could
affect the proper operation of the
TPMS.
Do not inject any tire liquid or
aerosol tire sealant into the tires,

Low tire pressure warning light may illuminate in
the following cases.
.

CAUTION
.

The TPMS may not function properly
when the wheels are equipped with
tire chains or the wheels are buried
in snow.

Do not place metalized film or any
metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the
windows. This may cause poor reception of the signals from the tire
pressure sensors, and the TPMS will
not function properly.

Some devices and transmitters may temporarily
interfere with the operation of the TPMS and
cause the low tire pressure warning light to
illuminate. Some examples are:
.
.
.

Facilities or electric devices using similar
radio frequencies are near the vehicle.
If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is
being used in or near the vehicle.
If a computer (or similar equipment) or a DC/
AC converter is being used in or near the
vehicle.

If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel and
tire without TPMS.
. If the TPMS has been replaced and the ID
has not been registered.
. If the wheel is not originally specified by
NISSAN.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference, including interferStarting and driving 5-5

ence that may cause undesired operation
of the device.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLLOVER

WARNING
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe
and prudent manner may result in loss
of control or an accident.
Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey
all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,
high speed cornering, or sudden steering
maneuvers, because these driving practices
could cause you to lose control of your vehicle.
As with any vehicle, a loss of control could
result in a collision with other vehicles or
objects, or cause the vehicle to rollover,
particularly if the loss of control causes the
vehicle to slide sideways. Be attentive at all
times, and avoid driving when tired. Never drive
when under the influence of alcohol or drugs
(including prescription or over-the-counter
drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always
wear your seat belt as outlined in “Seat belts”
(P.1-10) of this manual, and also instruct your
passengers to do so.
Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in

5-6

Starting and driving

collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an
unbelted or improperly belted person is
significantly more likely to be injured or
killed than a person properly wearing a
seat belt.

OFF-ROAD RECOVERY

appropriate driving lane.
If you decide that it is not safe to return
the vehicle to the road surface based on
vehicle, road or traffic conditions, gradually slow the vehicle to a stop in a safe
place off the road.

If the right side or left side wheels leave the road
surface, maintain control of the vehicle by
following the procedure below. Please note that
this procedure is only a general guide. The
vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on
the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.

RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling
and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway
speeds.

2. Do not apply the brakes.
3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel
with both hands and try to hold a straight
course.
4. When appropriate, slowly release the accelerator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.
5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the
vehicle to follow the road while the vehicle
speed is reduced. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle back onto the road surface until
vehicle speed is reduced.
6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the
steering wheel until both tires return to the
road surface. When all tires are on the road
surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the

Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can
occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged due
to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure
loss can also be caused by driving on underinflated tires.

Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintaining the correct air pressure and visually
inspect the tires for wear and damage. See
“Wheels and tires” (P.8-28) of this manual.
If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or “blows-out”
while driving maintain control of the vehicle by
following the procedure below. Please note that
this procedure is only a general guide. The
vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on
the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.

WARNING
The following actions can increase the
chance of losing control of the vehicle if
there is a sudden loss of tire air
pressure. Losing control of the vehicle
may cause a collision and result in
personal injury.
.

The vehicle generally moves or pulls
in the direction of the flat tire.

Do not rapidly apply the brakes.

Do not rapidly release the accelerator pedal.

Do not rapidly turn the steering
wheel.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel
with both hands and try to hold a straight
course.
3. When appropriate, slowly release the accelerator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.
4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location
off the road and away from traffic if possible.
5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually
stop the vehicle.

6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and
either contact a roadside emergency service
to change the tire or see “Changing a flat
tire” (P.6-4) of this Owner’s Manual.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND
DRIVING

WARNING
Never drive under the influence of
alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream reduces coordination, delays
reaction time and impairs judgement.
Driving after drinking alcohol increases
the likelihood of being involved in an
accident injuring yourself and others.
Additionally, if you are injured in an
accident, alcohol can increase the severity of the injury.
NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,
you must choose not to drive under the influence
of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are
injured or killed in alcohol-related accidents.
Although the local laws vary on what is
considered to be legally intoxicated, the fact is
that alcohol affects all people differently and
most people underestimate the effects of
alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! And
that is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter,
prescription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if
your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by
alcohol, drugs, or some other physical condition.

DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Your vehicle is designed for both normal and offroad use. However, avoid driving in deep water
or mud as your vehicle is mainly designed for
leisure use, unlike a conventional off-road
vehicle.
Remember that Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models are less capable than All-Wheel Drive
(AWD) models for rough road driving and
extrication when stuck in deep snow, mud, or
the like.
Please observe the following precautions:

WARNING
.

Drive carefully when off the road
and avoid dangerous areas. Every
person who drives or rides in this
vehicle should be seated with their
seat belt fastened. This will keep
you and your passengers in position
when driving over rough terrain.

Starting and driving 5-7

Do not drive across steep slopes.
Instead drive either straight up or
straight down the slopes. Off-road
vehicles can tip over sideways much
more easily than they can forward or
backward.

Many hills are too steep for any
vehicle. If you drive up them, you
may stall. If you drive down them,
you may not be able to control your
speed. If you drive across them, you
may roll over.

Unsecured cargo can be thrown
around when driving over rough
terrain. Properly secure all cargo
so it will not be thrown forward
and cause injury to you or your
passengers.

Do not shift ranges while driving on
downhill grades as this could cause
loss of control of the vehicle.

Stay alert when driving to the top of
a hill. At the top there could be a
drop-off or other hazard that could
cause an accident.

If your engine stalls or you cannot
make it to the top of a steep hill,
never attempt to turn around. Your
vehicle could tip or roll over. Always
back straight down in R (Reverse)
range. Never back down in N (Neutral), using only the brake, as this
could cause loss of control.

To avoid raising the center of gravity
excessively, do not exceed the rated
capacity of the roof rack (if so
equipped) and evenly distribute the
load. Secure heavy loads in the
cargo area as far forward and as
low as possible. Do not equip the
vehicle with tires larger than specified in this manual. This could cause
your vehicle to roll over.

5-8

Starting and driving

Heavy braking going down a hill
could cause your brakes to overheat
and fade, resulting in loss of control
and an accident. Apply brakes
lightly and use a low range to
control your speed.

Do not grip the inside or spokes of
the steering wheel when driving offroad. The steering wheel could
move suddenly and injure your
hands. Instead drive with your fingers and thumbs on the outside of
the rim.

Before operating the vehicle, ensure
that the driver and all passengers
have their seat belts fastened.

Always drive with the floor mats in
place as the floor may became hot.

Lower your speed when encountering strong crosswinds. With a higher
center of gravity, your vehicle is
more affected by strong side winds.
Slower speeds ensure better vehicle
control.

Do not drive beyond the performance capability of the tires, even
with AWD engaged.

For AWD equipped vehicles, do not
attempt to raise two wheels off the
ground and shift the transmission to
any drive or reverse position with
the engine running. Doing so may
result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which
could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.

Do not attempt to test an AWD
equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer (such as the dynamometers used by some states for
emissions testing), or similar equip-

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
ment even if the other two wheels
are raised off the ground. Make sure
you inform test facility personnel
that your vehicle is equipped with
AWD before it is placed on a
dynamometer. Using the wrong test
equipment may result in drivetrain
damage or unexpected vehicle
movement which could result in
serious vehicle damage or personal
injury.
.

When a wheel is off the ground due
to an unlevel surface, do not spin
the wheel excessively (AWD model).

Accelerating quickly, sharp steering
maneuvers or sudden braking may
cause loss of control.

If at all possible, avoid sharp turning
maneuvers, particularly at high
speeds. Your vehicle has a higher
center of gravity than a conventional
passenger car. The vehicle is not
designed for cornering at the same
speeds as conventional passenger
cars. Failure to operate this vehicle
correctly could result in loss of
control and/or a rollover accident.

belted or radial), and tread pattern
on all four wheels. Install traction
devices on the front wheels when
driving on slippery roads and drive
carefully.
.

Be sure to check the brakes immediately after driving in mud or water.
See “Brake system” (P.5-35) for wet
brakes.

Avoid parking your vehicle on steep
hills. If you get out of the vehicle
and it rolls forward, backward or
sideways, you could be injured.

Whenever you drive off-road
through sand, mud or water as deep
as the wheel hub, more frequent
maintenance may be required. See
the maintenance schedule shown in
the “9. Maintenance and schedules”
section.

Spinning the front wheels on slippery surfaces may cause the AWD
warning light to flash and the AWD
system to automatically switch from
the AWD mode to the 2WD mode.
This could reduce traction.

WARNING
Do not operate the push-button ignition
switch while driving the vehicle except
in an emergency. (The engine will stop
when the ignition switch is pushed 3
consecutive times or the ignition switch
is pushed and held for more than 2
seconds.) If the engine stops while the
vehicle is being driven, this could lead
to a crash and serious injury.
Before operating the push-button ignition
switch, be sure to move the shift lever to the P
(Park) position (for Continuously Variable Transmission models) or the shift lever to the N
(Neutral) position (for manual transmission
models).

Always use tires of the same type,
size, brand, construction (bias, biasStarting and driving 5-9

.
.

The cargo room area is not included in the
operating range but the Intelligent Key may
function.
If the Intelligent Key is placed on the
instrument panel, inside the glove box or
door pocket, the Intelligent Key may not
function.
If the Intelligent Key is placed near the door
or window outside the vehicle, the Intelligent
Key may function.

SSD0436

SSD0859

OPERATING RANGE FOR ENGINE
START FUNCTION

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
OPERATION

The Intelligent Key can only be used for starting
the engine when the Intelligent Key is within the
1 .
specified operating range *

When the ignition switch is pushed without
depressing the brake pedal (Continuously Variable Transmission models) or the clutch pedal
(manual transmission models), the ignition
switch position will change as follows:

When the Intelligent Key battery is almost
discharged or strong radio waves are present
near the operating location, the Intelligent Key
system’s operating range becomes narrower
and may not function properly.
If the Intelligent Key is within the operating
range, it is possible for anyone, even someone
who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push
the ignition switch to start the engine.

5-10 Starting and driving

.
.
.
.
.

Push once to change to ACC.
Push two times to change to ON.
Push three times to change to OFF.
Push four times to return to ACC.
Open or close any door to return to LOCK
during the OFF position.
A on the ignition switch
The indicator light *

illuminates when the ignition switch is in the
ACC or ON position.

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
POSITIONS

Some indicators and warnings for operation are
displayed on the meter. (See “Warning lights,
indicator lights and audible reminders” (P.215).)

LOCK (Normal parking position)

Continuously Variable Transmission
models
The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition
switch position cannot be switched to LOCK
until the shift lever is moved to the P (Park)
position.
When the ignition switch cannot be pushed
toward the LOCK position, proceed as follows:

The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is
pushed to the ACC position while carrying the
Intelligent Key.

ACC (Accessories)
This position activates electrical accessories
such as the radio, when the engine is not
running.

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF
To shut off the engine in an emergency situation
while driving, perform the following procedure:
.

ON (Normal operating position)
This position turns on the ignition system and
electrical accessories.

2. Push the ignition switch to the OFF position.

OFF

The shift lever can be moved from the P
(Park) position if the ignition switch is in
the ON position and the brake pedal is
depressed.

Do not leave the vehicle with the pushbutton ignition switch in ACC or ON
position when the engine is not running
for an extended period. This can discharge the battery.

The ignition switch can only be locked in this
position.

1. Move the shift lever into the P (Park)
position.
3. Open the door. The ignition switch will
change to the LOCK position.

CAUTION

Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch
3 consecutive times in less than 1.5
seconds, or
Push and hold the push-button ignition
switch for more than 2 seconds.

The engine can be turned off in this position.
Continuously Variable Transmission models: The
ignition lock is designed so that the ignition
switch cannot be switched to the LOCK position
until the shift lever is moved to the P (Park)
position.

Starting and driving 5-11

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE
4. Push the ignition switch while depressing
the brake pedal within 10 seconds after the
chime sounds. The engine will start.
After step 3 is performed, when the ignition
switch is pushed without depressing the brake
pedal, the ignition switch position will change to
ACC.

SSD0860

INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY DISCHARGE
If the battery of the Intelligent Key is discharged,
or environmental conditions interfere with the
Intelligent Key operation, start the engine
according to the following procedure:
1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position
(for Continuously Variable Transmission
models) or the shift lever to the N (Neutral)
position (for manual transmission models).
2. Firmly apply the foot brake.
3. Touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent
Key as illustrated. (A chime will sound.)

5-12 Starting and driving

NOTE:
. When the ignition switch is pushed to
the ACC or ON position or the engine is
started by the above procedures, the
Intelligent Key system warning light
may blink in yellow even if the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. This is
not a malfunction. To stop the warning
light from blinking, touch the ignition
switch with the Intelligent Key again.
. If the Intelligent Key system warning
light in the meter is blinking in green,
replace the battery as soon as possible.
(See “Intelligent Key battery replacement” (P.8-20).)

.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

Make sure the area around the vehicle is
clear.
Check fluid levels such as engine oil, coolant, brake fluid, and window washer fluid as
frequently as possible, or at least whenever
you refuel.
Check that all windows and lights are clean.
Visually inspect tires for their appearance
and condition. Also check tires for proper
inflation.
Lock all doors.
Position seat and adjust head restraints.
Adjust inside and outside mirrors.
Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to
do likewise.
Check the operation of warning lights when
the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position. (See “Warning lights, indicator
lights and audible reminders” (P.2-15).)

STARTING THE ENGINE
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) or N
(Neutral) position. (P is recommended.)
The starter is designed not to operate unless
the shift lever is in either of the above
positions.
Manual Transmission (MT) models:
Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)
position. Depress the clutch pedal fully to
the floor.
The starter is designed not to operate unless
the clutch pedal is fully depressed.
The Intelligent Key must be carried
when operating the ignition switch.
3. Push the ignition switch to the ON position.
Depress the brake pedal (CVT models) or
the clutch pedal (MT models) and push the
ignition switch to start the engine.
To start the engine immediately, push and
release the ignition switch while depressing
the brake pedal (CVT models) or the clutch
pedal (MT models) with the ignition switch in
any position.
. If the engine is very hard to start in
extremely cold weather or when restarting, depress the accelerator pedal a little
(approximately 1/3 to the floor) and while
holding, crank the engine. Release the

accelerator pedal when the engine starts.
If the engine is very hard to start because
it is flooded, depress the accelerator
pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Push the ignition switch to the ON
position to start cranking the engine.
After 5 or 6 seconds, stop cranking by
pushing the ignition switch to OFF. After
cranking the engine, release the accelerator pedal. Crank the engine with your
foot off the accelerator pedal by
depressing the brake pedal and pushing
the push-button ignition switch to start
the engine. If the engine starts, but fails
to run, repeat the above procedure.

moderate speed for a short distance first,
especially in cold weather. In cold weather,
keep the engine running for a minimum of 2 3 minutes before shutting it off. Starting and
stopping the engine over a short period of
time may make the vehicle more difficult to
start.
When racing the engine up to 4,000 rpm or
more under no load condition, the engine
will enter the fuel cut mode.
5. To stop the engine, move the shift lever to
the P (Park) position (CVT models) or move
the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position (MT
models), and push the ignition switch to the
OFF position.
NOTE:

CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more
than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine
does not start, push the ignition switch
to OFF and wait 10 seconds before
cranking again, otherwise the starter
could be damaged.
4. Warm-up
Allow the engine to idle for at least 30
seconds after starting. Do not race the
engine while warming it up. Drive at

Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery discharge
and potential no-start conditions such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery
power when the engine is not running
(Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players,
etc.)
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or
only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to be
charged to maintain battery health.
Starting and driving 5-13

DRIVING THE VEHICLE
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION (CVT)
The Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
in your vehicle is electronically controlled to
produce maximum power and smooth operation.
The recommended operating procedures for this
transmission are shown on the following pages.
Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle
performance and driving enjoyment.
Engine power may be automatically reduced to protect the CVT if the engine
speed increases quickly when driving on
slippery roads or while being tested on
some dynamometers.

2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed, push
the shift lever button and move the shift lever
to a driving position.
3. Release the parking brake and foot brake
pedal, and then gradually start the vehicle in
motion.

Starting the vehicle
1. After starting the engine, fully depress the
foot brake pedal before moving the shift
lever out of the P (Park) position.
This CVT is designed so that the foot
brake pedal must be depressed before
shifting from P (Park) to any driving
position while the ignition switch is in
the ON position.
The shift lever cannot be moved out of
the P (Park) position and into any of
the other positions if the ignition
switch is placed in the LOCK, OFF or
ACC position or if the key is removed.

5-14 Starting and driving

Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of
control.

CAUTION

WARNING

Do not depress the accelerator
pedal while shifting from P (Park)
or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D
(Drive), or manual shift mode (if so
equipped) . Always depress the
brake pedal until shifting is completed. Failure to do so could cause
you to lose control and have an
accident.

To avoid possible damage to your
vehicle; when stopping the vehicle
on an uphill grade, do not hold the
vehicle by depressing the accelerator pedal. The foot brake should be
used for this purpose.

Except in an emergency, do not shift
to the N (Neutral) position while
driving. Coasting with the transmission in the N (Neutral) position may
cause serious damage to the transmission.

Cold engine idle speed is high, so
use caution when shifting into a
forward or reverse gear before the
engine has warmed up.

Never shift to either the P (Park) or
R (Reverse) position while vehicle is
moving forward and P (Park) or D
(Drive) while the vehicle is reversing. This could cause an accident
or damage the transmission.

WARNING
Apply the parking brake if the shift lever
is in any position while the engine is
not running. Failure to do so could
cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly
or roll away and result in serious
personal injury or property damage.

SSD1140

To move the shift lever,
:
:
:

Push the button A while depressing the
brake pedal.
Push the button A .
Just move the shift lever.

Shifting
After starting the engine, fully depress the brake
pedal, push the shift lever button and move the
shift lever from the P (Park) position to any of the
desired shift positions.

If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or
ACC position for any reason while the shift lever
is in any positions other than the P (Park), the
ignition switch cannot be placed in the LOCK
position.
If the ignition switch cannot be placed in the
LOCK position, perform the following steps:
1. Apply the parking brake when the vehicle is
stopped.
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position
while depressing the foot brake pedal.
3. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
4. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.

CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, move
the shift lever to the P (Park) or R
(Reverse) position only when the vehicle is completely stopped.
P (Park):
Use this position when the vehicle is parked or
when starting the engine. Make sure the vehicle
is completely stopped. The brake pedal must
be depressed and the shift lever button
pushed in to move the shift lever from N
(Neutral) or any drive position to P (Park).
Apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill,
apply the parking brake first, then move the shift
lever to the P (Park) position.
R (Reverse):
Use this position to back up. Make sure the
vehicle is completely stopped before selecting
the R (Reverse) position. The brake pedal
must be depressed and the shift lever
button pushed in to move the shift lever
from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any driving
position to R (Reverse).

Starting and driving 5-15

Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:

N (Neutral):
Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged.
The engine can be started in this position. You
may shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled
engine while the vehicle is moving.

Except for NISMO RS models:
M1

?
/

NISMO RS models:

D (Drive):
Use this position for all normal forward driving.

JVS0388X

Paddle shifter (if so equipped)

Manual shift mode (if so equipped)
When the shift lever is shifted from the D (Drive)
position to the manual shift gate, the transmission enters the manual shift mode. Shift ranges
can be selected manually by moving the shift
lever up or down, or pulling the right-side or leftside paddle shifter (if so equipped).
In the manual shift mode, the shift range is
displayed on the position indicator in the meter.

5-16 Starting and driving

?
/

?
?
?
?
?
?
?
M8
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
M7
/
/
/
/
/
/
/

When shifting up, move the shift lever to the
+ (up) side or pull the right-side paddle
A
shifter (+) *
(if so equipped). The
transmission shifts to a higher range.
When shifting down, move the shift lever to
the í (down) side or pull the left-side paddle
B
shifter (í) *
(if so equipped). The
transmission shifts to a lower range.
Moving the shift lever to the same side twice
will shift the ranges in succession. However,
if this motion is rapidly done, the second
shifting may not be completed properly.
When canceling the manual shift mode,
return the shift lever to the D (Drive) position.
The transmission returns to the normal
driving mode.
When you pull the paddle shifter (if so
equipped) while in the D (Drive) position, the
transmission will shift to the upper or lower
range temporarily. The transmission will
automatically return to the D (Drive) position

after a short period of time. If you want to
return to the D (Drive) position manually, pull
and hold the paddle shifter for about 1.5
seconds.
M7 (7th) (except for NISMO RS models):
M8 (8th) (NISMO RS models):
Use this position for all normal forward driving at
highway speeds.

M6 (6th) and M5 (5th) (except for NISMO
RS models):
M7 (7th) and M6 (6th) (NISMO RS models):
Use these positions when driving up long
slopes, or for engine braking when driving down
long slopes.

M4 (4th), M3 (3rd) and M2 (2nd) (except for
NISMO RS models):
M5 (5th), M4 (4th), M3 (3rd) and M2 (2nd)
(NISMO RS models):
Use these positions for hill climbing or engine
braking on downhill grades.
M1 (1st):
Use this position when climbing steep hills
slowly or driving slowly through deep snow,
sand or mud, or for maximum engine braking on
steep downhill grades.

Remember not to drive at high speeds for
extended periods of time in lower than M7
(except for NISMO RS models) or M8
(NISMO RS models) range. This reduces
fuel economy.
In the manual shift mode, the transmission may not shift to the selected
range. This helps maintain driving performance and reduces the chance of
vehicle damage or loss of control.
When this situation occurs, the Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
position indicator light will blink and
the chime will sound.
In the manual shift mode, the transmission automatically shifts down to 1st
gear before the vehicle comes to a
stop. When accelerating again, it is
necessary to shift up to the desired
range.
When the CVT fluid temperature is extremely low, the manual shift mode may not
work and automatically shift as a drive mode.
This is not a malfunction. In this case, return
the shift lever to the D (Drive) position and
drive for a while and then shift to the manual
shift mode.
When the CVT fluid temperature is high, the
shift range may upshift at a lower engine
speed than usual. This is not a malfunction.

Accelerator downshift — In D position —
For passing or hill climbing, fully depress the
accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the
transmission down into a lower gear, depending
on the vehicle speed.

High fluid temperature protection mode
This transmission has a high fluid temperature
protection mode. If the fluid temperature becomes too high (for example, when climbing
steep grades in high temperature with heavy
loads), engine power and, under some conditions, vehicle speed will be decreased automatically to reduce the chance of transmission
damage. Vehicle speed can be controlled with
the accelerator pedal, but the engine and vehicle
speed may be limited.

Fail-safe
If the vehicle is driven under extreme
conditions, such as excessive wheel spinning and subsequent hard braking, the
fail-safe system may be activated. The MIL
may illuminate to indicate the fail-safe
mode is activated. (See “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” (P.2-22).) This will
occur even if all electrical circuits are
functioning properly. In this case, place
the ignition switch in the OFF position and
wait for 10 seconds. Then turn the switch
Starting and driving 5-17

4. Push down the shift lock release using a
suitable tool.

back to the ON position. The vehicle
should return to its normal operating
condition. If it does not return to its normal
operating condition, have the transmission
checked and repaired, if necessary. It is
recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.

5. Push the shift lever button and move the
shift lever to the N (Neutral) position while
holding down the shift lock release.
Place the ignition switch in the ON position. The
vehicle may be moved to the desired location.
Replace the removed shift lock release cover
after the operation.

WARNING
When the high fluid temperature protection mode or fail-safe operation
occurs, vehicle speed may be gradually
reduced. The reduced speed may be
lower than other traffic, which could
increase the chance of a collision. Be
especially careful when driving. If necessary, pull to the side of the road at a
safe place and allow the transmission
to return to normal operation, or have it
repaired if necessary.

If the battery is discharged completely, the
steering wheel cannot be unlocked. Do not
move the vehicle with the steering wheel locked.
SSD1142

Shift lock release
If the battery charge is low or discharged, the
shift lever may not be moved from the P (Park)
position even with the brake pedal depressed
and the shift lever button pushed.
To move the shift lever, perform the following
procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
LOCK position.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Remove the shift lock release cover
using a suitable tool.

5-18 Starting and driving

A
*

If the shift lever cannot be moved out of the P
(Park) position, have the CVT system checked
as soon as possible. It is recommended you visit
a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING
If the shift lever cannot be moved from
the P (Park) position while the engine is
running and the brake pedal is depressed, the stop lights may not work.
Malfunctioning stop lights could cause
an accident injuring yourself and
others.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION (MT)

CAUTION
WARNING
.

Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of
control.

Do not over-rev the engine when
shifting to a lower gear. This may
cause a loss of control or engine
damage.

When the high fluid temperature
protection mode or fail-safe operation occurs, vehicle speed may be
gradually reduced. The reduced
speed may be lower than other
traffic, which could increase the
chance of a collision. Be especially
careful when driving. If necessary,
pull to the side of the road at a safe
place and allow the transmission to
return to normal operation, or have
it repaired if necessary.

Do not rest your foot on the clutch
pedal while driving. This may damage the clutch.

Fully depress the clutch pedal before shifting to help prevent transmission damage.

Stop your vehicle completely before
shifting into R (Reverse).

When the vehicle is stopped for a
period of time, for example at a stop
light, shift to N (Neutral) and release
the clutch pedal with the foot brake
applied.

SSD0552

Shifting
To change gears, or when upshifting or downshifting, fully depress the clutch pedal, shift into
the appropriate gear, then slowly and smoothly
release the clutch pedal.
To ensure smooth gear changes, be sure to fully
depress the clutch pedal before operating the
shift lever. If the clutch pedal is not fully
depressed before the transmission is shifted, a
gear noise may be heard. Transmission damage
could occur.
Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd,
3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th gear in sequence according to vehicle speed.
Starting and driving 5-19

1 upward
To back up, pull the shift lever ring *
and then move it to the R (Reverse) gear after
stopping the vehicle completely.

The shift lever ring returns to its original position
when the shift lever is moved to the N (Neutral)
position.

Suggested maximum speed in each gear
Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not
running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.

If it is difficult to move the shift lever into the R
(Reverse) or 1st gear, shift to the N (Neutral)
position, and then release the clutch pedal once.
Fully depress the clutch pedal again and shift
into the R (Reverse) or 1st gear.

Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed
(shown below) in any gear. For level road
driving, use the highest gear suggested for that
speed. Always observe posted speed limits, and
drive according to the road conditions, which
will ensure safe operation. Do not over-rev the
engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may
cause engine damage or loss of vehicle control.

Suggested upshift speeds

Except for NISMO RS models:

The following are suggested vehicle speeds for
shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions
relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance.
Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road
conditions, the weather and individual driving
habits.
Gear change
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
5th to 6th

5-20 Starting and driving

MPH
13
22
30
35
42

(km/h)
(21)
(35)
(48)
(56)
(68)

Gear
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
6th

MPH (km/h)
31 (50)
55 (88)
76 (122)
—
—
—

For NISMO RS models:
Gear
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
6th

MPH (km/h)
27 (44)
50 (80)
73 (118)
—
—
—

INTEGRATED CONTROL SYSTEM (if
so equipped)
The Integrated Control System is located below
the audio system or navigation system (if so
equipped). Two Integrated Control System
modes can be selected: Drive mode and
Climate Control mode.
Depending on which Integrated Control System
mode selected (Drive mode or Climate Control
mode), the screen display and some button
functions will change.
.

Drive mode
In the Drive mode, three types of driving
modes can be selected: NORMAL, SPORT
and ECO. See “Drive mode” (P.5-22). In
addition, while in the Drive mode, SETUP,
Drive information and ECO information can
be displayed and adjusted. See “Integrated
control system” (P.2-24).
Climate Control mode
In the Climate Control mode, the climate
control can be set and adjusted. See
“Automatic air conditioner (with Integrated
Control System)” (P.4-32).

SSD1154

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

NORMAL drive mode button
Climate control mode select button
Drive mode select button
SETUP button
SPORT drive mode button
ECO drive mode button
Display screen

Enter button/Selection dial

Starting and driving 5-21

display values as reference only.
The vehicle will be set to the NORMAL
drive mode when restarting the engine.

SSD1144

SSD1145

Example

DRIVE MODE

NORMAL drive mode

Three drive modes (NORMAL, SPORT and
ECO) can be selected depending on the driving
condition. When each mode is selected, the
control state of the engine, CVT (if so
equipped), steering and climate appears on
the display briefly.

The NORMAL drive mode is recommended for
normal driving. To set the NORMAL drive mode,
press the Drive mode select button and then
press the NORMAL drive mode button. The
control state of the engine, CVT (if so equipped)
steering and climate is displayed briefly.

Each selected Drive mode (NORMAL, SPORT
or ECO) is displayed at the top of the display
screen.

When the NORMAL drive mode is selected, a
voltage meter and an engine torque meter
appear on the display screen.

NOTE:
. The display values of torque, boost and
current fuel economy may differ depending on driving conditions. Use the

NOTE:
. The voltage meter may change according to the driving condition. This is not
a malfunction.

5-22 Starting and driving

NOTE:

At start up, the vehicle is automatically
set to the NORMAL drive mode.

In the SPORT mode, fuel economy may be
reduced.

SSD1146

SPORT drive mode
The SPORT drive mode is recommended for an
enhanced performance feel. To set the SPORT
drive mode, press the drive mode select button.
The control state of the engine, CVT (if so
equipped), steering and climate control is
displayed briefly. In the SPORT mode, the
engine, CVT (if so equipped) and steering are
set to SPORT. Climate control is set to
NORMAL.
When the SPORT drive mode is selected, a
boost meter appears on the display screen.

Starting and driving 5-23

on, the climate control system is adjusted to
further enhance fuel economy.
The climate ECO mode can be switched on or
off in the SETUP mode. See “Setting the climate
ECO mode” (P.5-24).
NOTE:
. Many driving factors influence fuel
economy. Selecting the ECO drive
mode may not improve fuel economy.
. In the ECO drive mode, performance
may be reduced.
SSD1147

ECO drive mode
The ECO drive mode is recommended for
maximum fuel economy. In the ECO drive mode,
the engine and CVT (if so equipped) are
adjusted to enhance fuel economy.
To set the ECO drive mode, press the drive
mode select button and then press the ECO
drive mode button. The control state of the
engine, CVT (if so equipped), steering and
climate control is displayed briefly.
When the ECO drive mode is selected, the
current fuel economy appears on the display
screen.
When the climate ECO mode is also switched

5-24 Starting and driving

SSD1148

Setting the climate ECO mode:
When the climate ECO mode is switched on,
the climate control system operates to enhance
fuel economy.
To turn the climate ECO mode on or off
1. Press the drive mode select button to select
the drive mode.
2. Press the SETUP button.
3. Turn the selection dial until “CLIMATE ECO”
is selected.
4. Press the ENTER button to switch climate
ECO on or off. When the CLIMATE ECO
mode is turned on, the CLIMATE ECO
A
indicator *
turns red on the display

PARKING BRAKE
screen.

WARNING
.

Be sure the parking brake is fully
released before driving. Failure to
do so can cause brake failure and
lead to an accident.

Do not release the parking brake
from outside the vehicle.

Do not use the shift lever in place of
the parking brake. When parking, be
sure the parking brake is fully
engaged.

SPA2110

To apply: Pull the parking brake lever up

1 .
*

To release:
1. Firmly apply the foot brake.
2. While pulling up on the parking brake lever
2 and lower the
slightly, push the button *
3 .
lever completely *
3. Before driving, be sure the brake warning
light goes out.

Starting and driving 5-25

CRUISE CONTROL
PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CONTROL
.

If the cruise control system malfunctions, it
will cancel automatically. The CRUISE indicator light on the meter panel will then
blink to warn the driver.
If the engine coolant temperature becomes
excessively high, the cruise control system
will cancel automatically.
If the CRUISE indicator light blinks, turn the
cruise control MAIN switch off and have the
system checked. It is recommended you visit
a NISSAN dealer for this service.
The CRUISE indicator light may blink when
the cruise control MAIN switch is turned ON
while pushing the ACCEL/RES, COAST/
SET or CANCEL switch. To properly set the
cruise control system, perform the following
procedures.

.
.

WARNING
Do not use the cruise control when
driving under the following conditions:
.

when it is not possible to keep the
vehicle at a set speed

in heavy traffic or in traffic that
varies in speed

5-26 Starting and driving

on winding or hilly roads

on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice,
etc.)

in very windy areas

Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle
control and result in an accident.

CAUTION
On Manual Transmission (MT) models,
do not shift into N (Neutral) without
depressing the clutch pedal when the
cruise control is set. Should this occur,
depress the clutch pedal and turn the
MAIN switch off immediately. Failure to
do so may cause engine damage.

SSD1128

1.
2.
3.
4.

ACCEL/RES switch
COAST/SET switch
CANCEL switch
MAIN (ON·OFF) switch

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS
The cruise control allows driving at a speed
between 25 to 89 MPH (40 to 144 km/h)
without keeping your foot on the accelerator
pedal.
To turn on the cruise control, push the MAIN
switch on. The CRUISE indicator light will
illuminate.
To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle
to the desired speed, push the COAST/SET
switch and release it. Take your foot off the

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE
accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the
set speed.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one
of the following methods:

To pass another vehicle, depress the
accelerator pedal. When you release the
pedal, the vehicle will return to the previously
set speed.
. The vehicle may not maintain the set speed
on winding or hilly roads. If this happens,
drive without the cruise control.
To cancel the preset speed, use one of the
following methods:
a)
b)
c)

.
.

Push the CANCEL switch.
Tap the brake pedal.
Turn the MAIN switch off. The CRUISE indicator
light will turn off.

If you depress the brake pedal while pushing
the ACCEL/RES or COAST/SET switch and
reset at the cruising speed, the cruise
control will disengage. Turn the MAIN switch
off once and then turn it on again.
The cruise control will automatically cancel if
the vehicle slows more than 8 MPH (13
km/h) below the set speed.
If you move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)
position (Continuously Variable Transmission models) or depressing the clutch pedal
(Manual Transmission models), the cruise
control will be canceled.

Depress the accelerator pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push and
release the COAST/SET switch.
. Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.
When the vehicle attains the desired speed,
release the switch.
. Push, then quickly release the ACCEL/RES
switch. Each time you do this, the set speed
will increase by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one
of the following methods:

CAUTION
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),
follow these recommendations to obtain maximum engine performance and
ensure the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure to
follow these recommendations may
result in shortened engine life and
reduced engine performance.
.

Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push the
COAST/SET switch and release it.
. Push and hold the COAST/SET switch.
Release the switch when the vehicle slows
down to the desired speed.
. Push, then quickly release the COAST/SET
switch. Each time you do this, the set speed
will decrease by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).
To resume the preset speed, push and
release the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle
will resume the last set cruising speed when the
vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).

.
.
.

Avoid driving for long periods at constant
speed, either fast or slow. Do not run the
engine over 4,000 rpm.
Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.
Avoid quick starts.
Avoid hard braking as much as possible.

Starting and driving 5-27

FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS
Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient Driving
Tips to help you achieve the most fuel economy
from your vehicle.
1. Use smooth accelerator and brake pedal
application.
. Avoid rapid starts and stops.
. Use smooth, gentle accelerator and
brake application whenever possible.
. Maintain constant speed while commuting and coast whenever possible.
2. Maintain constant speed.
. Look ahead to try and anticipate and
minimize stops.
. Synchronizing your speed with traffic
lights allows you to reduce your number
of stops.
. Maintaining a steady speed can minimize
red light stops and improve fuel efficiency.
3. Use air conditioning (A/C) at higher vehicle
speeds.
. Below 40 MPH (64 km/h), it is more
efficient to open windows to cool the
vehicle due to reduced engine load.
. Above 40 MPH (64 km/h), it is more
efficient to use A/C to cool the vehicle
due to increased aerodynamic drag.

5-28 Starting and driving

Recirculating the cool air in the cabin
when the A/C is on reduces cooling load.

4. Drive at economical speeds and distances.
. Observing the speed limit and not exceeding 60 MPH (97 km/h) (where
legally allowed) can improve fuel efficiency due to reduced aerodynamic
drag.
. Maintaining a safe following distance
behind other vehicles reduces unnecessary braking.
. Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate
changes in speed permits reduced braking and smooth acceleration changes.
. Select a gear range suitable to road
conditions.
5. Use cruise control.
. Using cruise control during highway
driving helps maintain a steady speed.
. Cruise control is particularly effective in
providing fuel savings when driving on
flat terrains.
6. Plan for the shortest route.
. Utilize a map or navigation system to
determine the best route to save time.
7. Avoid idling.
. Shutting off your engine when safe for
stops exceeding 30-60 seconds saves

fuel and reduces emissions.
8. Buy an automated pass for toll roads.
. Automated passes permit drivers to use
special lanes to maintain cruising speed
through the toll and avoid stopping and
starting.
9. Winter warm up.
. Limit idling time to minimize impact to fuel
economy.
. Vehicles typically need no more than 30
seconds of idling at start-up to effectively
circulate the engine oil before driving.
. Your vehicle will reach its ideal operating
temperature more quickly while driving
versus idling.
10. Keeping your vehicle cool.
. Park your vehicle in a covered parking
area or in the shade whenever possible.
. When entering a hot vehicle, opening the
windows will help to reduce the inside
temperature faster, resulting in reduced
demand on your A/C system.

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY
.
.
.
.
.

Keep your engine tuned up.
Follow the recommended scheduled maintenance.
Keep the tires inflated to the correct
pressure. Low tire pressure increases tire
wear and lowers fuel economy.
Keep the wheels in correct alignment.
Improper alignment increases tire wear and
lowers fuel economy.
Use the recommended viscosity engine oil.
(See “Engine oil and oil filter recommendation” (P.10-7).)

ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) (if so
equipped)

WARNING
.

Do not attempt to test an AWD
equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer (such as the dynamometers used by some states for
emissions testing) or similar equipment even if the other two wheels
are raised off the ground. Make sure
that you inform the test facility
personnel that your vehicle is
equipped with AWD before it is
placed on a dynamometer. Using
the wrong test equipment may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which
could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.

SSD1129
AWD mode switch

ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) MODE
SWITCH OPERATIONS
The All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system is used to
select the 2WD (Two-Wheel Drive), AWD-V or
AWD mode depending on the driving conditions.
The AWD mode indicator lights (
(green),
) are located in the instrument panel.
(green)
The AWD mode indicator lights
illuminate when the ignition switch is placed in
the ON position. The indicator lights turn off
within 1 second.
The AWD mode indicator lights will display the
mode selected by the AWD mode switch while
Starting and driving 5-29

engine is running.
If the AWD warning light
(yellow) illuminates, the AWD mode indicator lights will turn
off.
Push the AWD mode switch, located on the
instrument panel, to select 2WD, AWD-V or
AWD.
AWD-V: Push the AWD mode switch to the
neutral (AWD-V) position. The All-Wheel Drive
(AWD) AWD-V indicator light
in the meter
illuminates.

AWD mode

Wheels driven

2WD

Front wheels:
The wheel drive mode is in
Two-Wheel Drive (2WD)
when driving on a normal road.

AWD-V

Distribution of torque to the
front and rear wheels changes
automatically [ratio; 100 : 0
(2WD) ? 50 : 50 (AWD)] and
distribution of torque between
left and right wheel of rear
wheels changes automatically
depending on road conditions
encountered [ratio; 100 : 0
(2WD) ? 50 : 50 (AWD)].

AWD

Distribution of torque to the
front and rear wheels changes
automatically [ratio; 100 : 0
(2WD) ? 50 : 50 (AWD)] and
the distribution of torque between the left and right rear
wheels changes automatically
depending on the slippery
road conditions encountered.

2WD: Push the AWD mode switch to the 2WD
position.
AWD: Push the AWD mode switch to the AWD
position. The AWD indicator light
(green) in
the meter illuminates.

5-30 Starting and driving

AWD mode indicator light
(
,
(green))

Turns off

Use conditions

For driving on dry,
paved roads

Illuminates

For driving on paved or
slippery roads

Illuminates (green)

For driving on slippery
roads

AWD shift tips
.

The oil temperature of power train parts will
increase if the vehicle is continuously
operated under conditions where the difference in rotation between the front and rear
wheels is large (wheel slip), such as when
driving the vehicle on rough roads through
sand or mud or when freeing a stuck vehicle.
In these cases, the AWD warning light blinks
rapidly and the AWD mode changes to the
2WD mode to protect the power train parts.
If you stop driving with the engine idling and
wait until the warning light stops blinking,
the AWD returns to the AWD-V or AWD
mode.
Brake distance in the AWD mode is the
same as 2WD.

CAUTION
.

Do not start the engine with the
AWD mode switch in any mode in
the following cases:
— when the vehicle is placed on a
free-roller or jacking up the
vehicle with the front tires
raised and the rear tires on the
ground.

— when towing the vehicle with the
rear tires raised from the
ground.
.

Operate the AWD mode switch only
when driving straight. Do not operate the AWD mode switch when
making a turn or backing up. If the
AWD mode switch is operated while
making a turn, accelerating or decelerating, or if the ignition switch is
turned off while in the AWD-V or
AWD mode, you may feel a jolt. This
is not a malfunction.

Do not operate the AWD mode
switch with the front wheel spinning.

Engine idling speed is high while
warming up the engine. Be especially careful when starting or driving on slippery surfaces with the
AWD mode switch set in the AWD-V
or AWD mode.

SSD0336-D

AWD WARNING LIGHT
The AWD warning light located in the instrument
panel illuminates when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position. It turns off soon after
the engine is started.
If any malfunction occurs in the AWD system
while the engine is running, or while driving, the
Starting and driving 5-31

warning light will either remain illuminated or
blink.
High-temperature power train oil due to continuous operation of the vehicle to free a stuck
vehicle makes the warning light blink rapidly
(about twice per second). The driving mode may
change to the 2WD mode. If the warning light
blinks rapidly during operation, stop the vehicle
with the engine idling in a safe place immediately. Then if the light goes off after a while, you
can continue driving.
A large difference between the diameters of
front and rear wheels will make the warning light
blink slowly (about once per 2 seconds). Pull off
the road in a safe area, and idle the engine.
Check that all tire sizes are the same, tire
pressure is correct and tires are not worn.
Change the AWD mode switch to the 2WD
mode and do not drive fast.

CAUTION
.

If the warning light illuminates while
driving, AWD mode will be changed
to 2WD mode. Reduce the vehicle
speed and have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible. It is
recommended you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. Be especially

5-32 Starting and driving

careful when driving.
.

The power train may be damaged if
you continue driving with the AWD
warning light blinking rapidly.

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS
applied and the transmission placed
into P (Park) for Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) model or in
an appropriate gear for Manual
Transmission (MT) model. Failure
to do so could cause the vehicle to
move unexpectedly or roll away and
result in an accident.
.

SSD0488

Make sure the continuously variable
transmission shift lever has been
pushed as far forward as it can go
and cannot be moved without depressing the foot brake pedal.

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

WARNING
.

dents.
.

Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry
grass, waste paper or rags. They
may ignite and cause a fire.

Never leave the engine running
while the vehicle is unattended.

Do not leave children unattended
inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended children could
become involved in serious acci-

2. Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) models:
Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
Manual Transmission (MT) models:
Move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) gear.
When parking on an uphill grade, place the
shift lever in the 1st gear.
3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into
the street when parked on a sloping drive
way, it is a good practice to turn the wheels
as illustrated.
. HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: *
1
Turn the wheels into the curb and move
Starting and driving 5-33

ELECTRIC POWER STEERING

the vehicle forward until the curb side
wheel gently touches the curb.
2
HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: *
Turn the wheels away from the curb and
move the vehicle back until the curb side
wheel gently touches the curb.
HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO
3
CURB: *
Turn the wheels toward the side of the
road so the vehicle will move away from
the center of the road if it moves.

4. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.

WARNING
.

If the engine is not running or is
turned off while driving, the power
assist for the steering will not work.
Steering will be harder to operate.
When the electric power steering
warning light illuminates with the
engine running, the power assist for
the steering will cease operation.
You will still have control of the
vehicle but the steering will be
harder to operate.

The electric power steering is designed to
provide power assist while driving to operate
the steering wheel with light force.
When the steering wheel is operated repeatedly
or continuously while parking or driving at a very
low speed, the power assist for the steering
wheel will be reduced. This is to prevent
overheating of the electric power steering and
protect it from getting damaged. While the
power assist is reduced, steering wheel operation will become heavy. When the temperature
of the electric power steering goes down, the
power assist level will return to normal. Avoid
repeating such steering wheel operations that

5-34 Starting and driving

could cause the electric power steering to
overheat.
You may hear a sound when the steering wheel
is operated quickly. However, this is not a
malfunction.
If the electric power steering warning light
illuminates while the engine is running, it may
indicate the electric power steering is not
functioning properly and may need servicing. It
is recommended you have the electric power
steering checked by a NISSAN dealer. (See
“Electric power steering warning light” (P.217).)
When the electric power steering warning light
illuminates with the engine running, the power
assist for the steering will cease operation. You
will still have control of the vehicle. However,
greater steering effort is needed, especially in
sharp turns and at low speeds.

BRAKE SYSTEM
BRAKING PRECAUTIONS
The brake system has two separate hydraulic
circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still
have braking at two wheels.
You may feel a small click and hear a sound
when the brake pedal is fully depressed slowly.
This is not a malfunction and indicates that the
brake assist mechanism is operating properly.

slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may
reduce braking performance and could result in
loss of vehicle control.

WARNING
.

While driving on a slippery surface,
be careful when braking, accelerating or downshifting. Abrupt braking
or accelerating could cause the
wheels to skid and result in an
accident.

If the engine is not running or is
turned off while driving, the power
assist for the brakes will not work.
Braking will be harder.

Vacuum assisted brakes
The brake booster aids braking by using engine
vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the
vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,
greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be
required to stop the vehicle and the stopping
distance will be longer.
When the brake pedal is depressed slowly and
firmly, you may hear a clicking noise and feel a
slight pulsation. This is normal and indicates that
the Brake Assist System is operating.

Using the brakes
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while
driving. This will cause overheating of the
brakes, wearing out the brake pads and shoes
faster and reduce gas mileage.
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the
brakes from overheating, reduce speed and
downshift to a lower gear before going down a

Parking brake break-in
Break in the parking brake shoes whenever the
stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened
or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or
drums/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the
best braking performance.
This procedure is described in the vehicle
service manual. It is recommended you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.

Wet brakes
When the vehicle is washed or driven through
water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your
braking distance will be longer and the vehicle
may pull to one side during braking.
To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed
while lightly tapping the brake pedal to heat-up
the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to
normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds
until the brakes function correctly.

Starting and driving 5-35

BRAKE ASSIST
BRAKE ASSIST

surfaces even with ABS. Stopping
distances may also be longer on
rough, gravel or snow covered
roads, or if you are using tire chains.
Always maintain a safe distance
from the vehicle in front of you.
Ultimately, the driver is responsible
for safety.

When the force applied to the brake pedal
exceeds a certain level, the Brake Assist is
activated generating greater braking force than a
conventional brake booster even with light pedal
force.

WARNING
The Brake Assist is only an aid to assist
braking operation and is not a collision
warning or avoidance device. It is the
driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive
safely and be in control of the vehicle at
all times.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)

WARNING
.

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
is a sophisticated device, but it
cannot prevent accidents resulting
from careless or dangerous driving
techniques. It can help maintain
vehicle control during braking on
slippery surfaces. Remember that
stopping distances on slippery surfaces will be longer than on normal

5-36 Starting and driving

Tire type and condition may also
affect braking effectiveness.
— When replacing tires, install the
specified size of tires on all four
wheels.
— When installing a spare tire,
make sure that it is the proper
size and type as specified on the
Tire and Loading Information
label. See “Tire and Loading
Information label” (P.10-12) of
this manual.
— For detailed information, see
“Wheels and tires” (P.8-28) of
this manual.

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls
the brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard
braking or when braking on slippery surfaces.
The system detects the rotation speed at each

wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to
prevent each wheel from locking and sliding. By
preventing each wheel from locking, the system
helps the driver maintain steering control and
helps to minimize swerving and spinning on
slippery surfaces.

Using the system
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.
Depress the brake pedal with firm steady
pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The
ABS will operate to prevent the wheels from
locking up. Steer the vehicle to avoid obstacles.

WARNING
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so
may result in increased stopping distances.

Self-test feature
The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric
pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The
computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that
tests the system each time you start the engine
and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward
or reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may
hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsation in the
brake pedal. This is normal and does not

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
SYSTEM
indicate a malfunction. If the computer senses a
malfunction, it switches the ABS off and
illuminates the ABS warning light on the
instrument panel. The brake system then operates normally, but without anti-lock assistance.

The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system
uses various sensors to monitor driver inputs
and vehicle motion. Under certain driving conditions, the VDC system helps to perform the
following functions.

If the ABS warning light illuminates during the
self-test or while driving, have the vehicle
checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

Normal operation
The ABS operates at speeds above 3 to 6 MPH
(5 to 10 km/h). The speed varies according to
road conditions.
When the ABS senses that one or more wheels
are close to locking up, the actuator rapidly
applies and releases hydraulic pressure. This
action is similar to pumping the brakes very
quickly. You may feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal and hear a noise from under the hood or
feel a vibration from the actuator when it is
operating. This is normal and indicates that the
ABS is operating properly. However, the pulsation may indicate that road conditions are
hazardous and extra care is required while
driving.

Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel
slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is
transferred to a non slipping drive wheel on
the same axle.
. Controls brake pressure and engine output
to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle
speed (traction control function).
. Controls brake pressure at individual wheels
and engine output to help the driver maintain
control of the vehicle in the following
conditions:
— understeer (vehicle tends to not follow
the steered path despite increased
steering input)
— oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to
certain road or driving conditions).
The VDC system can help the driver to maintain
control of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss
of vehicle control in all driving situations.

When the VDC system operates, the VDC
warning light
in the instrument panel flashes
so note the following:
.

The road may be slippery or the system may
determine some action is required to help
keep the vehicle on the steered path.
. You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal
and hear a noise or vibration from under the
hood. This is normal and indicates that the
VDC system is working properly.
. Adjust your speed and driving to the road
conditions.
If a malfunction occurs in the system, the VDC
warning light
illuminates in the instrument
panel. The VDC system automatically turns off.
The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC
system. The VDC off indicator
illuminates to
indicate the VDC system is off. When the VDC
switch is used to turn off the system, the VDC
system still operates to prevent one drive wheel
from slipping by transferring power to a non
slipping drive wheel. The VDC warning light
flashes if this occurs. All other VDC functions
are off, and the VDC warning light
will not
flash. The VDC system is automatically reset to
on when the ignition switch is placed in the off
position then back to the on position.
See “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning
light” (P.2-21) and “Vehicle Dynamic Control
Starting and driving 5-37

(VDC) off indicator light” (P.2-23).
The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature
that tests the system each time you start the
engine and move the vehicle forward or in
reverse at a slow speed. When the self-test
occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel
a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and
is not an indication of a malfunction.

WARNING
.

The VDC system is designed to help
improve driving stability but does
not prevent accidents due to abrupt
steering operation at high speeds or
by careless or dangerous driving
techniques. Reduce vehicle speed
and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery surfaces and always drive carefully.
Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. If suspension parts such as
shock absorbers, struts, springs,
stabilizer bars, bushings and
wheels are not NISSAN recommended for your vehicle or are
extremely deteriorated, the VDC
system may not operate properly.
This could adversely affect vehicle

5-38 Starting and driving

handling performance, and the VDC
warning light
may illuminate.
.

If brake related parts such as brake
pads, rotors and calipers are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system
may not operate properly and the
VDC warning light
may illuminate.

If engine control related parts are
not NISSAN recommended or are
extremely deteriorated, the VDC
warning light
may illuminate.

When driving on extremely inclined
surfaces such as higher banked
corners, the VDC system may not
operate properly and the VDC warning light
may illuminate. Do not
drive on these types of roads.

When driving on an unstable surface such as a turntable, ferry,
elevator or ramp, the VDC warning
light
may illuminate. This is not
a malfunction. Restart the engine
after driving onto a stable surface.

If wheels or tires other than the
NISSAN recommended ones are
used, the VDC system may not

operate properly and the VDC warning light
may illuminate.
.

The VDC system is not a substitute
for winter tires or tire chains on a
snow covered road.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING
FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

TIRE EQUIPMENT

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply
deicer through the key hole. If the lock becomes
frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the
key hole or use the Intelligent Key system.

SUMMER tires have a tread designed to provide
superior performance on dry pavement. However, the performance of these tires will be
substantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions. If you operate your vehicle on snowy or icy
roads, NISSAN recommends the use of MUD &
SNOW or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels.
It is recommended you consult a NISSAN dealer
for the tire type, size, speed rating and
availability information.

It is recommended that the following items be
carried in the vehicle during winter:

ANTI-FREEZE
In the winter when it is anticipated that the
outside temperature will drop below 328F (08C),
check the anti-freeze to assure proper winter
protection. For additional information, see “Engine cooling system” (P.8-4).

BATTERY
If the battery is not fully charged during
extremely cold weather conditions, the battery
fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To
maintain maximum efficiency, the battery should
be checked regularly. For additional information,
see “Battery” (P.8-10).

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER
If the vehicle is to be left outside without antifreeze, drain the cooling system, including the
engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.
For details, see “Engine cooling system” (P.8-4).

For additional traction on icy roads, studded
tires may be used. However, some U.S. states
and Canadian provinces prohibit their use.
Check local, state and provincial laws before
installing studded tires.
Skid and traction capabilities of studded
snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow
tires.

A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove
ice and snow from the windows and wiper
blades.
A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the
jack to give it firm support.
A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.
Extra window washer fluid to refill the
reservoir tank.

.
.
.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING
.

Wet ice (328F, 08C and freezing rain),
very cold snow or ice can be slick
and very hard to drive on. The
vehicle will have much less traction
or “grip” under these conditions. Try
to avoid driving on wet ice until the
road is salted or sanded.

Whatever the condition, drive with
caution. Accelerate and slow down
with care. If accelerating or downshifting too fast, the drive wheels
will lose even more traction.

Tire chains may be used. For details, see “Tire
chains” (P.8-37) of this manual.

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) model
If you install snow tires, they must also be the
same size, brand, construction and tread pattern
on all four wheels.

Starting and driving 5-39

Allow more stopping distance under
these conditions. Braking should be
started sooner than on dry pavement.

To use the engine block heater

Allow greater following distances
on slippery roads.

3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a
grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord.

Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).
These may appear on an otherwise
clear road in shaded areas. If a
patch of ice is seen ahead, brake
before reaching it. Try not to brake
while on the ice, and avoid any
sudden steering maneuvers.

4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault
Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110volt AC (VAC) outlet.

Do not use cruise control on slippery roads.

Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
gases under your vehicle. Keep
snow clear of the exhaust pipe and
from around your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so
equipped)
Engine block heaters are used to assist in cold
temperature starting.
The engine block heater should be used when
the outside temperature is 208F (í78C) or lower.

5-40 Starting and driving

Disconnect and properly store the
engine block heater cord before
starting the engine. Damage to the
cord could result in an electrical
shock and can cause serious injury.

Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged
extension cord rated for at least
10A. Plug the extension cord into a
Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-VAC outlet.
Failure to use the proper extension
cord or a grounded outlet can result
in a fire or electrical shock and
cause serious personal injury.

1. Turn the engine off.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine
block heater cord.

5. The engine block heater must be plugged in
for at least 2 - 4 hours, depending on
outside temperatures, to properly warm the
engine coolant. Use an appropriate timer to
turn the engine block heater on.
6. Before starting the engine, unplug and
properly store the cord to keep it away from
moving parts.

WARNING
.

Do not use your engine block heater
with an ungrounded electrical system or a 2-pronged adapter. You can
be seriously injured by an electrical
shock if you use an ungrounded
connection.

6 In case of emergency
Hazard warning flasher switch ..............................................
Roadside assistance program ...............................................
Emergency engine shut off .....................................................
Flat tire .........................................................................................
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ....................
Changing a flat tire .............................................................

6-2
6-2
6-3
6-3
6-3
6-4

Jump starting ............................................................................. 6-9
Push starting ........................................................................... 6-11
If your vehicle overheats ...................................................... 6-11
Towing your vehicle .............................................................. 6-13
Towing recommended by NISSAN ........................... 6-14
Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) ............... 6-15

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
SWITCH

ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
PROGRAM
to other traffic.
.

Turn signals do not work when the
hazard warning flasher lights are
on.

The flasher can be actuated with the ignition
switch in any position.
Some state laws may prohibit the use of
the hazard warning flasher switch while
driving.

SIC2574

Push the switch on to warn other drivers when
you must stop or park under emergency conditions. All turn signal lights will flash.

WARNING
.

If stopping for an emergency, be
sure to move the vehicle well off the
road.

Do not use the hazard warning
flashers while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances
force you to drive so slowly that
your vehicle might become a hazard

6-2

In case of emergency

In the event of a roadside emergency, Roadside
Assistance Service is available to you. Please
refer to your Warranty Information Booklet (U.S.)
or Warranty & Roadside Assistance Information
Booklet (Canada) for details.

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF

FLAT TIRE

To shut off the engine in an emergency situation
while driving, perform the following procedure:

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire
pressure of all tires except the spare. When
the low tire pressure warning light is lit, and the
CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warning message is displayed in the vehicle information
display, one or more of your tires is significantly
under-inflated. If the vehicle is being driven with
low tire pressure, the TPMS will activate and
warn you of it by the low tire pressure warning
light. This system will activate only when the
vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25
km/h). For more details, see “Warning lights,
indicator lights and audible reminders” (P.2-15)
and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”
(P.5-3).

Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch
3 consecutive times in less than 1.5
seconds, or
Push and hold the push-button ignition
switch for more than 2 seconds.

and increase the likelihood of tire
failure. Serious vehicle damage
could occur and may lead to an
accident and could result in serious
personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire
pressure to the recommended COLD
tire pressure shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label to turn
the low tire pressure warning light
OFF. If you have a flat tire, replace it
with a spare tire as soon as possible.
.

Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could
affect the proper operation of the
TPMS.

WARNING
.

In case of emergency 6-3

and clear of the vehicle.

Do not inject any tire liquid or
aerosol tire sealant into the tires,
as this may cause a malfunction of
the tire pressure sensors.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

WARNING
.

Make sure the parking brake is
securely applied and the Manual
Transmission is shifted into R (Reverse), or the Continuously Variable
Transmission into P (Park).

Never change tires when the vehicle
is on a slope, ice or slippery areas.
This is hazardous.

Never change tires if oncoming
traffic is close to your vehicle. Wait
for professional road assistance.

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions
below.

Stopping the vehicle
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and
away from traffic.
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking
brake.
4. Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) models:
Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
Manual Transmission (MT) models:
Move the shift lever to the R (Reverse)
position.
5. Turn off the engine.
6. Raise the hood to warn other traffic, and to
signal professional road assistance personnel that you need assistance.
7. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle
and stand in a safe place, away from traffic

6-4

In case of emergency

MCE0001A

Blocking wheels

1 at both the front and
Place suitable blocks *
back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat
tire to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is
jacked up.

WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the
vehicle may move and result in personal
injury.

Jacking up the vehicle and removing the
damaged tire

WARNING

JVE0354X
Jacking tools

SCE0947

Getting the spare tire and tools

The spare tire is located under the cargo floor
board.

Open the liftgate. Raise the cargo floor board
1 . Remove jacking tools located behind the
*
spare tire.

2 and remove the spacer
Loosen the clamp *
1 and take out the spare tire.
*

Never get under the vehicle while it
is supported only by the jack. If it is
necessary to work under the vehicle,
support it with safety stands.

Use only the jack provided with your
vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use
the jack provided with your vehicle
on other vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting only your vehicle
during a tire change.

Use the correct jack-up points.
Never use any other part of the
vehicle for jack support.

Never jack up the vehicle more than
necessary.

Never use blocks on or under the
jack.

Do not start or run the engine while
vehicle is on the jack, as it may
cause the vehicle to move. This is
especially true for vehicles with
limited slip differentials.
In case of emergency 6-5

Do not allow passengers to stay in
the vehicle while it is on the jack.

Carefully read the caution label attached
to the jack body and the following instructions.

SCE0948
Jack-up point

1. Place the jack directly under the jack-up
point as illustrated so the top of the jack
contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.
Align the jack head between the two
notches in the front or the rear as shown.
Also fit the groove of the jack head between
the notches as shown.
The jack should be used on level firm
ground.

6-6

In case of emergency

SCE0504

2. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by
turning it counterclockwise with the wheel
nut wrench. Do not remove the wheel
nuts until the tire is off the ground.
3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever
and rod with both hands as shown above.
Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears
the ground. Remove the wheel nuts, and
then remove the tire.

SCE0933

Installing the spare tire
The spare tire is designed for emergency
use. (See specific instructions under the
heading “Wheels and tires” (P.8-28).)
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface
between the wheel and hub.
2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten
the wheel nuts finger tight. Check that all the
wheel nuts contact the wheel surface
horizontally.
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel
nuts alternately and evenly in the sequence
1 , *
2 , *
3 , *
4 , *
5 ), more
illustrated (*
than 2 times, until they are tight.
In case of emergency 6-7

tightened to specifications at each
lubrication interval.
. Adjust tire pressure to the COLD
pressure.

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire
touches the ground. Then, with the wheel
nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely
in the sequence illustrated. Lower the
vehicle completely.

COLD pressure:

WARNING

After the vehicle has been parked for 3
hours or more or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km).

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the
wheel to become loose or come off.
This could cause an accident.

COLD tire pressures are shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label
affixed to the driver side center pillar.

Do not use oil or grease on the
wheel studs or nuts. This could
cause the nuts to become loose.

Retighten the wheel nuts when the
vehicle has been driven for 600
miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a
flat tire, etc.).
.

As soon as possible, tighten the
wheel nuts to the specified torque
with a torque wrench.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
80 ft-lb (108 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened
to specifications at all times. It is
recommended that the wheel nuts be

6-8

In case of emergency

Stowing the damaged tire and the tools
1. Securely store the jack, tools and the
damaged tire in the storage area.
2. Replace the cargo floor box and board.
3. Close the liftgate.

WARNING
.

Always make sure that the spare tire
and jacking equipment are properly
secured after use. Such items can
become dangerous projectiles in an
accident or sudden stop.

The spare tire and small size spare
tire are designed for emergency use.
See specific instructions under the

heading “Wheels and tires” (P.8-28).

JUMP STARTING
To start your engine with a booster battery, the
instructions and precautions below must be
followed.

Whenever working on or near a
battery, always wear suitable eye
protectors (for example, goggles or
industrial safety spectacles) and
remove rings, metal bands, or any
other jewelry. Do not lean over the
battery when jump starting.

Do not attempt to jump start a
frozen battery. It could explode
and cause serious injury.

Your vehicle has an automatic engine cooling fan. It could come on at
any time. Keep hands and other
objects away from it.

WARNING
.

If done incorrectly, jump starting
can lead to a battery explosion,
resulting in severe injury or death.
It could also damage your vehicle.

Explosive hydrogen gas is always
present in the vicinity of the battery.
Keep all sparks and flames away
from the battery.

Do not allow battery fluid to come
into contact with eyes, skin, clothing
or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is
a corrosive sulfuric acid solution
which can cause severe burns. If
the fluid should come into contact
with anything, immediately flush the
contacted area with water.

Keep the battery out of the reach of
children.

The booster battery must be rated at
12 volts. Use of an improperly rated
battery can damage your vehicle.
In case of emergency 6-9

6. Connect jumper cables in the sequence as
1 ? *
2 ? *
3 ? *
4 ).
illustrated (*
If the battery is discharged, the ignition
switch cannot be moved from the OFF
position. Connect the jumper cables to
B before pushing
the booster vehicle *
the ignition switch.

CAUTION
.

Always connect positive (+) to positive (+) and negative (í) to body
ground (for example, as illustrated),
not to the battery.

Make sure the jumper cables do not
touch moving parts in the engine
compartment and that the cable
clamps do not contact any other
metal.

SCE0981

2. Apply the parking brake.

WARNING
Always follow the instructions below.
Failure to do so could result in damage
to the charging system and cause
personal injury.
1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle
B , position the two vehicles (*
A and *
B )
*
to bring their batteries into close proximity to
each other.
Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

6-10 In case of emergency

3. Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) models:
Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
Manual Transmission (MT) models:
Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)
position.
4. Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems
(headlights, heater, air conditioner, etc.).
5. Remove the vent caps on the battery (if so
equipped). Cover the battery with a firmly
wrung out moist cloth to reduce explosion
hazard.

7. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and let it run for a few minutes.

B
*

8. Keep the engine speed of the booster
B at about 2,000 rpm, and start
vehicle *
A being jump
the engine of the vehicle *
started.

PUSH STARTING

IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

Do not attempt to start the engine by pushing.

CAUTION
Do not keep the starter motor engaged
for more than 10 seconds. If the engine
does not start right away, place the
ignition switch in the OFF position and
wait 10 seconds before trying again.
9. After starting your engine, carefully disconnect the negative cable and then the positive
4 ? *
3 ? *
2 ? *
1 ).
cable (*
10. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be
sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover
the vent holes as it may be contaminated
with corrosive acid.

CAUTION
CAUTION
.

Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) models cannot be pushstarted or tow-started. Attempting
to do so may cause transmission
damage.

Three-way catalyst equipped models should not be started by pushing
since the three way catalyst may be
damaged.

Never try to start the vehicle by
towing it; when the engine starts,
the forward surge could cause the
vehicle to collide with the tow
vehicle.

Do not continue to drive if your
vehicle overheats. Doing so could
cause engine damage or a vehicle
fire.

To avoid the danger of being
scalded, never remove the radiator
cap while the engine is still hot.
When the radiator cap is removed,
pressurized hot water will spurt out,
possibly causing serious injury.

Do not open the hood if steam is
coming out.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by the
high temperature warning light (if so equipped)
or an extremely high temperature gauge reading
(if so equipped)), or if you feel a lack of engine
power, detect abnormal noise, etc., take the
following steps:
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road and
apply the parking brake.
2. Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) models:
Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.

In case of emergency 6-11

Manual Transmission (MT) models:
Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)
position.
Do not stop the engine.
3. Turn off the air conditioner (if so equipped).
Open all the windows, move the heater or air
conditioner temperature control to maximum
hot and fan control to high speed.
4. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for
steam or coolant escaping from the radiator
before opening the hood. (If steam or
coolant is escaping, turn off the engine.)
Do not open the hood further until no steam
or coolant can be seen.
5. Open the engine hood.

WARNING
If steam or water is coming from the
engine, stand clear to prevent getting
burned.
6. Visually check the drive belt for damage or
looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is
running. The radiator hoses and radiator
should not leak water. If coolant is leaking or
the cooling fan does not run, stop the
engine.

6-12 In case of emergency

WARNING
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,
jewelry or clothing to come into contact
with, or get caught in, engine belts or
the engine cooling fan. The engine
cooling fan can start at any time.
7. After the engine cools down, check the
coolant level in the reservoir with the engine
running. Add coolant to the reservoir if
necessary. Have your vehicle repaired. It is
recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE
When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in
Canada) and local regulations for towing must
be followed. Incorrect towing equipment could
damage your vehicle. Towing instructions are
available from a NISSAN dealer. Local service
operators are familiar with the applicable laws
and procedures for towing. To assure proper
towing and to prevent accidental damage to
your vehicle, NISSAN recommends that you
have a service operator tow your vehicle. It is
advisable to have the service operator carefully
read the following precautions.

Always attach safety chains before
towing.

For information about towing your vehicle behind
a recreational vehicle (RV), see “Flat towing”
(P.10-18) of this manual.

WARNING
.

Never ride in a vehicle that is being
towed.

Never get under your vehicle after it
has been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION
.

When towing, make sure that the
transmission, axles, steering system
and powertrain are in working condition. If any unit is damaged, dollies must be used.
In case of emergency 6-13

SCE0950
Two-wheel drive models

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY NISSAN
Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models
NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be
towed with the driving (front) wheels off the
ground or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as
illustrated.

CAUTION
.

Never tow CVT models with the front
wheels on the ground or four
wheels on the ground (forward or
backward), as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the

6-14 In case of emergency

transmission. If it is necessary to
tow the vehicle with the rear wheels
raised, always use towing dollies
under the front wheels.
.

When towing CVT models with the
front wheels on towing dollies:
Push the ignition switch to the
ACC or ON position, and secure
the steering wheel in a straightahead position with a rope or similar device. Move the shift lever to
the N (Neutral) position.

When towing a CVT model with the
rear wheels on the ground (if you do
not use towing dollies): Always
release the parking brake.

bers of the vehicle.

SCE0952
All-wheel drive models

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models
NISSAN recommends that towing dollies be
used when towing your vehicle or the vehicle be
placed on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION
Never tow AWD models with any of the
wheels on the ground as this may cause
serious and expensive damage to the
powertrain.

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck
vehicle)

WARNING
To avoid vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death when recovering a
stuck vehicle:
.

Contact a professional towing service to recover the vehicle if you
have any questions regarding the
recovery procedure.
Tow chains or cables must be attached only to main structural mem-

Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to
tow or free a stuck vehicle.

Only use devices specifically designed for vehicle recovery and
follow the manufacturer’s instructions.

Always pull the recovery device
straight out from the front of the
vehicle. Never pull at an angle.

Route recovery devices so they do
not touch any part of the vehicle
except the attachment point.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,
use a tow strap or other device designed
specifically for vehicle recovery. Always follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for the recovery
device.

Rocking a stuck vehicle
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,
use the following procedure:
1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
system.
2. Make sure the area in front and behind the
vehicle is clear of obstructions.
In case of emergency 6-15

3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear
an area around the front tires.
4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and backward.
. Shift back and forth between R (Reverse)
and D (Drive) (Continuously Variable
Transmission models) or 1st and R
(Reverse) (Manual Transmission models).
. Apply the accelerator as little as possible
to maintain the rocking motion.
. Release the accelerator pedal before
shifting between R and D (Continuously
Variable Transmission models) or 1st and
R (Manual Transmission models).
. Do not spin the tires above 35 MPH (55
km/h).
5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few
tries, contact a professional towing service
to remove the vehicle.

6-16 In case of emergency

7 Appearance and care
Cleaning exterior .......................................................................
Washing .................................................................................
Waxing ...................................................................................
Removing spots ...................................................................
Underbody .............................................................................
Glass ......................................................................................
Wheels ...................................................................................
Aluminum alloy wheels .......................................................
Chrome parts .......................................................................
Tire dressing .........................................................................

7-2
7-2
7-3
7-3
7-3
7-3
7-4
7-4
7-4
7-4

Cleaning interior .......................................................................
Air fresheners .....................................................................
Floor mats ...........................................................................
Seat belts ............................................................................
Corrosion protection ................................................................
Most common factors contributing to
vehicle corrosion ...............................................................
Environmental factors influence the rate
of corrosion ........................................................................
To protect your vehicle from corrosion .......................

7-5
7-5
7-5
7-7
7-7
7-7
7-7
7-8

CLEANING EXTERIOR
In order to maintain the appearance of your
vehicle, it is important to take proper care of it.
To protect the paint surfaces, wash your vehicle
as soon as you can:

CAUTION
.

after a rainfall to prevent possible damage
from acid rain
. after driving on coastal roads
. when contaminants such as soot, bird
droppings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs
get on the paint surface
. when dust or mud builds up on the surface
Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle
inside a garage or in a covered area.

Do not use car washes that use acid
in the detergent. Some car washes,
especially brushless ones, use some
acid for cleaning. The acid may react
with some plastic vehicle components, causing them to crack. This
could affect their appearance, and
also could cause them not to function properly. Always check with
your car wash to confirm that acid
is not used.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in a
shady area or protect the vehicle with a body
cover.

Do not wash the vehicle with strong
household soap, strong chemical
detergents, gasoline or solvents.

Be careful not to scratch the paint surface
when putting on or removing the body
cover.

Do not wash the vehicle in direct
sunlight or while the vehicle body is
hot, as the surface may become
water-spotted.

Avoid using tight-napped or rough
cloths, such as washing mitts. Care
must be taken when removing
caked-on dirt or other foreign substances so the paint surface is not
scratched or damaged.

WASHING
Wash dirt off the vehicle with a wet sponge and
plenty of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly
using a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or
general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with
clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.

7-2

Appearance and care

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean
water.
Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,
hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to
the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas
must be regularly cleaned. Make sure that the
drain holes in the lower edge of the door are
open. Spray water under the body and in the
wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away
road salt.
Avoid leaving water spots on the paint surface
by using a damp chamois to dry the vehicle.

JVA0014X

Model with rear spoiler

CAUTION
Do not use an automatic car wash for
model with rear spoiler. The rear spoiler
may be damaged.

WAXING

UNDERBODY

Regular waxing protects the paint surface and
helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing
is recommended to remove built-up wax residue
and to avoid a weathered appearance before
reapplying wax.
A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the
proper product.

In areas where road salt is used in winter, the
underbody must be cleaned regularly. This will
prevent dirt and salt from building up and
causing the acceleration of corrosion on the
underbody and suspension. Before the winter
period and again in the spring, the underseal
must be checked and, if necessary, re-treated.

GLASS

Wax your vehicle only after a thorough
washing. Follow the instructions supplied
with the wax.
. Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,
cutting compounds or cleaners that may
damage the vehicle finish.
Machine compound or aggressive polishing on a
base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the
finish or leave swirl marks.

REMOVING SPOTS
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust,
insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible
from the paint surface to avoid lasting damage
or staining. Special cleaning products are
available at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive
accessory stores.

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust
film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass
to become coated with a film after the vehicle is
parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft
cloth will easily remove this film.

CAUTION
When cleaning the inside of the windows, do not use sharp-edged tools,
abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based
disinfectant cleaners. They could damage the electrical conductors, radio
antenna elements or rear window
defroster elements.

Appearance and care 7-3

WHEELS

CAUTION

Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to
maintain their appearance.
.

Clean the inner side of the wheels when the
wheel is changed or the underside of the
vehicle is washed.
Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or
corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of
pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.
NISSAN recommends that the road wheels
be waxed to protect against road salt in
areas where it is used during winter.

.
.

CAUTION
Do not use abrasive cleaners when
washing the wheels.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS
Wash regularly with a sponge dampened in a
mild soap solution, especially during winter
months in areas where road salt is used. Salt
could discolor the wheels if not removed.

7-4

Appearance and care

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the
following precautions:
.

Follow the directions below to avoid
staining or discoloring the wheels:
.

Do not use a cleaner that uses
strong acid or alkali contents to
clean the wheels.

Do not apply wheel cleaners to the
wheels when they are hot. The
wheel temperature should be the
same as ambient temperature.

Rinse the wheel to completely remove the cleaner within 15 minutes
after the cleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTS
Clean chrome parts regularly with a nonabrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

TIRE DRESSING
NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire
dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to
the tires to help reduce discoloration of the
rubber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it
may react with the coating and form a compound. This compound may come off the tire
while driving and stain the vehicle paint.

Use a water-based tire dressing. The coating on the tire dissolves more easily with an
oil-based tire dressing.
Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help
prevent it from entering the tire tread/
grooves (where it would be difficult to
remove).
Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry
towel. Make sure the tire dressing is
completely removed from the tire tread/
grooves.
Allow the tire dressing to dry as recommended by tire dressing manufacturer.

CLEANING INTERIOR
Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior
trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum
cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and
leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean
with a dry soft cloth.
Regular care and cleaning is required in order to
maintain the appearance of the leather.

Never use benzine, thinner, or any
similar material.

Before using any fabric protector, read the
manufacturer’s recommendations. Some fabric
protectors contain chemicals that may stain or
bleach the seat material.
Use a cloth dampened only with water, to clean
the meter and gauge lens.

WARNING

may damage the lens cover.

CAUTION

Do not spray any liquid such as
water on the meter lens. Spraying
liquid may cause the system to
malfunction.

Small dirt particles can be abrasive
and damaging to the leather surfaces and should be removed
promptly. Do not use saddle soap,
car waxes, polishes, oils, cleaning
fluids, solvents, detergents or ammonia-based cleaners as they may
damage the leather’s natural finish.

Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot
steam cleaners) on the seat. This can
damage the seat or occupant classification sensors. This can also affect the
operation of the air bag system and
result in serious personal injury.
.

Never use fabric protectors unless
recommended by the manufacturer.

Do not use glass or plastic cleaner
on meter or gauge lens covers. It

AIR FRESHENERS
Most air fresheners use a solvent that could
affect the vehicle interior. If you use an air
freshener, take the following precautions:
.

Hanging-type air fresheners can cause
permanent discoloration when they contact
vehicle interior surfaces. Place the air
freshener in a location that allows it to hang
free and not contact an interior surface.
. Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on
the vents. These products can cause
immediate damage and discoloration when
spilled on interior surfaces.
Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s
instructions before using air fresheners.

FLOOR MATS

WARNING
To avoid potential pedal interference
that may result in a collision, injury or
death:
.

NEVER place a floor mat on top of
another floor mat in the driver front
position or install them upside
down or backwards.
Appearance and care 7-5

It is recommended that you use only
genuine NISSAN floor mats specifically designed for use in your vehicle model and model year.

Properly position the mats in the
floorwell using the floor mat positioning hooks. See “Floor mat installation” (P.7-6).

Make sure the floor mat does not
interfere with pedal operation.

Periodically check the floor mats to
make sure they are properly installed.

After cleaning the vehicle interior,
check the floor mats to make sure
they are properly installed.

The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can
extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it
easier to clean the interior. Mats should be
maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if
they become excessively worn.

3. Make sure the floor mat does not interfere
with pedal operation. With the ignition in the
OFF position and the shift lever in the P
(Park) position (Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) models) or the shift lever in
the N (Neutral) position (Manual Transmission (MT) models), fully apply and release all
pedals. The floor mat must not interfere with
pedal operation or prevent the pedal from
returning to its normal position. It is recommended you see a NISSAN dealer for
details about installing the floor mats in your
vehicle.
SAI0050

Floor mat installation
Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat positioning hook(s). The number and shape of the floor
mat positioning hook(s) for each seating position
varies depending on the vehicle.
When installing genuine NISSAN floor mats,
follow the installation instructions provided with
the floor mat and the following:
1. Position the floor mat in the floorwell so that
the floor mat grommet holes are aligned with
the hook(s).
2. Secure the grommet holes into the hook(s)
and ensure that the floor mat is properly
positioned.

7-6

Appearance and care

CORROSION PROTECTION
belts, since these materials may severely weaken the seat belt webbing.

MOST COMMON FACTORS CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE CORROSION
.
.

The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt
and debris in body panel sections, cavities,
and other areas.
Damage to paint and other protective coatings caused by gravel and stone chips or
minor traffic accidents.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLUENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION
Moisture
JVA0024X
Positioning hook(s)

The illustration shows the location of the floor
mat positioning hook(s).

SEAT BELTS
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them
with a sponge dampened in a mild soap
solution. Allow the belts to dry completely in
the shade before using them.
See “Seat belts” (P.1-10).

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the
vehicle body underside can accelerate corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry completely
inside the vehicle, and should be removed for
drying to avoid floor panel corrosion.

Relative humidity
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high
relative humidity, especially those areas where
the temperatures stay above freezing where
atmospheric pollution exists, or where road salt
is used.

WARNING
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in
the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye, or
chemical solvents to clean the seat
Appearance and care 7-7

Temperature

Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner.

A temperature increase will accelerate the rate
of corrosion to those parts which are not well
ventilated.

Air pollution
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air
in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use will
accelerate the corrosion process. Road salt will
also accelerate the disintegration of paint
surfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM
CORROSION
.

Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the
vehicle clean.
Always check for minor damage to the paint
and repair it as soon as possible.
Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors
open to avoid water accumulation.
Check the underbody for accumulation of
sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water
as soon as possible.

.
.
.

CAUTION
.

7-8

NEVER remove dirt, sand or other
debris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose.
Appearance and care

Never allow water or other liquids to
come in contact with electronic
components inside the vehicle as
this may damage them.

Chemicals used for road surface deicing are
extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion
and deterioration of underbody components
such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake
lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders.
In winter, the underbody must be cleaned
periodically.
For additional protection against rust and
corrosion, which may be required in some areas,
it is recommended you consult a NISSAN
dealer.

8 Do-it-yourself
Maintenance precautions ........................................................ 8-2
Engine compartment check locations .................................. 8-3
MR16DDT engine ............................................................... 8-3
Engine cooling system ............................................................. 8-4
Checking engine coolant level ......................................... 8-5
Changing engine coolant .................................................. 8-5
Engine oil .................................................................................... 8-5
Checking engine oil level .................................................. 8-5
Changing engine oil and filter .......................................... 8-6
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid ............... 8-8
For NISMO RS models ..................................................... 8-8
Except for NISMO RS models ........................................ 8-8
Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid ............................... 8-9
Window washer fluid ............................................................... 8-9
Battery ....................................................................................... 8-10
Jump starting ..................................................................... 8-12
Variable voltage control system .......................................... 8-12
Drive belt .................................................................................. 8-12
Spark plugs ............................................................................. 8-13
Replacing spark plugs .................................................... 8-13
Air cleaner ................................................................................ 8-14

Windshield wiper blades .....................................................
Cleaning ...........................................................................
Replacing .........................................................................
Rear window wiper blade ...................................................
Brakes ......................................................................................
Self-adjusting brakes ....................................................
Brake pad wear warning ..............................................
Fuses ........................................................................................
Engine compartment .....................................................
Passenger compartment ..............................................
Intelligent Key battery replacement ...................................
Lights ........................................................................................
Headlights ........................................................................
Exterior and interior lights ............................................
Wheels and tires ...................................................................
Tire pressure ...................................................................
Tire labeling .....................................................................
Types of tires ...................................................................
Tire chains .......................................................................
Changing wheels and tires ..........................................

8-15
8-15
8-15
8-16
8-16
8-16
8-16
8-17
8-17
8-19
8-20
8-23
8-23
8-26
8-28
8-28
8-34
8-36
8-37
8-38

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle, always take care
to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or
damage to the vehicle. The following are general
precautions which should be closely observed.

WARNING
.

Park the vehicle on a level surface,
apply the parking brake securely
and block the wheels to prevent
the vehicle from moving. Move the
shift lever to the P (Park) position
(CVT model) or the shift lever to the
N (Neutral) position (MT model).

Be sure the ignition switch is in the
OFF or LOCK position when performing any parts replacement or
repairs.

If you must work with the engine
running, keep your hands, clothing,
hair and tools away from moving
fans, belts and any other moving
parts.

8-2

It is advisable to secure or remove
any loose clothing and remove any
jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc.
before working on your vehicle.
Do-it-yourself

Always wear eye protection whenever you work on your vehicle.

If you must run the engine in an
enclosed space such as a garage, be
sure there is proper ventilation for
exhaust gases to escape.

Never get under the vehicle while it
is supported only by a jack. If it is
necessary to work under the vehicle,
support it with safety stands.

Keep smoking materials, flame and
sparks away from fuel tank and the
battery.

Because the fuel lines are under
high pressure even when the engine
is off, it is recommended you visit a
NISSAN dealer for service of the
fuel filter or fuel lines.

CAUTION
.

Do not work under the hood while
the engine is hot. Turn the engine
off and wait until it cools down.
Avoid direct contact with used engine oil and coolant. Improperly
disposed engine oil, and engine

coolant and/or other vehicle fluids
can damage the environment. Always conform to local regulations
for disposal of vehicle fluid.
.

Never leave the engine or the CVT
related component harnesses disconnected while the ignition switch
is in the ON position.

Never connect or disconnect the
battery or any transistorized component while the ignition switch is
in the ON position.

Your vehicle is equipped with an
automatic engine cooling fan. It may
come on at any time without warning, even if the ignition key is in the
OFF position and the engine is not
running. To avoid injury, always
disconnect the negative battery
cable before working near the fan.

This “8. Do-it-yourself” section gives instructions regarding only those items which are
relatively easy for an owner to perform.
A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is also
available. (See “Owner’s manual/service manual
order information” (P.10-22).)
You should be aware that incomplete or

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
improper servicing may result in operating
difficulties or excessive emissions, and could
affect your warranty coverage. If in doubt
about any servicing, it is recommended
you have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

JVC0747X

MR16DDT ENGINE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Engine oil filler cap
Radiator filler cap
Brake and clutch* fluid reservoir
Air cleaner
Window washer fluid reservoir
Engine drive belt location

7.
8.
9.
10.
*:

Engine oil dipstick
Engine coolant reservoir
Fuse/fusible link holder
Battery
for Manual Transmission (MT) models

Do-it-yourself 8-3

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
The engine cooling system is filled at the factory
with a pre-diluted mixture of 50% Genuine
NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and
50% water to provide year-round anti-freeze
and coolant protection. The anti-freeze solution
contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional
engine cooling system additives are not necessary.

CAUTION
.

Never use any cooling system additives such as radiator sealer. Additives may clog the cooling system
and cause damage to the engine,
transmission and/or cooling system.

When adding or replacing coolant,
be sure to use only Genuine
NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent. Genuine
NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-diluted to provide
antifreeze protection to -348F
(-378C). If additional freeze protection is needed due to weather where
you operate your vehicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/
Coolant (blue) concentrate following the directions on the container.
If an equivalent coolant other than
Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is used, fol-

WARNING
.

Never remove the radiator or coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
hot. Wait until the engine and
radiator cool down. Serious burns
could be caused by high pressure
fluid escaping from the radiator.
See precautions in “If your vehicle
overheats” (P.6-11) of this manual.

The radiator is equipped with a
pressure type radiator cap. To prevent engine damage, use only a
genuine NISSAN radiator cap.

If the engine was stopped soon
when the engine is hot, the cooling
fan may operate for approximately
10 minutes after the engine was
stopped to cool the components in
the engine compartment. When the

8-4

Do-it-yourself

low the coolant manufacture’s
instructions to maintain minimum
antifreeze protection to -348F
(-378C). The use of other types of
coolant solutions other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/
Coolant (blue) or equivalent may
damage the engine cooling system.

cooling fan is operating, be sure
that hands or other items do not get
caught in it.

The life expectancy of the factory-fill
coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000
km) or 7 years. Mixing any other
type of coolant other than Genuine
NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) , including Genuine
NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use of nondistilled water will reduce the life
expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. Refer to the “9. Maintenance
and schedules” section of this manual for more details.

ENGINE OIL
service.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT
It is recommended that major cooling system
repairs be performed by a NISSAN dealer. The
service procedures can be found in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual.
Improper servicing can result in reduced
heater performance and engine overheating.

WARNING
SDI2641

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL
Check the coolant level in the reservoir when
the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below
2 , open the reservoir cap and
the MIN level *
1 . If the
add coolant up to the MAX level *
reservoir is empty, check the coolant level in the
radiator when the engine is cold. If there is
insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator
with coolant up to the filler opening and also add
1 .
it to the reservoir up to the MAX level *
Tighten the cap securely after adding engine
coolant.
If the cooling system frequently requires
coolant, have it checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

SDI1993

To avoid the danger of being
scalded, never change the coolant
when the engine is hot.

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

Never remove the radiator cap when
the engine is hot. Serious burns
could be caused by high pressure
fluid escaping from the radiator.

2. Run the engine until it reaches operating
temperature.

Avoid direct skin contact with used
coolant. If skin contact is made,
wash thoroughly with soap or hand
cleaner as soon as possible.
Keep coolant out of reach of children and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.
Check your local regulations.

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10
minutes for the oil to drain back into
the oil pan.
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.
Reinsert it all the way.
5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil
C . If the
level. It should be within the range *
A , remove the oil filler
oil level is below *
cap and pour recommended oil through the
Do-it-yourself 8-5

opening. Do not overfill

B .
*

CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND FILTER

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

Vehicle set-up

It is normal to add some oil between oil
maintenance intervals or during the breakin period, depending on the severity of
operating conditions.

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.

CAUTION
Oil level should be checked regularly.
Operating the engine with an insufficient amount of oil can damage the
engine, and such damage is not covered by the warranty.

2. Run the engine until it reaches the operating
temperature.
3. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10
minutes.
4. Raise and support the vehicle using a
suitable floor jack and safety jack stands.
. Place the safety jack stands under the
vehicle jack-up points.
. A suitable adapter should be attached to
the jack stand saddle.

SDI2652
For NISMO RS models

CAUTION
Make sure the correct lifting and support points are used to avoid vehicle
damage.

JVM0518X
Except for NISMO RS models

8-6

Do-it-yourself

Waste oil must be disposed of
properly.
. Check your local regulations.
(Perform steps 4 to 7 only when the engine
oil filter change is needed.)
4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench.
Remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.
5. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surface
with a clean rag.

CAUTION
SDI2651

1.
2.
3.

Oil filler cap
Oil drain plug
Oil filter

Engine oil and filter
1. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug.
2. Remove the oil filler cap.
3. Remove the drain plug with a wrench and
completely drain the oil.

CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself, as the
engine oil is hot.

Be sure to remove any old gasket
material remaining on the mounting
surface of the engine. Failure to do so
could lead to engine damage.
6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean
engine oil.
7. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until a slight
resistance is felt, then tighten additionally
more than 2/3 turn.
Oil filter tightening torque:
11 to 15 ft-lb
(14.7 to 20.5 N·m)

Drain plug tightening torque:
22 to 29 ft-lb
(29 to 39 N·m)
Do not use excessive force.
9. Refill the engine with the recommended oil
through the oil filler opening, and install the
oil filler cap securely.
See “Capacities and recommended fluids/
lubricants” (P.10-2) for drain and refill
capacity. The drain and refill capacity
depends on the oil temperature and drain
time. Use these specifications for reference
only. Always use the dipstick to determine
the proper amount of oil in the engine.
10. Start the engine and check for leakage
around the drain plug and the oil filter.
Correct as required.
11. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10
minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick.
Add engine oil if necessary.

After the operation
1. Lower the vehicle carefully to the ground.
2. Dispose of waste oil and filter properly.

8. Clean and re-install the drain plug with a
new washer. Securely tighten the drain plug
with a wrench.
Do-it-yourself 8-7

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID

WARNING
.

When checking or replacement is required, we
recommend a NISSAN dealer for servicing.

FOR NISMO RS MODELS
Prolonged and repeated contact
with used engine oil may cause skin
cancer.

CAUTION

Try to avoid direct skin contact with
used oil. If skin contact is made,
wash thoroughly with soap or hand
cleaner as soon as possible.

Keep used engine oil out of reach of
children.

8-8

EXCEPT FOR NISMO RS MODELS

Do-it-yourself

NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 (or
equivalent) ONLY in NISSAN CVTs.
Do not mix with other fluids.
Do not use Automatic transmission
fluid (ATF) or Manual transmission
fluid in a NISSAN CVT, as it may
damage the CVT. Damage caused by
the use of fluids other than as
recommended is not covered by
the NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Using fluids that are not equivalent
to Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2
may also damage the CVT. Damage
caused by the use of fluids other
than as recommended is not covered by the NISSAN’s New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.

CAUTION
.

NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or
equivalent) ONLY in NISSAN CVTs.
Do not mix with other fluids.

Do not use Automatic transmission
fluid (ATF) or Manual transmission
fluid in a NISSAN CVT, as it may
damage the CVT. Damage caused by
the use of fluids other than as
recommended is not covered by
the NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.

Using fluids that are not equivalent
to Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3
may also damage the CVT. Damage
caused by the use of fluids other
than as recommended is not covered by the NISSAN’s New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.

BRAKE AND CLUTCH (if so
equipped) FLUID

WINDOW WASHER FLUID

For additional brake and clutch fluid information,
see “Capacities and recommended fluids/lubricants” (P.10-2) of this manual.

WARNING
.

Use only new fluid from a sealed
container. Old, inferior or contaminated fluid may damage the brake
and clutch systems. The use of
improper fluids can damage the
brake and clutch systems, and affect
the vehicle’s stopping ability.

Clean the filler cap before removing.

Brake and clutch fluid is poisonous
and should be stored carefully in
marked containers out of the reach
of children.

CAUTION
Do not spill the fluid on any painted
surfaces. This will damage the paint. If
fluid is spilled, immediately wash the
surface with water.

SDI2655

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid is
2 or the brake warning
below the MIN line *
light comes on, add Genuine NISSAN Super
Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3
1 . If fluid must be
fluid up to the MAX line *
added frequently, the system should be
checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

SDI2429

To fill the window washer fluid reservoir, lift the
cap and pour the window washer fluid into the
reservoir opening.
Add a washer solvent to the washer for better
cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield
washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s
instructions for the mixture ratio.
Fill the window washer fluid reservoir periodically.
Add fluid when the low washer fluid warning
light illuminates (if so equipped).

Do-it-yourself 8-9

BATTERY
To check the fluid level, use your finger to plug
1 of the cap/tube assembly,
the center hole *
then remove it from the reservoir. If there is no
fluid in the tube, add fluid.
Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving
conditions require an increased amount of
window washer fluid.

reservoir tank. Do not use the
window washer reservoir tank to
mix the washer fluid concentrate
and water.

Keep the battery surface clean and dry.
Clean the battery with a solution of baking
soda and water.
Make certain the terminal connections are
clean and securely tightened.
If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or
longer, disconnect the negative 7 battery
terminal cable to prevent discharging it.

.
.

Recommended fluid:
Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent

CAUTION
.

Do not substitute engine anti-freeze
coolant for window washer solution.
This may result in damage to the
paint.

Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates
with water to the manufacturer’s
recommended levels before pouring
the fluid into the window washer

8-10 Do-it-yourself

NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery discharge
and potential no-start conditions such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery
power when the engine is not running
(Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players,
etc.)
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or
only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to be
charged to maintain battery health.

WARNING
.

Do not expose the battery to flames
or electrical sparks. Hydrogen gas
generated by the battery is explosive. Do not allow battery fluid to

contact your skin, eyes, fabrics or
painted surfaces. After touching a
battery or battery cap, do not touch
or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash
your hands. If the acid contacts your
eyes, skin or clothing, immediately
flush with water for at least 15
minutes and seek medical attention.
.

Do not operate the vehicle if the
fluid in the battery is low. Low
battery fluid can cause a higher load
on the battery which can generate
heat, reduce battery life, and in
some cases lead to an explosion.
When working on or near a battery,
always wear suitable eye protection
and remove all jewelry.

Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be
1 and LOWER
between the UPPER LEVEL *
2 lines.
LEVEL *

Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash hands after
handling.

If it is necessary to add fluid, add only distilled
water to bring the level to the indicator in each
filler opening. Do not overfill.

Keep the battery out of the reach of
children.

SDI1480C

DI0137MA

1. Remove the cell plugs

A .
*

2. Add distilled water up to the UPPER LEVEL
1 line.
*
If the side of the battery is not clear, check
the distilled water level by looking directly
1 indicates
above the cell; the condition *
2 needs more to be
OK and the condition *
added.
3. Tighten cell plugs

A .
*

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under
severe conditions require frequent checks of the
battery fluid level.

Do-it-yourself 8-11

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL
SYSTEM

DRIVE BELT

JUMP STARTING
If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting”
(P.6-9). If the engine does not start by jump
starting, the battery may have to be replaced. It
is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

CAUTION
.

Do not ground accessories directly
to the battery terminal. Doing so will
bypass the variable voltage control
system and the vehicle battery may
not charge completely.

Use electrical accessories with the
engine running to avoid discharging
the vehicle battery.

The variable voltage control system measures
the amount of electrical discharge from the
battery and controls voltage generated by the
generator.

SDI1881

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Alternator
Drive belt auto-tensioner
Crankshaft pulley
Air conditioner compressor
Water pump

WARNING
Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF
or LOCK position before servicing drive
belts. The engine could rotate unexpectedly.
1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual
wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt is

8-12 Do-it-yourself

SPARK PLUGS
in poor condition or loose, have it replaced
or adjusted. It is recommended you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
2. Have the belt condition checked regularly.

WARNING
Be sure the engine and ignition switch
are off and that the parking brake is
engaged securely.

CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct socket to
remove the spark plugs. An incorrect
socket can damage the spark plugs.

SDI2670

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS
If replacement is required, it is recommended
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Iridium platinum-tipped spark plugs
It is not necessary to replace the iridium
platinum-tipped spark plugs as frequently as
the conventional type spark plugs since they will
last much longer. Follow the maintenance
schedule shown in the “9. Maintenance and
schedules” section. Do not reuse the iridium
platinum-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or
regapping.
Always replace spark plugs with recommended or equivalent ones.
Do-it-yourself 8-13

AIR CLEANER
not only cleans the air, it stops
flame if the engine backfires. If it
is not there, and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not
drive with the air cleaner removed,
and be careful when working on the
engine with the air cleaner removed.
.

SDI2667
1 upward
To remove the filter, pull the air duct *
2 , then pull the
to remove it. Pull the tabs *
3 upward.
cover *

The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and
reused. Replace it according to the maintenance
schedule shown in the “9. Maintenance and
schedules” section. When replacing the filter,
wipe the inside of the air cleaner housing and
the cover with a damp cloth.

WARNING
.

Operating the engine with the air
cleaner removed can cause you or
others to be burned. The air cleaner

8-14 Do-it-yourself

Never pour fuel into the throttle
body or attempt to start the engine
with the air cleaner removed. Doing
so could result in serious injury.

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
CLEANING
If your windshield is not clear after using the
windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters
when running, wax or other material may be on
the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a
washer solution or a mild detergent. Your
windshield is clean if beads do not form when
rinsing with clear water.
Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth
soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent.
Then rinse the blade with clear water. If your
windshield is still not clear after cleaning the
blades and using the wiper, replace the blades.

CAUTION
Worn windshield wiper blades can
damage the windshield and impair
driver vision.

SDI1803

REPLACING
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.
Before replacing the wiper blades, the wiper
should be in the fully up position to avoid
scratching the engine hood or damaging the
wiper arm. To pull up the wiper arm, see “Wiper
and washer switch” (P.2-36).

4. Rotate the wiper blade so that the dimple is
in the groove.

CAUTION
.

After wiper blade replacement, return the wiper arm to its original
position; otherwise it may be damaged when the hood is opened.

Make sure the wiper blades contact
the glass; otherwise the arm may be
damaged from wind pressure.

1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.
A , and
2. Push and hold the release tab *
move the wiper blade down the wiper arm
1 .
*

3. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper
arm until a click sounds.

Do-it-yourself 8-15

REAR WINDOW WIPER BLADE

BRAKES

It is recommended you contact a NISSAN dealer
if checking or replacement is required.

If the brakes do not operate properly, it is
recommended you have the brakes checked by
a NISSAN dealer.

SELF-ADJUSTING BRAKES
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting
brakes.
The disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the
brake pedal is applied.

WARNING
Have your brake system checked if the
brake pedal height does not return to
normal. It is recommended you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.

BRAKE PAD WEAR WARNING

SDI2693
A .
Be careful not to clog the washer nozzle *
This may cause improper windshield washer
operation. If the nozzle is clogged, remove any
B . Be
objects with a needle or small pin *
careful not to damage the nozzle.

8-16 Do-it-yourself

The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it
will make a high pitched scraping sound when
the vehicle is in motion. This scraping sound will
first occur only when the brake pedal is
depressed. After more wear of the brake pad,
the sound will always be heard even if the brake
pedal is not depressed. Have the brakes
checked as soon as possible if the wear warning
sound is heard.

FUSES
2. Open the engine hood.

Under some driving or climate conditions,
occasional brake squeak, squeal or other noise
may be heard. Occasional brake noise during
light to moderate stops is normal and does not
affect the function or performance of the brake
system.

3. Remove the fuse/fusible link holder cover by
1
pushing the tab *
and lifting the cover
2 , then the left side
from the right side *
3 .
*
4. Locate the fuse that needs to be replaced.

Proper brake inspection intervals should
be followed. For additional information, see the
maintenance schedule shown in the “9. Maintenance and schedules” section.

5. Remove the fuse using the fuse puller
located in the passenger compartment fuse
box.

JVM0620X

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

WARNING
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
amperage rating than that specified on
the fuse box cover. This could damage
the electrical system or electronic control units or cause a fire.
If any electrical equipment does not operate,
check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight
switch are turned off.
Do-it-yourself 8-17

SDI1754
A , replace it with a new
6. If the fuse is open *
B .
fuse *

7. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical
system checked and repaired. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
4 also contains the fuses. It is
The holder *
recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for
checking and/or replacing.

8-18 Do-it-yourself

JVM0621X

Fusible links
If any electrical equipment does not operate and
the fuses are in good condition, check the
1 and *
2 . If any of
fusible links in the holders *
these fusible links are melted, replace only with
genuine NISSAN parts.
For checking and replacing the fusible links in
2 , it is recommended you visit a
the holders *
NISSAN dealer.

JVM0622X

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

2. Remove the fuse box cover

1 .
*

3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller

WARNING
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
amperage rating than that specified on
the fuse box cover. This could damage
the electrical system or electronic control units or cause a fire.

2 .
*

SDI1754
A , replace it with a new
4. If the fuse is open *
B .
fuse *

5. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical
system checked and repaired. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.

If any electrical equipment does not operate,
check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight
switch are turned off.
Do-it-yourself 8-19

INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY
REPLACEMENT
NOTE:
If the extended storage fuse switch malfunctions or if the fuse is open, it is not
necessary to replace the switch. In this
case, remove the extended storage fuse
switch and replace it with a new fuse of the
same rating.
How to remove the extended storage fuse
switch:
1. To remove the extended storage fuse switch,
be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or
LOCK position.
SDI2705

Extended storage fuse switch (if so
equipped)
To reduce battery drain, the extended storage
fuse switch comes from the factory switched off.
Prior to delivery of your vehicle, the switch is
pushed in (switched on) and should always
remain on.
If the extended storage fuse switch is not
pushed in (switched on), the meter may display
a warning message. See “Extended storage fuse
warning message” (P.2-9).
If any electrical equipment does not operate,
remove the extended storage fuse switch and
check for an open fuse.

8-20 Do-it-yourself

2. Be sure the headlight switch is in the OFF
position.
3. Remove the fuse box cover.
4. Pinch the storage fuse switch and pull it in
the direction illustrated.

CAUTION
Be careful not to allow children to
swallow the battery and removed parts.

the casing.
3. Replace the battery with a new one.
Recommended battery:
CR2025 or equivalent
Do not touch the internal circuit and
electric terminals as doing so could
cause a malfunction.
. Hold the battery by the edges. Holding
the battery across the contact points will
seriously deplete the storage capacity.
. Make sure that the + side faces the
bottom of the case.
.

SDI2452

4. Align the tips of the upper and lower parts
1 , and then push them together *
2 until it
*
is securely closed.
5. Operate the buttons to check its operation.

SDI2451

If you need any assistance for replacement, it is
recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.

Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as
follows:

FCC Notice:

1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key.

2. Insert a small screwdriver into the slit of the
corner and twist it to separate the upper part
from the lower part. Use a cloth to protect

For USA:

Do-it-yourself 8-21

ence received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation
of the device.

8-22 Do-it-yourself

LIGHTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.

Map light
Front fog light (if so equipped)
Headlight (high-beam/low-beam)
Front parking light
Front turn signal light/Front side marker light
Side turn signal light
Daytime running light (NISMO models)
High-mounted stop light
Reverse light
Rear turn signal light
Stop/tail light
License plate light
Cargo light
Tail light (LED)

HEADLIGHTS
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the
exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A
temperature difference between the inside and
the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is
not a malfunction. If large drops of water collect
inside the lens, it is recommended you visit a
NISSAN dealer for servicing.

JVM0505X

Do-it-yourself 8-23

Replacing

affect bulb performance.

Xenon headlight model:
If replacement is required, it is recommended
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING

High pressure halogen gas is sealed
inside the halogen bulb. The bulb
may break if the glass envelope is
scratched or the bulb is dropped.

Only touch the base when handling
the bulb. Never touch the glass
envelope. Touching the glass envelope could significantly affect bulb
life and/or headlight performance.

Aiming is not necessary after replacing the bulb. When aiming adjustment is necessary, it is
recommended you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

HIGH VOLTAGE
When xenon headlights are on, they
produce a high voltage. To prevent an
electric shock, never attempt to modify
or disassemble. It is recommended to
have your xenon headlights replaced at
a NISSAN dealer. For additional information, see “Headlight and turn signal
switch” (P.2-39).

Use the same number and wattage as originally
installed as shown in the chart.

Halogen headlight model:
The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which
uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb.

CAUTION
.

Do not leave the bulb out of the
headlight reflector for a long period
of time. Dust, moisture, smoke, etc.
entering the headlight body may

8-24 Do-it-yourself

JVM0488X

Left side of the vehicle

Right side of the vehicle

Disconnect the battery negative cable before
replacing bulbs.

A .
*
B of the air
Pull up part *
C sideways.
move part *
D .
Remove the air duct *
E .
Remove back cover *
F .
Disconnect connector *

1. Remove clip
2.
3.
4.
5.

6. Turn and pull out socket
remove the bulb.

1. Remove clip

A .
*

B .
*
C .
*
D .
Disconnect connector *

2. Remove washer inlet

duct, and then

3. Remove back cover
4.

5. Turn and pull out socket
remove the bulb.
G ,
*

E ,
*

and then

JVM0489X

Do-it-yourself 8-25

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS
Item

Wattage (W)

Bulb No.

Headlight high/low beams (Xenon)*
Headlight high/low beams (Halogen)
Front turn signal light*
Front parking light*
Front side marker light*
Front fog light (if so equipped)*
Side turn signal light*
Daytime running light (for NISMO models)*
Rear combination light*

60/35
60/55
21
LED
5
55
LED
LED

HB3/D2S
HB3/H11
WY21W
W5W
H11
-

turn signal light
stop/tail light
tail light (LED)
back-up
License plate light*
Map light
High-mounted stop light*
Cargo light
Glove box light*

21
21/5
LED
16
5
5
LED
5
1.4

WY21W
W21/5W
—
W16W
W5W
—
—
—
—

*:
It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for replacement.
NOTE: Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest information about parts.

8-26 Do-it-yourself

SDI2391
Map light

SDI2306

SDI2653
Cargo light

:
:

REMOVE
INSTALL

Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C, D or E.
When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens
and/or cover.
Do-it-yourself 8-27

WHEELS AND TIRES
If you have a flat tire, see “Flat tire” (P.6-3).

TIRE PRESSURE
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire
pressure of all tires except the spare. When
the low tire pressure warning light is lit, and the
CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warning message is displayed in the vehicle information
display, one or more of your tires is significantly
under-inflated.
The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h).
Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop
in tire pressure (for example a flat tire while
driving).
For more details, see “Low tire pressure warning
light” (P.2-18), “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P.5-3) and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P.6-3).

Tire inflation pressure
Check the pressure of the tires (including
the spare) often and always prior to long
distance trips. The recommended tire
pressure specifications are shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label under
8-28 Do-it-yourself

the “Cold Tire Pressure” heading. The
Tire and Loading Information label is
affixed to the driver side center pillar.
Tire pressures should be checked regularly because:
. Most tires naturally lose air over time.
. Tires can lose air suddenly when
driven over potholes or other objects
or if the vehicle strikes a curb while
parking.
The tire pressures should be checked
when the tires are cold. The tires are
considered COLD after the vehicle has
been parked for 3 or more hours, or
driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at
moderate speeds.
Incorrect tire pressure, including
under inflation, may adversely affect
tire life and vehicle handling.

WARNING
.

Improperly inflated tires can
fail suddenly and cause an
accident.

The Gross Vehicle Weight rating (GVWR) is located on the F.
M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The vehicle weight
capacity is indicated on the
Tire and Loading Information
label. Do not load your vehicle
beyond this capacity. Overloading your vehicle may result in reduced tire life, unsafe
operating conditions due to
premature tire failure, or unfavorable handling characteristics and could also lead to a
serious accident. Loading beyond the specified capacity
may also result in failure of
other vehicle components.
. Before taking a long trip, or
whenever you heavily load
your vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge to ensure that the
tire pressures are at the specified level.

For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty
Information Booklet.

Do-it-yourself 8-29

after the vehicle has been parked for
3 or more hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds.
The recommended cold tire inflation
is set by the manufacturer to provide
the best balance of tire wear, vehicle
handling, driveability, tire noise, etc.,
up to the vehicle’s GVWR.
5
* Tire size — see “Tire labeling” (P.834).
6 Spare tire size or compact spare tire
*
size (if so equipped)

SDI2503

Tire and Loading Information label
1 Seating capacity: The maximum
*
number of occupants that can be
seated in the vehicle.
2 Vehicle load limit: See “Vehicle
*
loading information” (P.10-15).
8-30 Do-it-yourself

3
*

Original size: The size of the tires
originally installed on the vehicle at
the factory.
4
* Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to
this pressure when the tires are
cold. Tires are considered COLD

4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge

SDI1949

Checking the tire pressure
1. Remove the valve stem cap from the
tire.
2. Press the pressure gauge squarely
onto the valve stem. Do not press too
hard or force the valve stem sideways, or air will escape. If the hissing
sound of air escaping from the tire is
heard while checking the pressure,
reposition the gauge to eliminate this
leakage.
3. Remove the gauge.

stem and compare it to the specification shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too
much air is added, press the core of
the valve stem briefly with the tip of
the gauge stem to release pressure.
Recheck the pressure and add or
release air as needed.
6. Install the valve stem cap.
7. Check the pressure of all other tires,
including the spare.

Do-it-yourself 8-31

Except for NISMO and NISMO RS models:

SIZE

COLD TIRE INFLATION
PRESSURE

P215/55R17 93V

230 kPa, 33 PSI (2WD
MT models)
250 kPa, 36 PSI (2WD
CVT models)
240 kPa, 35 PSI (AWD
models)

REAR ORIGINAL TIRE P215/55R17 93V

230 kPa, 33 PSI (2WD
MT models)
250 kPa, 36 PSI (2WD
CVT models)
240 kPa, 35 PSI (AWD
models)

FRONT ORIGINAL
TIRE

SPARE TIRE

8-32 Do-it-yourself

T135/80D16 101M (2WD
models)
T135/90D16 102M (AWD
models)

420 kPa, 60 PSI

For NISMO models:

SIZE

COLD TIRE INFLATION
PRESSURE

225/45R18 95Y

230 kPa, 33 PSI (2WD
MT models)
240 kPa, 35 PSI (AWD
models)

REAR ORIGINAL TIRE 225/45R18 95Y

230 kPa, 33 PSI (2WD
MT models)
240 kPa, 35 PSI (AWD
models)

FRONT ORIGINAL
TIRE

SPARE TIRE

T135/80D16 101M (2WD
models)
T135/90D16 102M (AWD
models)

420 kPa, 60 PSI

Do-it-yourself 8-33

For NISMO RS models:

SIZE

COLD TIRE INFLATION
PRESSURE

225/45R18 95Y

230 kPa, 33 PSI (2WD
MT models)
240 kPa, 35 PSI (AWD
models)

REAR ORIGINAL TIRE 225/45R18 95Y

230 kPa, 33 PSI (2WD
MT models)
240 kPa, 35 PSI (AWD
models)

FRONT ORIGINAL
TIRE

SPARE TIRE

8-34 Do-it-yourself

T135/70D17 92M

420 kPa, 60 PSI

SDI1575
Example

TIRE LABELING
Federal law requires tire manufacturers
to place standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This information
identifies and describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides the tire identification number
(TIN) for safety standard certification.
The TIN can be used to identify the tire
in case of a recall.

SDI1606
Example

1
Tire size (example: P215/60R16
*
94H)
1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is
designed for passenger vehicles.
(Not all tires have this information.)
2. Three-digit number (215): This number gives the width in millimeters of
the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall
edge.
3. Two-digit number (60): This number,
known as the aspect ratio, gives the
tire’s ratio of height to width.

4. R: The “R” stands for radial.
5. Two-digit number (16): This number
is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.
6. Two- or three-digit number (94): This
number is the tire’s load index. It is a
measurement of how much weight
each tire can support. You may not
find this information on all tires
because it is not required by law.
7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not
drive the vehicle faster than the tire
speed rating.

JVM0694X
Example

2
*

TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a
new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX
XXXX)
1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Department of Transportation”. The symbol
can be placed above, below or to the
left or right of the Tire Identification
Number.
2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s identification mark
3. Two-digit code: Tire size
Do-it-yourself 8-35

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code
(Optional)
5. Four numbers represent the week
and year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 3103 means
the 31st week of 2003. If these
numbers are missing, then look on
the other sidewall of the tire.
3
*

Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rubbercoated fabric in the tire.
Tire manufacturers also must indicate the
materials in the tire, which include steel,
nylon, polyester, and others.
4
*

Maximum permissible inflation pressure
This number is the greatest amount of air
pressure that should be put in the tire.
Do not exceed the maximum permissible
inflation pressure.

5
*

Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum load
in kilograms and pounds that can be
8-36 Do-it-yourself

carried by the tire. When replacing the
tires on the vehicle, always use a tire that
has the same load rating as the factory
installed tire.
6
*

Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”

Indicates whether the tire requires an
inner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).
7
*

trical tire that has a particular side that
must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING
.

When changing or replacing tires,
be sure all four tires are of the same
type (Example: Summer, All Season
or Snow) and construction. A
NISSAN dealer may be able to help
you with information about tire type,
size, speed rating and availability.

Replacement tires may have a lower
speed rating than the factory
equipped tires, and may not match
the potential maximum vehicle
speed. Never exceed the maximum
speed rating of the tire.

Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could
affect the proper operation of the
TPMS.

For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire
Safety Information” (US) or “Tire
Safety Information” (Canada) in the

The word “radial”

The word “radial” is shown, if the tire has
radial structure.
8
*

Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is shown.
Other tire-related terminology:
In addition to the many terms that are
defined throughout this section, Intended
Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall
that contains a whitewall, bears white
lettering or bears manufacturer, brand
and/or model name molding that is
higher or deeper than the same molding
on the other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the
outward facing sidewall of an asymme-

Warranty Information Booklet.

All season tires
NISSAN specifies all season tires on some
models to provide good performance all year,
including snowy and icy road conditions. All
Season tires are identified by ALL SEASON
and/or M&S (Mud and Snow) on the tire
sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction
than All Season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas.

Summer tires
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some
models to provide superior performance on dry
roads. Summer tire performance is substantially
reduced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not
have the tire traction rating M&S on the tire
sidewall.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or
icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of
SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four
wheels.

Snow tires
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select
tires equivalent in size and load rating to the
original equipment tires. If you do not, it can
adversely affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle.
Generally, snow tires will have lower speed
ratings than factory equipped tires and may not
match the potential maximum vehicle speed.
Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the
tire.
If you install snow tires, they must be the same
size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all
four wheels.
For additional traction on icy roads, studded
tires may be used. However, some U.S. states
and Canadian provinces prohibit their use.
Check local, state and provincial laws before
installing studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires, on wet or dry
surfaces, may be poorer than that of nonstudded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINS
Use of tire chains may be prohibited according
to location. Check the local laws before installing tire chains. When installing tire chains, make
sure they are the proper size for the tires on your
vehicle and are installed according to the chain

manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE
Class S chains. Class “S” chains are used on
vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance.
Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are
designed to meet the SAE standard minimum
clearances between the tire and the closest
vehicle suspension or body component required
to accommodate the use of a winter traction
device (tire chains or cables). The minimum
clearances are determined using the factory
equipped tire size. Other types may damage
your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to
ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire
chain must be secured or removed to prevent
the possibility of whipping action damage to the
fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully
loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In
addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise,
your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle
handling and performance may be adversely
affected.
Tire chains must be installed only on the
front wheels and not on the rear wheels.
Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire.
Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with
tire chains in such conditions can cause damage
to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to
Do-it-yourself 8-37

some overstress.

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to the specification at all
times. It is recommended that wheel
nuts be tightened to the specification at each tire rotation interval.

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

WARNING
.

SDI1662

Tire rotation
NISSAN recommends rotating the tires
every 5,000 miles (8,000 km). (See “Flat
tire” (P.6-3) for tire replacing procedures.)
As soon as possible, tighten the
wheel nuts to the specified torque
with a torque wrench.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
80 ft-lb (108 N·m)

8-38 Do-it-yourself

After rotating the tires, check
and adjust the tire pressure.
. Retighten the wheel nuts
when the vehicle has been
driven for 600 miles (1,000
km) (also in cases of a flat tire,
etc.).
. Do not include the spare tire or
any other small size spare tire
in the tire rotation.
. For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty
Information Booklet.

SDI1663

1.
2.

Wear indicator
Wear indicator location mark

Tire wear and damage

WARNING
.

Tires should be periodically
inspected for wear, cracking,
bulging or objects caught in
the tread. If excessive wear,
cracks, bulging or deep cuts
are found, the tire(s) should be
replaced.

The original tires have built-in
tread wear indicators. When
wear indicators are visible,
the tire(s) should be replaced.
. Tires degrade with age and
use. Have tires, including the
spare, over 6 years old
checked by a qualified technician, because some tire damage may not be obvious.
Replace the tires as necessary
to prevent tire failure and
possible personal injury.
. Improper service of the spare
tire may result in serious personal injury. If it is necessary
to repair the spare tire, it is
recommended you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
. For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty
Information Booklet.

Replacing wheels and tires
When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread
design, speed rating and load carrying capacity
as originally equipped. (See “Specifications”
(P.10-9) for recommended types and sizes of
tires and wheels.)

WARNING
.

The use of tires other than those
recommended or the mixed use of
tires of different brands, construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), or
tread patterns can adversely affect
the ride, braking, handling, ground
clearance, body-to-tire clearance,
tire chain clearance, speedometer
calibration, headlight aim and bumper height. Some of these effects
may lead to accidents and could
result in serious personal injury.

For Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models,
if your vehicle was originally
equipped with 4 tires that were the
same size and you are only replacing 2 of the 4 tires, install the new
tires on the rear axle. Placing new
tires on the front axle may cause
loss of vehicle control in some
Do-it-yourself 8-39

If the wheels are changed for any
reason, always replace with wheels
which have the same off-set dimension. Wheels of a different off-set
could cause premature tire wear,
degrade vehicle handling characteristics and/or interference with the
brake discs/drums. Such interference can lead to decreased braking
efficiency and/or early brake pad/
shoe wear. See “Wheels and tires”
(P.10-9) of this manual for wheel offset dimensions.
Since the spare tire is not equipped
with the TPMS, when a spare tire is
mounted or a wheel is replaced, the
TPMS will not function and the low
tire pressure warning light will flash
for approximately 1 minute. The
light will remain on after 1 minute.
Have your tires replaced and/or
TPMS system reset as soon as
possible. It is recommended you
visit a NISSAN dealer for these
services.
Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could

8-40 Do-it-yourself

Safety Information” (Canada) in the
Warranty Information Booklet.

affect the proper operation of the
TPMS.

driving conditions and cause an
accident and personal injury.
.

The TPMS sensor may be damaged
if it is not handled correctly. Be
careful when handling the TPMS
sensor.
When replacing the TPMS sensor,
the ID registration may be required.
It is recommended you visit a
NISSAN dealer for ID registration.

Do not use a valve stem cap that is
not specified by NISSAN. The valve
stem cap may become stuck.

Be sure that the valve stem caps are
correctly fitted. Otherwise the valve
may be clogged up with dirt and
cause a malfunction or loss of
pressure.

Do not install a damaged or deformed wheel or tire even if it has
been repaired. Such wheels or tires
could have structural damage and
could fail without warning.

The use of retread tire is not recommended.

For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire
Safety Information” (US) or “Tire

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models

CAUTION
.

Always use tires of the same size,
brand, construction (bias, biasbelted or radial), and tread pattern
on all four wheels. Failure to do so
may result in a circumference difference between tires on the front and
rear axles which will cause excessive tire wear and may damage the
transmission, transfer case and rear
differential gears.

Only use spare tires specified for
each AWD model.

If excessive tire wear is found, it is recommended that all four tires be replaced with tires
of the same size, brand, construction and tread
pattern. The tire pressure and wheel alignment
should also be checked and corrected as
necessary. It is recommended you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.

Wheel balance
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling
and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can
get out of balance. Therefore, they should be
balanced as required.
Wheel balance service should be performed with the wheels off the vehicle.
Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle
could lead to mechanical damage.
For additional information regarding tires, refer
to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

Care of wheels

WARNING
.

Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid sharp turns and
abrupt braking while driving.

Periodically check spare tire inflation pressure. Always keep the
pressure of the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire at 60 psi (420 kPa,
4.2 bar).

With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY
spare tire installed do not drive your
vehicle at speeds faster than 50
MPH (80 km/h).

When driving on roads covered with
snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire should be used on
the rear wheels and original tire
used on the front wheels (drive
wheels). Use tire chains only on
the front (original) tires.

See “Cleaning exterior” (P.7-2) for details about
care of the wheels.

Spare tire
Since the spare tire is not equipped with the
TPMS, when a spare tire is mounted (TEMPORARY USE ONLY), the TPMS will not function.
Observe the following precautions if the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used,
otherwise your vehicle could be damaged or
involved in an accident.

The TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare
tire should be used for emergency
use. It should be replaced with the
standard tire at the first opportunity
to avoid possible tire or differential
damage.

Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster
rate than the standard tire. Replace
the spare tire as soon as the tread
wear indicators appear.

Do not use the spare tire on other
vehicles.

Do not use more than one spare tire
at the same time.

CAUTION
.

Do not use tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire
chains will not fit properly and may
cause damage to the vehicle.

Because the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire is smaller than the
original tire, ground clearance is
reduced. To avoid damage to the
vehicle, do not drive over obstacles.
Also do not drive the vehicle
through an automatic car wash
since it may get caught.

Do-it-yourself 8-41

MEMO

8-42 Do-it-yourself

9 Maintenance and schedules
Maintenance requirement ........................................................
General maintenance .........................................................
Scheduled maintenance ....................................................
Where to go for service ....................................................
General maintenance ...............................................................
Explanation of general maintenance items ...................
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ....................
Emission control system maintenance ...........................
Chassis and body maintenance ......................................

9-2
9-2
9-2
9-2
9-2
9-2
9-5
9-5
9-6

Maintenance schedules .......................................................... 9-7
Additional maintenance items for severe
operating conditions ......................................................... 9-7
Standard maintenance ............................................................ 9-7
Emission control system maintenance ........................ 9-8
Chassis and body maintenance ................................. 9-11
Maintenance under severe driving conditions ............... 9-14
Maintenance log .................................................................... 9-15

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENT
Some day-to-day and regular maintenance is
essential to maintain your vehicle good mechanical condition, as well as its emission and engine
performance.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that
the scheduled maintenance, as well as general
maintenance, is performed.

GENERAL MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
The maintenance items listed in this section are
required to be serviced at regular intervals.
However, under severe driving conditions, additional or more frequent maintenance will be
required.

WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who
can ensure that your vehicle receives the proper
maintenance care. You are a vital link in the
maintenance chain.

If maintenance service is required or your vehicle
appears to malfunction, have the systems
checked and serviced. It is recommended you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists
and are kept up-to-date with the latest service
information through technical bulletins, service
tips, and training programs. They are completely
qualified to work on NISSAN vehicles before
work begins.

General maintenance includes those items
which should be checked during normal dayto-day operation. They are essential for proper
vehicle operation. It is your responsibility to
perform these procedures regularly as prescribed.
Performing general maintenance checks requires minimal mechanical skill and only a few
general automotive tools.
These checks or inspections can be done by
yourself, a qualified technician or, if you prefer, a
NISSAN dealer.

You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s
service department performs the best job to
meet the maintenance requirements on your
vehicle.

During the normal day-to-day operation of the
vehicle, general maintenance should be performed regularly as prescribed in this section. If
you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or
smell, be sure to check for the cause or it is
recommended to have a NISSAN dealer do it
promptly. In addition, it is recommended you visit
a NISSAN dealer if you think that repairs are
required.
When performing any checks or maintenance
work, see “Maintenance precautions” (P.8-2).

EXPLANATION OF GENERAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Additional information on the following
items with “*” is found in the “8. Do-it
yourself” section of this manual.

Outside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be
performed from time to time, unless otherwise
specified.
Doors and engine hood: Check that all doors
and the engine hood operate properly. Also
ensure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate
hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers and links if
necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch
keeps the hood from opening when the primary
latch is released.
When driving in areas using road salt or other

9-2

Maintenance and schedules

corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.
Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular basis.
Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail
lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all
operating properly and installed securely. Also
check headlight aim.
Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When checking
the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing,
and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if
necessary.
Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated every
5,000 miles (8,000 km).
Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge often
and always prior to long distance trips. If
necessary, adjust the pressure in all tires,
including the spare, to the pressure specified.
Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive
wear.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
transmitter components: Replace the TPMS
transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap
when the tires are replaced due to wear or age.
Wheel alignment and balance: If the vehicle
should pull to either side while driving on a
straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or
abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for
wheel alignment.
If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal

highway speeds, wheel balancing may be
needed.

this service. Keep the floor mat away from the
pedal.

For additional information regarding tires, refer
to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the
NISSAN Warranty Information Booklet.

Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull the
vehicle to one side when applied.

Windshield: Clean the windshield on a regular
basis. Check the windshield at least every six
months for cracks or other damage. Have a
damaged windshield repaired by a qualified
repair facility.
Windshield wiper blades*: Check for cracks
or wear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be
checked on a regular basis, such as when
performing scheduled maintenance, cleaning
the vehicle, etc.
Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for
smooth operation and make sure the pedal
does not catch or require uneven effort. Keep
the floor mat away from the pedal.
Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth
operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes
down further than normal, the pedal feels
spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer to
stop, have your vehicle checked immediately. It
is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
P (Park) mechanism: On a fairly steep hill,
check that the vehicle is held securely with the
shift lever in the P (Park) position without
applying any brakes.
Parking brake: Check the parking brake
operation regularly. The vehicle should be
securely held on a fairly steep hill with only the
parking brake applied. If the parking brake needs
adjusted, it is recommended you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat belt
system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters
and retractors) operate properly and smoothly,
and are installed securely. Check the belt
webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.
Seats: Check seat position controls such as
seat adjusters, seatback recliners, etc. to ensure
they operate smoothly and that all latches lock
securely in every position. Check that the head
restraints move up and down smoothly and that
the locks (if so equipped) hold securely in all
latched positions.
Steering wheel: Check for changes in the
steering conditions, such as excessive free play,
Maintenance and schedules 9-3

hard steering or strange noises.
Warning lights and chimes: Make sure that
all warning lights and chimes are operating
properly.
Windshield defroster: Check that the air
comes out of the defroster outlets properly and
in sufficient quantity when operating the heater
or air conditioner.
Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that
the wipers and washers operate properly and
that the wipers do not streak.

Under the hood and vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be
checked periodically (for example, each time you
check the engine oil or refuel).
Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell.
It should be between the MAX and MIN lines.
Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under
severe condition require frequent checks of the
battery fluid level.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery discharge
and potential no-start conditions such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery
power when the engine is not running

9-4

Maintenance and schedules

(Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players,
etc.)
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or
only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to be
charged to maintain battery health.
Brake and clutch fluid level*: Make sure that
the brake and clutch fluid level is between the
MAX and MIN lines on the reservoir.
Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant level
when the engine is cold.
Engine drive belt*: Make sure that the drive
belt is not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.
Engine oil level*: Check the level after parking
the vehicle on a level surface and turning off the
engine. Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to
drain back into the oil pan.
Exhaust system: Make sure there are no loose
supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the
exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of
exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust
system inspected. It is recommended you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service. (See “Precautions when starting and driving” (P.5-2) for
exhaust gas (carbon monoxide).)
Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for fuel,
oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has
been parked for a while. Water dripping from the

air conditioner after use is normal. If you should
notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident,
check for the cause and have it corrected
immediately.
Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the
radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,
etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the
hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose
connections.
Underbody: The underbody is frequently exposed to corrosive substances such as those
used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very
important to remove these substances, otherwise rust will form on the floor pan, frame, fuel
lines and around the exhaust system. At the end
of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly
flushed with plain water, being careful to clean
those areas where mud and dirt may accumulate. For additional information, see “Cleaning
exterior” (P.7-2).
Windshield washer fluid*: Check that there is
adequate fluid in the reservoir.

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE ITEMS
The following descriptions are provided to give
you a better understanding of the scheduled
maintenance items that should be regularly
checked or replaced. The maintenance schedule indicates at which mileage/time intervals
each item requires service.
In addition to scheduled maintenance, your
vehicle requires that some items be checked
during normal day-to-day operation. Refer to
“General maintenance” (P.9-2).
Items marked with “*” are recommended by
NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. You are
not required to perform maintenance on these
items in order to maintain the warranties which
come with your vehicle. Other maintenance
items and intervals are required.
When applicable, additional information can be
found in the “8. Do-it yourself” section of this
manual.
NOTE:
NISSAN does not advocate the use of nonOEM approved aftermarket flushing systems and strongly advises against performing these services on a NISSAN
product. Many of the aftermarket flushing
systems use non-OEM approved chemicals
or solvents, the use of which has not been
validated by NISSAN.

For recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids,
grease, and refrigerant, refer to “Capacities and recommended fluids/lubricants”
(P.10-2) of this manual.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

Engine oil and oil filter:
Replace engine oil and oil filter at the specified
intervals. For recommended oil grade and viscosity refer to “Capacities and recommended
fluids/lubricants” (P.10-2).
Engine valve clearance*:

Drive belts*:

Inspect only if valve noise increases.

Check engine drive belts for wear, fraying or
cracking and for proper tension. Replace any
damaged drive belts.

Adjust valve clearance if necessary.

Engine air filter:
Replace at specified intervals. When driving for
prolonged periods in dusty conditions, check/
replace the filter more frequently.
Engine coolant*:
Replace coolant at the specified interval. When
adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only
Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant
(blue) or equivalent with the proper mixture.
(Refer to “Engine cooling system” (P.8-4) to
determine the proper mixture for your area.)

Evaporative emissions control vapor
lines*:
Check vapor lines for leaks or looseness.
Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary.
Fuel filter
Periodic maintenance is not required (in-tank
type filter).
Fuel lines*:
Check the fuel hoses, piping and connections
for leaks, looseness, or deterioration. Tighten
connections or replace parts as necessary.

NOTE:

Spark plugs:

Mixing any other type of coolant or the use
of non-distilled water may reduce the
recommended service interval of the coolant.

Replace at specified intervals. Install new plugs
of the type as originally equipped.

Maintenance and schedules 9-5

CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE

Tire rotation:

Brake lines and cables:

Tires should be rotated every 5,000 miles
(8,000 km) according to the instructions under
“Explanation of general maintenance items”
(P.9-2). When rotating tires, check for damage
and uneven wear. Replace if necessary.

Visually inspect for proper installation. Check for
chafing, cracks, deterioration, and signs of
leaking. Replace any deteriorated or damaged
parts immediately.
Brake pads and rotors:
Check for wear, deterioration and fluid leaks.
Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts
immediately.
Exhaust system:
Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler and
hangers for leaks, cracks, deterioration, and
damage. Tighten connections or replace parts
as necessary.
In-cabin microfilter:
Replace at specified intervals. When driving for
prolonged periods in dusty conditions, replace
the filter more frequently.
Propeller shaft(s):
Check for damage, looseness, and grease
leakage. (AWD)
Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension parts, drive shaft boots:
Check for damage, looseness, and leakage of oil
or grease. Under severe driving conditions,
inspect more frequently.

9-6

Maintenance and schedules

Transmission fluid/oil, differential oil and
transfer case oil:
Visually inspect for signs of leakage at specified
intervals.
If using a car-top carrier, or driving on rough or
muddy roads:
.

Replace the manual transmission gear oil
every 20,000 miles (32,000 km) or 24
months.
. Replace the CVT fluid every 60,000 miles
(96,000 km) or request the dealer to inspect
the fluid deterioration data using a CONSULT. If the deterioration data is more than
210,000, replace the CVT fluid.
Off-road maintenance:
Check the following items frequently whenever
you drive off-road through deep sand, mud or
water:
.
.

Brake pads and rotors
Brake linings and drums

.
.
.
.
.
.

Brake lines and hoses
Differential, transmission and transfer case
oil
Steering linkage
Propeller shaft(s) and front drive shafts
Engine air filter
Clutch housing drain (AWD only)

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

STANDARD MAINTENANCE

To help ensure smooth, safe and economical
driving, NISSAN provides two maintenance
schedules that may be used, depending upon
the conditions in which you usually drive. These
schedules contain both distance and time
intervals, up to 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/
144 months. For most people, the odometer
reading will indicate when service is needed.
However, if you drive very little, your vehicle
should be serviced at the regular time intervals
shown in the schedule.

After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144
months, continue maintenance at the
same mileage/time intervals.

For vehicles operated in Canada, both
standard and severe maintenance items
should be performed at every interval.

.
.
.
.

Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go
“rush hour” traffic.
Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for
long distances, such as police, taxi or doorto-door delivery use.
Driving in dusty conditions.
Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread
roads.
Using a car-top carrier.

The following tables show the standard maintenance schedule. Depending upon weather
and atmospheric conditions, varying road surfaces, individual driving habits and vehicle
usage, additional or more frequent maintenance
may be required.
After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144
months, continue maintenance at the
same mileage/time intervals.

NOTE:

ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS
FOR SEVERE OPERATING CONDITIONS
Additional maintenance items for severe
operating conditions; should be performed
on vehicles that are driven under especially
demanding conditions. Additional maintenance
items should be performed if you primarily
operate your vehicle under the following conditions:
.
.

Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles (8
km).
Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles
(16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing.
Maintenance and schedules 9-7

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever
comes first.

Miles 6 1,000
(km 6 1,000)
Months

Drive belts

See NOTE (1)

Air cleaner filter

See NOTE (2)

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
5
(8)
6

10
(16)
12

15
(24)
18

20
(32)
24

25
(40)
30

30
(48)
36

35
(56)
42

40
(64)
48

45
(72)
54

50
(80)
60

55
(88)
66

60
(96)
72
I*

EVAP vapor lines

Fuel lines

Fuel filter
Engine coolant*

See NOTE (3)
See NOTE (4)(5)

Engine oil
Engine oil filter
Spark plugs

See NOTE (6)

Intake and exhaust valve clearance*

See NOTE (7)

9-8

Maintenance and schedules

Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)

MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles,
kilometers or months, whichever
comes first.

Miles 6 1,000
(km 6 1,000)
Months

Drive belts

See NOTE (1)

Air cleaner filter

See NOTE (2)

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
65
(104)
78

70
(112)
84

75
(120)
90

90
(144)
108

95
(152)
114

100
(160)
120

105
(168)
126

110
(176)
132

115
(184)
138

120
(192)
144
I*

Fuel lines

Engine coolant*

85
(136)
102

EVAP vapor lines

Fuel filter

80
(128)
96

See NOTE (3)
See NOTE (4)(5)

Engine oil

Engine oil filter

Spark plugs

See NOTE (6)

Intake and exhaust valve clearance*

See NOTE (7)

Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)

Maintenance and schedules 9-9

NOTE:
(1) After 40,000 miles (64,000 km) or 48
months, inspect every 10,000 miles (16,000
km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts
if found damaged.
(2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions,
more frequent maintenance may be required.
(3) Periodic maintenance is not required.
(4) First replacement interval is 105,000
miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first
replacement, replace every 75,000 miles
(120,000 km) or 60 months.
(5) Use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent
with proper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and 50% demineralized or distilled
water. Mixing any other type of coolant or
the use of non-distilled water may reduce
the life expectancy of the factory fill coolant.
(6) Replace spark plug when the plug gap
exceeds 0.043 in (1.1 mm) even if within
specified replacement mileage.
(7) Periodic maintenance is not required.
However, if valve noise increases, inspect
valve clearance.
*: Maintenance items and intervals with “*”

9-10 Maintenance and schedules

are recommended by NISSAN for reliable
vehicle operation. The owner does not
need to perform such maintenance in
order to maintain the emission warranty
or manufacturer recall liability. Other
maintenance items and intervals are required.

CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.

Miles 6 1,000
(km 6 1,000)
Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
5
(8)
6

10
(16)
12

15
(24)
18

20
(32)
24

25
(40)
30

30
(48)
36

35
(56)
42

40
(64)
48

45
(72)
54

50
(80)
60

55
(88)
66

60
(96)
72

Brake lines and cables

Brake pads and rotors$

Brake fluid$

CVT fluid

See NOTE (1)

Manual transmission gear oil

See NOTE (2)

Transfer fluid and differential gear
oil

See NOTE (2)

Steering gear and linkage, axle
and suspension parts$
Tire rotation
Propeller shaft (AWD) and drive
shaft boots$

See NOTE (3)
I

Exhaust system$

I
I

In-cabin microfilter

Intelligent Key battery

Maintenance and schedules 9-11

MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.

Miles 6 1,000
(km 6 1,000)
Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
65
(104)
78

70
(112)
84

Brake lines and cables

Brake pads and rotors$

75
(120)
90

Brake fluid$

80
(128)
96

85
(136)
102

90
(144)
108

95
(152)
114

100
(160)
120

105
(168)
126

110
(176)
132

115
(184)
138

120
(192)
144
I
I
R

CVT fluid

See NOTE (1)

Manual transmission gear oil

See NOTE (2)

Transfer fluid and differential gear
oil

See NOTE (2)

Steering gear and linkage, axle
and suspension parts$
Tire rotation

See NOTE (3)

Propeller shaft (AWD) and drive
shaft boots$

Exhaust system$

I
I

In-cabin microfilter

Intelligent Key battery

9-12 Maintenance and schedules

NOTE:
Maintenance items with “$” should be
performed more frequently according to
“Maintenance under severe driving conditions” (P.9-14).
(1) If using a car-top carrier, or driving on
rough or muddy roads, inspect CVT fluid
deterioration at NISSAN dealer every
60,000 miles (96,000 km), then change
CVT fluid if necessary. And if the inspection is not performed, change (not just
inspect) CVT fluid every 60,000 miles
(96,000 km).
(2) If using a car-top carrier, or driving on
rough or muddy roads, change (not just
inspect) oil at every 20,000 miles (32,000
km) or 24 months.
(3) Refer to “Tire rotation” under “General
maintenance” (P.9-2).

Maintenance and schedules 9-13

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE
DRIVING CONDITIONS
The maintenance intervals shown on the preceding pages are for normal operating conditions. If the vehicle is mainly operated under
severe driving conditions as shown below, more
frequent maintenance must be performed on the
following items as shown in the table.
Severe driving conditions
.

Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles (8
km).
. Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles
(16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing.
. Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go
“rush hour” traffic.
. Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for
long distances, such as police, taxi or doorto-door delivery use.
. Driving in dusty conditions.
. Driving on rough, muddy, or salt spread
roads.
. Using a car-top carrier.
Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect and
correct or replace as necessary.

9-14 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance item

Maintenance operation

Maintenance interval

Brake fluid

Replace

Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12
months

Brake pads & rotors

Inspect

Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Steering gear & linkage, axle &
suspension parts

Inspect

Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Propeller shaft (AWD) and drive
shaft boots

Inspect

Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Exhaust system

Inspect

Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

MAINTENANCE LOG
5,000 Miles (8,000 km) or 6 Months

10,000 Miles (16,000 km) or 12 Months

15,000 Miles (24,000 km) or 18 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer
Stamp:

20,000 Miles (32,000 km) or 24 Months

25,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 30 Months

30,000 Miles (48,000 km) or 36 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer
Stamp:

35,000 Miles (56,000 km) or 42 Months

40,000 Miles (64,000 km) or 48 Months

45,000 Miles (72,000 km) or 54 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer
Stamp:

Maintenance and schedules 9-15

50,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 60 Months

55,000 Miles (88,000 km) or 66 Months

60,000 Miles (96,000 km) or 72 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer
Stamp:

65,000 Miles (104,000 km) or 78 Months

70,000 Miles (112,000 km) or 84 Months

75,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 90 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer
Stamp:

80,000 Miles (128,000 km) or 96 Months

85,000 Miles (136,000 km) or 102 Months

90,000 Miles (144,000 km) or 108 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer
Stamp:

9-16 Maintenance and schedules

95,000 Miles (152,000 km) or 114 Months

100,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 120 Months

105,000 Miles (168,000 km) or 126 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer
Stamp:

110,000 Miles (176,000 km) or 132 Months

115,000 Miles (184,000 km) or 138 Months

120,000 Miles (192,000 km) or 144 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer
Stamp:

Maintenance and schedules 9-17

MEMO

9-18 Maintenance and schedules

10 Technical and consumer information
Capacities and recommended fluids/lubricants ............. 10-2
Fuel information ................................................................ 10-4
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation .................... 10-7
Air conditioning system refrigerant and
lubricant recommendations ............................................ 10-8
Specifications .......................................................................... 10-9
Engine ................................................................................. 10-9
Wheels and tires .............................................................. 10-9
Dimensions and weights ............................................. 10-10
When traveling or registering in another country ....... 10-10
Vehicle identification ........................................................... 10-11
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) plate ............... 10-11
Vehicle identification number (chassis number) .... 10-11
Engine serial number .................................................... 10-11
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ................. 10-12
Emission control information label ............................ 10-12
Tire and Loading Information label ........................... 10-12
Air conditioner specification label ............................. 10-13
Installing front license plate .............................................. 10-13

Vehicle loading information ..............................................
Terms ..............................................................................
Vehicle load capacity .................................................
Loading tips ..................................................................
Measurement of weights ...........................................
Towing a trailer ....................................................................
Flat towing ............................................................................
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) ..........
Manual Transmission ..................................................
Uniform tire quality grading ..............................................
Treadwear .....................................................................
Traction AA, A, B and C ...........................................
Temperature A, B and C ...........................................
Emission control system warranty ..................................
Reporting safety defects ..................................................
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test ......
Event Data Recorders (EDR) ..........................................
Owner’s manual/service manual order information .....

10-15
10-15
10-15
10-17
10-17
10-18
10-18
10-18
10-18
10-19
10-19
10-19
10-19
10-20
10-20
10-21
10-22
10-22

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED
FLUIDS/LUBRICANTS
The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure
instructed in the “8. Do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Fluid type
Fuel
*1

Engine oil
Drain and refill
*1
: For additional information, see
“Changing engine
oil and filter” (P.8-6).

2WD model
AWD model
With oil filter change For NISMO RS model

Without oil filter
change

Engine coolant

With reservoir

Capacity (Approximate)
Imperial
Metric
US
Measure
Measure
Measure
50
13-1/4 gal
11 gal
45
11-7/8 gal 9-7/8 gal
4.3
4-1/2 qt
3-3/4 qt

Except for NISMO RS model

4.5

4-3/4 qt

4 qt

For NISMO RS model

4.1

4-3/8 qt

3-5/8 qt

Except for NISMO RS model

4.3

4-1/2 qt

3-3/4 qt

For NISMO
RS model

8.1
7.9
8.7
8.5

8-5/8
8-3/8
9-1/4
8-3/8

7-1/8 qt
7 qt
7-5/8 qt
7 qt

Except for
NISMO RS
model

CVT model
MT model
CVT model
MT model

Reservoir
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid

10-2 Technical and consumer information

0.6
—

qt
qt
qt
qt

5/8 qt
—

1/2 qt
—

Recommended Fluids/Lubricants
Â See “Fuel information” (P.10-4).
For NISMO RS models
Â Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 5W-30 SN” is recommended.
Â If the above motor oil is not available, use an equivalent motor oil that matches the above
grade and viscosity. For additional information, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendation”
(P.10-7).
Except for NISMO RS models
Â Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 0W-20 SN” is recommended.
Â If the above motor oil is not available, use an equivalent motor oil that matches the above
grade and viscosity. For additional information, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendation”
(P.10-7).

Â Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent

For NISMO RS models
Â Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2
Â NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 (or equivalent) ONLY in
NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with other fluids. Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine
NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 may damage the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids other
than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Except for NISMO RS models
Â Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3
Â NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or equivalent) ONLY in
NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with other fluids. Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine
NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 may damage the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids other
than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Fluid type
Manual Transmission (MT) gear oil

Differential gear oil
Transfer fluid
Brake and clutch fluid

Multi-purpose grease
Air conditioning system refrigerant

Air conditioning system lubricants
Window washer fluid

Capacity (Approximate)
Imperial
Metric
US
Measure
Measure
Measure
—
—
—

—
—
—
—
—
—
Refill to the proper oil level according
to the instructions in the “8. Do-ityourself” section.
—
—
—
—
—
—

—
4.5

—
1-1/4 gal

—
1 gal

Recommended Fluids/Lubricants
For NISMO RS models
Â Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85 or equivalent
Â If Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi is not available, API GL-4,
Viscosity SAE 75W-85 may be used as a temporary replacement. However, use Genuine
NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi as soon as it is available.
Except for NISMO RS models
Â Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) TL/JR Type 75W-80 or equivalent
Â If Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) TL/JR Type is not available, API GL-4+,
Viscosity SAE 75W-80 may be used as a temporary replacement. However, use Genuine
NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) TL/JR Type as soon as it is available.
Â Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 or equivalent conventional
(non-synthetic) oil
Â Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*6 or equivalent DOT 3
*6
: Available in mainland U.S.A. through a NISSAN dealer.
Â NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)
Â For additional information, see “Vehicle identification” (P.10-11) for air conditioner
specification label.
Â HFC-134a (R-134a)
Â NISSAN A/C System Oil Type R or exact equivalent
Â Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent

Technical and consumer information 10-3

FUEL INFORMATION
NISSAN recommends the use of unleaded
premium gasoline with an octane rating of at
least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 96).

If unleaded premium gasoline is not available,
you may use unleaded regular gasoline with an
octane rating of at least 87 AKI number
(Research octane number 91), but you may
notice a decrease in performance.

Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also
affect warranty coverage.

Under no circumstances should a
leaded gasoline be used, because
this will damage the three-way catalyst.

Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your
vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed
to run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E15 or E-85 fuel in a vehicle not
specifically designed for E-15 or E85 fuel can adversely affect the
emission control devices and systems of the vehicle. Damage caused
by such fuel is not covered by the
NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.

For NISMO RS models:
Use unleaded premium gasoline with an octane
rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index)
number (Research octane number 96).
If unleaded premium gasoline is not available,
unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating
of at least 87 AKI number (Research octane
number 91) may be temporarily used, but only
under the following precautions:
.

Have the fuel tank filled only partially with
unleaded regular gasoline, and fill up with
unleaded premium gasoline as soon as
possible.
. Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration.
Use unleaded premium gasoline for maximum vehicle performance.

10-4 Technical and consumer information

indicate MMT content, so you may
have to consult your gasoline retailer for more details. Note that Federal and California laws prohibit the
use of MMT in reformulated gasoline.

CAUTION

Except for NISMO RS models:

Do not use fuel that contains the
octane booster methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT). Using fuel containing MMT
may adversely affect vehicle performance and vehicle emissions. Not
all fuel dispensers are labeled to

U.S. government regulations require
ethanol dispensing pumps to be
identified by a small, square, orange
and black label with the common
abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region.

Gasoline specifications
NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets
the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifications where it is available. Many of the
automobile manufacturers developed this specification to improve emission control system
and vehicle performance. Ask your service
station manager if the gasoline meets the
WWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasoline
Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformulated gasolines. These gasolines are specially
designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN
supports efforts towards cleaner air and suggests that you use reformulated gasoline when
available.

Gasoline containing oxygenates
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing
oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanol with or without advertising their presence.
NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels
of which the oxygenate content and the fuel
compatibility for your vehicle cannot be readily
determined. If in doubt, ask your service station
manager.
If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take
the following precautions as the usage of such
fuels may cause vehicle performance problems
and/or fuel system damage.
.
.

The fuel should be unleaded and have
an octane rating no lower than that
recommended for unleaded gasoline.
If an oxygenate-blend, other than
methanol blend is used, it should
contain no more than 10% oxygenate.
(MTBE may, however, be added up to
15%.)

E-15 fuel contains more than 10%
oxygenate. E-15 fuel will adversely
affect the emission control devices
and systems of the vehicle and should
not be used. Damage caused by such
fuel is not covered by the NISSAN new
vehicle limited warranty.
. If a methanol blend is used, it should
contain no more than 5% methanol
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol) . It
should also contain a suitable amount
of appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors. If not properly formulated with appropriate cosolvents and
corrosion inhibitors, such methanol
blends may cause fuel system damage
and/or vehicle performance problems.
At this time, sufficient data is not
available to ensure that all methanol
blends are suitable for use in NISSAN
vehicles.
If any driveability problems such as engine
stalling and difficult hot-starting are experienced
after using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately
change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a
low blend of MTBE.
Take care not to spill gasoline during
refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates
can cause paint damage.

E-15 fuel
E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15% fuel
ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline. E-15 can
only be used in vehicles designed to run on E15 fuel. Do not use E-15 in your vehicle. U.S.
government regulations require fuel ethanol
dispensing pumps to be identified with small,
square, orange and black label with the common
abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for
that region.

E-85 fuel
E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel
ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can
only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do
not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle. U.S. government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing
pumps to be identified by a small, square,
orange and black label with the common
abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for
that region.

Fuel containing MMT
MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting additive.
NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuel
containing MMT. Such fuel may adversely affect
vehicle performance, including the emissions
control system. Note that while some fuel pumps
label MMT content, not all do, so you may have
Technical and consumer information 10-5

to consult your gasoline retailer for more details.

Aftermarket fuel additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of any
aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel
injector cleaner, octane booster, intake valve
deposit removers, etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of these additives intended for gum,
varnish or deposit removal may contain active
solvent or similar ingredients that can be harmful
to the fuel system and engine.

Octane rating tips
Using unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating lower than recommended can cause
persistent, heavy “spark knock”. (Spark
knock is a metallic rapping noise.) If
severe, this can lead to engine damage. If
you detect a persistent heavy spark knock
even when using gasoline of the stated
octane rating, or if you hear steady spark
knock while holding a steady speed on
level roads, it is recommended you have a
NISSAN dealer correct the condition. Failure to correct the condition is misuse of
the vehicle, for which NISSAN is not
responsible.
Incorrect ignition timing will result in spark
knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may
cause excessive fuel consumption or engine

10-6 Technical and consumer information

damage. If any of the above symptoms are
encountered, have your vehicle checked. It is
recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for
servicing.
However, now and then you may notice
light spark knock for a short time while
accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a
cause for concern, because you get the
greatest fuel benefit when there is light
spark knock for a short time under heavy
engine load.

1
*
2
*

API certification mark
API service symbol

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RECOMMENDATION
Selecting the correct oil
It is essential to choose the correct grade,
quality, and viscosity engine oil to ensure
satisfactory engine life and performance, see
“Capacities and recommended fluids/lubricants”
(P.10-2). NISSAN recommends the use of an
energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel
economy.
JVT0159X
For NISMO RS models

Select only engine oils that meet the American
Petroleum Institute (API) certification or International Lubricant Standardization and Approval
Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE viscosity standard. These oils have the API
certification mark on the front of the container.
Oils which do not have the specified quality
label should not be used as they could cause
engine damage.

Oil additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil
additives. The use of an oil additive is not
necessary when the proper oil type is used and
maintenance intervals are followed.
JVT0351X
Except for NISMO RS models

Oil which may contain foreign matter or has
been previously used should not be used.
Technical and consumer information 10-7

Oil viscosity

interval.

The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes
with temperature. Because of this, it is important
to select the engine oil viscosity based on the
temperatures at which the vehicle will be
operated before the next oil change. Choosing
an oil viscosity other than that recommended
could cause serious engine damage.

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM REFRIGERANT AND LUBRICANT RECOMMENDATIONS

Selecting the correct oil filter
Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a
high-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When
replacing, use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or its
equivalent for the reason described in “Change
intervals”.

Change intervals
The oil and oil filter change intervals for your
engine are based on the use of the specified
quality oils and filters. Using an engine oil and
filter other than the specified quality, or exceeding recommended oil and filter change intervals
could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine
caused by improper maintenance or use of
incorrect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is
not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited
warranty.
Your engine was filled with a high quality engine
oil when it was built. You do not have to change
the oil before the first recommended change

10-8 Technical and consumer information

The air conditioning system in your
NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the
refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the oil,
NISSAN A/C system oil Type R or the exact
equivalents.

CAUTION
The use of any other refrigerant or oil
may cause severe damage to the air
conditioning system and may require
the replacement of all air conditioner
system components.
The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your
NISSAN vehicle will not harm the earth’s ozone
layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect
the earth’s atmosphere, certain governmental
regulations require the recovery and recycling of
any refrigerant during automotive air conditioning system service. A NISSAN dealer has the
trained technicians and equipment needed to
recover and recycle your air conditioning system
refrigerant.

It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer
when servicing your air conditioning system.

SPECIFICATIONS
WHEELS AND TIRES

ENGINE

Road wheel

Model

MR16DDT

Type

Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC
4-cylinder, in-line
3.138 6 3.193 (79.7 6 81.1)
98.78 (1,618)
1-3-4-2

Type

Size

Offset in
(mm)

Conventional

17 6 7J

1.85 (47)

18 6 7J

1.85 (47)

Spare

Cylinder arrangement
Bore 6 Stroke
Displacement
Firing order

in (mm)
cu in (cm3)

Idle speed
Ignition timing (B.T.D.C.)

rpm
degree/rpm

No adjustment is necessary.

Standard

DILKAR7C9H (for NISMO RS models)
DILKAR7E9HS (except for NISMO RS models)

in (mm)

0.035 (0.9)

Spark plug
Spark plug gap (Normal)
Camshaft operation

NISMO
models

16 6 4T

1.18 (30)

NISMO RS 17 6 4T
models

1.18 (30)

Timing chain

This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

Technical and consumer information 10-9

WHEN TRAVELING OR
REGISTERING IN ANOTHER
COUNTRY
Tire

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Type

Size

Pressure
PSI (kPa)
[Cold]

Conventional

P215/55R17 93V

33 (230)*1
36 (250)*2
35 (240)*3

NISMO
models

Spare

Overall width

225/45R18 33 (230)*1
35 (240)*3
95Y
T135/80D16
101M*1*2

Overall height
Front tread
Rear tread

T135/90D16
102M*3

Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating
(GVWR)
Gross Axle
Weight Rating
(GAWR)
Front
Rear

60 (420)

NISMO RS T135/70D17 92M
models
*1:
*2:
*3:

Overall length

2WD MT model
2WD CVT model
AWD model

Wheelbase

*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
*6:
*7:

10-10 Technical and consumer information

in (mm) 162.8 (4,135)*1
162.4 (4,125)*2
164.0 (4,165)*3
163.8 (4,160)*4
in (mm) 69.5 (1,765)
69.7(1,770)*5
in (mm) 61.8 (1,570)
in (mm) 60.0 (1,525)
in (mm) 60.0 (1,525)*6
59.3 (1,505)*7
in (mm) 99.6 (2,530)
lb (kg)
See the F.M.V.S.S. or
C.M.V.S.S. certification
label on the driver’s
side center pillar.
lb (kg)
lb (kg)

With front license plate bracket
Without front license plate bracket
With front license plate bracket (NISMO models)
Without front license plate bracket (NISMO
models)
NISMO models
for 2WD model
for AWD model

When planning to travel in another country, you should first find out if the fuel available is
suitable for your vehicle’s engine.
Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low
may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles
must be operated with unleaded gasoline.
Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas
where appropriate fuel is not available.
When transferring the registration of your
vehicle to another country, state, province
or district, it may be necessary to modify the
vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle
emission control and safety standards vary
according to the country, state, province or
district; therefore, vehicle specifications may
differ.
When any vehicle is to be taken into
another country, state, province or district
and registered, its modifications, transportation, and registration are the responsibility of the user. NISSAN is not
responsible for any inconvenience that
may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

STI0787

STI0778

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(VIN) PLATE

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(chassis number)

The vehicle identification number plate is attached as shown. This number is the identification for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle
registration.

The vehicle identification number is located as
shown.

STI0785

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
The number is stamped on the engine as shown.

Remove the cover to access the number.

Technical and consumer information 10-11

STI0814

JVO0181X

STI0775

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION
LABEL

EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION
LABEL

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION
LABEL

The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification
label is affixed as shown. This label contains
valuable vehicle information, such as: Gross
Vehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR), month and year of
manufacture, Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

The emission control information label is attached to the underside of the hood as shown.

The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label affixed to the pillar as
shown.

10-12 Technical and consumer information

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE

STI0776

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION
LABEL
The air conditioner specification label is attached to the engine compartment as shown.

JVT0347X

Technical and consumer information 10-13

Use the following steps to mount the license
plate:

8. Install the license plate bracket with the
screws.

Before mounting the license plate, confirm that
the following parts are enclosed in the plastic
bag.

9. Install the license plate with bolts that are
not longer than 0.55 in (14 mm).

.
.
.
.
1.

License plate bracket
J-nut 6 2
Screw 6 2
Screw grommet 6 2
Park the vehicle on flat, level ground.

A as illustrated.
2. Locate the center position *

Make sure the side end surface of the
license plate bracket is aligned with the
B .
bumper *
3. Mark the center of the holes
tip pen.

C
*

with a felt-

4. Carefully drill the two pilot holes using a
0.39 in (10 mm) drill bit at the marked
locations. (Be sure that the drill only
goes through the bumper fascia.)
5. Insert grommets into the hole on the fascia.
6. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the
grommet hole to add a 908 turn onto the
D .
part *
7. Insert a J-nut into the license plate bracket
before placing the license plate bracket on
the fascia.

10-14 Technical and consumer information

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

WARNING
.

It is extremely dangerous to
ride in a cargo area inside the
vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
. Do not allow people to ride in
any area of your vehicle that is
not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
seat belt properly.
TERMS
It is important to familiarize yourself with
the following terms before loading your
vehicle:
. Curb Weight (actual weight of your
vehicle) - vehicle weight including:
standard and optional equipment,
fluids, emergency tools, and spare

tire assembly. This weight does not
include passengers and cargo.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb
weight plus the combined weight of
passengers and cargo.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) - maximum total combined
weight of the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue
load and any other optional equipment. This information is located on
the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) maximum weight (load) limit specified
for the front or rear axle. This information is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.
V.S.S. label.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
Rating) - The maximum total weight
rating of the vehicle, passengers,
cargo, and trailer.
Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,
Total load capacity - maximum total
weight limit specified of the load
(passengers and cargo) for the vehicle. This is the maximum combined

weight of occupants and cargo that
can be loaded into the vehicle. If the
vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the
trailer tongue weight must be included as part of the cargo load. This
information is located on the Tire and
Loading Information label.
. Cargo capacity - permissible weight
of cargo, the subtracted weight of
occupants from the load limit.
VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY
Do not exceed the load limit of your
vehicle shown as “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo” on the Tire and
Loading Information label. Do not exceed
the number of occupants shown as
“Seating Capacity” on the Tire and
Loading Information label.
To get “the combined weight of occupants and cargo”, add the weight of all
occupants, then add the total luggage
weight. Examples are shown in the
following illustration.

Technical and consumer information 10-15

4. The resulting figure equals the avail-

STI0447

Steps for determining correct load limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
10-16 Technical and consumer information

2. Determine the combined weight of

the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lbs.

able amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the XXX
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there
will be five 150 lb. passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400 í 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs) or
(640 í 340 (5 x 70) = 300 kg.)
5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated
in Step 4.
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm
that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for your
vehicle. (See “Measurement of weights”
(P.10-17).)
Also check tires for proper inflation
pressures. See the Tire and Loading
Information label.

LOADING TIPS
. The GVW must not exceed GVWR or
GAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.
S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
. Do not load the front and rear axle to
the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the
GVWR.

WARNING
.

Properly secure all cargo with
ropes or straps to help prevent
it from sliding or shifting. Do
not place cargo higher than
the seatbacks. In a sudden
stop or collision, unsecured
cargo could cause personal
injury.
. Do not load your vehicle any
heavier than the GVWR or the
maximum front and rear
GAWRs. If you do, parts of
your vehicle can break, tire
damage could occur, or it can
change the way your vehicle
handles. This could result in

loss of control and cause personal injury.
. Overloading not only can
shorten the life of your vehicle
and the tire, but can cause
unsafe vehicle handling and
longer braking distances. This
may cause a premature tire
failure, which could result in a
serious accident and personal
injury. Failures caused by
overloading are not covered
by the vehicle’s warranty.

These ratings are given on the vehicle
certification label. If weight ratings are
exceeded, move or remove items to bring
all weights below the ratings.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS
Secure loose items to prevent weight
shifts that could affect the balance of
your vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded,
drive to a scale and weigh the front and
the rear wheels separately to determine
axle loads. Individual axle loads should
not exceed either of the Gross Axle
Weight Ratings (GAWR). The total of
the axle loads should not exceed the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
Technical and consumer information 10-17

TOWING A TRAILER

FLAT TOWING

Do not tow a trailer with your vehicle.

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground is sometimes called flat towing. This
method is sometimes used when towing a
vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a
motor home.

13).

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION (CVT)
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models:

CAUTION
.

10-18 Technical and consumer information

Failure to follow these guidelines
can result in severe transmission
damage.

Whenever flat towing your vehicle,
always tow forward, never backward.

DO NOT tow any Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground
(flat towing). Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmission parts
due to lack of transmission lubrication.

DO NOT tow an All-Wheel Drive
(AWD) vehicle with any of the
wheels on the ground. Doing so
may cause serious and expensive
damage to the powertrain.

For emergency towing procedures
refer to “Towing your vehicle” (P.6-

Do not tow an AWD vehicle with any of the
wheels on the ground.
Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models:
To tow a vehicle equipped with a Continuously
Variable Transmission (CVT), an appropriate
vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the towed
vehicle’s driving wheels. Always follow the dolly
manufacturer’s recommendations when using
their product.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION
.
.
.

Always tow with the manual transmission in
Neutral.
Your vehicle speed should never exceed 70
MPH (112 km/h) when flat towing your
vehicle.
After towing 500 miles (805 km), start and
idle the engine with the transmission in
Neutral for two minutes. Failure to idle the
engine after every 500 miles (805 km) of
towing may cause damage to the transmission’s internal parts.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
DOT (Department Of Transportation) Quality
Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to these
grades.
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

TREADWEAR
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-half
(1 1/2) times as well on the government course
as a tire graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

TRACTION AA, A, B AND C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the
tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor

traction performance.

WARNING
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire
is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning,
or peak traction characteristics.

The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, under-inflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat build-up and
possible tire failure.

TEMPERATURE A, B AND C
The temperature grades A (the highest), B, and
C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on
a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Technical and consumer information 10-19

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARRANTY
Your vehicle is covered by the following emission warranties.
For USA:
. Emission Defects Warranty
. Emissions Performance Warranty
Details of these warranties may be found with
other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with your
vehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty
Information Booklet, or it has become lost, you
may obtain a replacement by writing to:
.

Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
For Canada:
Emission Control System Warranty
Details of this warranty may be found with other
vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information
Booklet which comes with your vehicle. If you
did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet,
or it has become lost, you may obtain a
replacement by writing to:
.

Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario,
L4W 4Z5

10-20 Technical and consumer information

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
For USA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying NISSAN.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or NISSAN.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go
to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh
Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.
You may notify NISSAN by contacting
our Consumer Affairs Department, toll-

free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1.
For Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform Transport Canada in
addition to notifying NISSAN.
If Transport Canada receives complaints,
it may open an investigation, and if it
finds that a safety defect exists in a group
of vehicles, it may request that NISSAN
conduct a recall campaign. However,
Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or NISSAN.
You may contact Transport Canada’s
Defect Investigations and Recalls Division toll free at 1-800-333-0510. You
may also report safety defects online at:
https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/
7/ PCDB-BDPP/Index.aspx.
Additional information concerning motor
vehicle safety may be obtained from
Transport Canada’s Road Safety Infor-

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/
MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST
mation Centre at 1-800-333-0371 or
online at www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (English speakers) or www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere (French speakers).
To notify NISSAN of any safety concerns
please contact our Consumer Information Centre toll free at 1-800-387-0122

WARNING
A vehicle equipped with All-Wheel Drive
(AWD) should never be tested using a
two wheel dynamometer (such as the
dynamometers used by some states for
emissions testing), or similar equipment. Make sure you inform test facility
personnel that your vehicle is equipped
with AWD before it is placed on a
dynamometer. Using the wrong test
equipment may result in transmission
damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious
vehicle damage or personal injury.

the I/M test, check the vehicle’s inspection/
maintenance test readiness condition. Place the
ignition switch in the ON position without
starting the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and
then blinks for 10 seconds, the I/M test
condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not
blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is
“ready”.
It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer to
set “ready condition” or to prepare the vehicle
for testing.

Due to legal requirements in some states/areas
or provinces, your vehicle may be required to be
in what is called the “ready condition” for an
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the emission control system.
The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when
it is driven through certain driving patterns.
Usually, the “ready condition” can be obtained
by ordinary usage of the vehicle.
If a powertrain system component is repaired or
the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be
reset to a “not ready condition”. Before taking
Technical and consumer information 10-21

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE
MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
.

How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
. Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
. How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
. How fast the vehicle was traveling.
. Sounds are not recorded.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes
and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle
only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data
are recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g. name,
gender, age and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type

10-22 Technical and consumer information

of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required and access to the vehicle
or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will
only be accessed with the consent of the vehicle
owner or lessee or as otherwise required or
permitted by law.

Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this
model year and prior can be purchased. A
genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best
source of service and repair information for your
vehicle. This manual is the same one used by the
factory trained technicians working at a NISSAN
dealer. Genuine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals can
also be purchased.
In the USA:
For current pricing and availability of genuine
NISSAN Service Manuals contact:
www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of genuine
NISSAN Owner’s Manuals contact:
1-800-247-5321

In Canada:
To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN
Service Manual or Owner’s Manual for this
model year and prior please contact a NISSAN
dealer. For the phone number and location of a
NISSAN dealer in your area call the NISSAN
Information Center at 1-800-387-0122 and a
bilingual NISSAN representative will assist you.

11 Index
A
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ............................ 5-36
Adjusting the screen.................................................. 4-11
Advanced air bag system ......................................... 1-44
Air bag system
Advanced air bag system .................................. 1-44
Front passenger air bag and status light ...... 1-46
Front-seat mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag system............................ 1-51
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
supplemental air bag system............................ 1-51
Air bag warning labels .............................................. 1-54
Air bag warning light ..................................... 1-54, 2-20
Air cleaner housing filter ........................................... 8-14
Air conditioner
Air conditioner operation ................................... 4-28
Air conditioner service ....................................... 4-35
Air conditioner specification label ................. 10-13
Air conditioning system refrigerant and
lubricant recommendations .................... 4-35, 10-8
In-cabin microfilter............................................... 4-35
Air conditioner operation .......................................... 4-31
Alarm, How to stop alarm (see vehicle
security system) .......................................................... 2-34
Alcohol, drugs and driving ......................................... 5-7
All-wheel drive (AWD) .............................................. 5-29
Antenna ......................................................................... 4-75
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ............................ 5-36
Anti-lock braking system (ABS) warning light .... 2-16
Appearance care
Exterior appearance care ..................................... 7-2
Interior appearance care....................................... 7-5
Application download ................................................ 4-76
Around View Monitor .............................................. 4-13

Audible reminders ...................................................... 2-23
Audio operation precautions ................................... 4-35
Audio system ............................................................... 4-35
Steering wheel audio controls ......................... 4-73
Autolight system ......................................................... 2-40
Automatic
Air conditioner ...................................................... 4-32
Door locks ................................................................ 3-5
Average fuel consumption........................................ 2-13
Avoiding collision and rollover .................................. 5-6

B
Back door (See liftgate) ........................................... 3-16
Battery ........................................................................... 8-10
Battery replacement, Intelligent Key ............... 8-20
Battery saver system .......................................... 2-41
Variable voltage control system ....................... 8-12
Before starting the engine ....................................... 5-12
Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System .... 4-80, 4-89
Bluetooth settings ........................................ 4-88, 4-94
Bluetooth streaming audio......................... 4-60, 4-71
Booster seats .............................................................. 1-34
Brake
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ..................... 5-36
Brake and clutch fluid ........................................... 8-9
Brake system ........................................................ 5-35
Parking brake operation ..................................... 5-25
Warning light ........................................................ 2-16
Break-in schedule....................................................... 5-27
Brightness control
Instrument panel .................................................. 2-43
Bulb check/instrument panel ................................... 2-16
Bulb replacement ....................................................... 8-23

C
Cabin air filter .............................................................. 4-35
Capacities and
recommended fluids/lubricants ............................... 10-2
Car phone or CB radio ............................................. 4-80
Cargo cover ................................................................. 2-49
Cargo floor box ........................................................... 2-48
Catalytic converter, Three way catalyst .................. 5-3
CD/USB memory care and cleaning..................... 4-73
Chassis and body maintenance ............................. 9-11
Check tire pressure warning ..................................... 2-9
Child restraints ............................................................ 1-18
Booster seats ....................................................... 1-34
LATCH system ..................................................... 1-20
Precautions on child restraints ........................ 1-19
Child safety .................................................................. 1-16
Child safety rear door lock ........................................ 3-6
Chimes, Audible reminders ...................................... 2-23
Circuit breaker, Fusible link ..................................... 8-18
Cleaning exterior and interior ........................... 7-2, 7-5
Clutch fluid ..................................................................... 8-9
Coat hook ..................................................................... 2-48
Cockpit ............................................................................ 2-3
Cold weather driving ................................................. 5-39
Compact Disc (CD) player (See
audio system) .............................................................. 4-65
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid ... 8-8
Control buttons and function .................................... 4-3
Controls, Steering wheel audio controls .............. 4-73
Coolant
Capacities and
recommended fluids/lubricants ........................ 10-2
Changing engine coolant ..................................... 8-5
Checking engine coolant level ............................ 8-5
High temperature warning light ....................... 2-18

Corrosion protection.................................................... 7-7
Cover, Cargo cover ................................................... 2-49
Cruise control .............................................................. 5-26
Cup holders ................................................................. 2-47
CVT, Driving with CVT (Continuously
Variable Transmission) .............................................. 5-14

D
Daytime running light system .................................. 2-42
Defroster switch, Rear window and outside
mirror defroster switch .............................................. 2-38
Dimensions and weights ....................................... 10-10
Displaying Climate control ....................................... 4-34
Door open warning light ........................................... 2-17
Drive belt ...................................................................... 8-12
Driving
All-wheel drive (AWD) ....................................... 5-29
Cold weather driving .......................................... 5-39
Driving with CVT (Continuously
Variable Transmission) ....................................... 5-14
Driving with manual transmission .................... 5-19
Precautions when starting and driving ............. 5-2
Safety precautions ................................................. 5-7

Capacities and
recommended fluids/lubricants ........................ 10-2
Changing engine coolant ..................................... 8-5
Changing engine oil and filter ............................. 8-6
Checking engine coolant level ............................ 8-5
Checking engine oil level ..................................... 8-5
Coolant temperature gauge .............................. 2-10
Emergency engine shut off ...................... 5-11, 6-3
Engine block heater ............................................ 5-40
Engine compartment check locations ............... 8-3
Engine cooling system .......................................... 8-4
Engine oil .................................................................. 8-5
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation ....... 10-7
Engine oil viscosity.............................................. 10-8
Engine serial number ........................................ 10-11
Engine specifications.......................................... 10-9
High temperature warning light ....................... 2-18
If your vehicle overheats .................................... 6-11
Starting the engine ............................................. 5-13
Event Data Recorders (EDR) ............................... 10-22
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ............................... 5-2
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ....... 9-5
Extended storage fuse warning ................................ 2-9

F
E
Economy, Fuel ............................................................. 5-29
Elapsed time .................................................... 2-13, 2-30
Electric power steering ............................................. 5-34
Electric power steering warning light.................... 2-17
Emission control information label ...................... 10-12
Emission control system maintenance .................... 9-8
Emission control system warranty ....................... 10-20
Engine
Before starting the engine ................................ 5-12
Break-in schedule................................................ 5-27

11-2

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label............ 10-12
Filter
Air cleaner housing filter .................................... 8-14
Changing engine oil and filter ............................. 8-6
Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch) ...... 6-2
Flat tire ............................................................................ 6-3
Flat towing................................................................. 10-18
Floor mat cleaning........................................................ 7-5
Fluid
Brake and clutch fluid ........................................... 8-9

Capacities and
recommended fluids/lubricants ........................ 10-2
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) fluid ................................................................ 8-8
Engine coolant ........................................................ 8-4
Engine oil .................................................................. 8-5
Window washer fluid............................................. 8-9
FM-AM radio with Compact Disc (CD) player .... 4-45
FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc (CD)
player (Type A) ............................................................ 4-53
FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc (CD)
player (Type B) ............................................................ 4-62
Fog light switch .......................................................... 2-44
Front manual seat adjustment ................................... 1-3
Front passenger air bag and status light ............. 1-46
Front seat, Front seat adjustment ............................ 1-3
Front-seat active head restraints .............................. 1-9
Fuel
Capacities and
recommended fluids/lubricants ........................ 10-2
Distance to empty ............................................... 2-13
Fuel economy ....................................................... 5-29
Fuel information.................................................... 10-4
Fuel octane rating ............................................... 10-4
Fuel-filler cap ........................................................ 3-18
Fuel-filler door ...................................................... 3-18
Gauge..................................................................... 2-11
Fuel Efficient Driving Tips ........................................ 5-28
Fuses ............................................................................. 8-17
Fusible links ................................................................. 8-18

G
Gas cap ........................................................................ 3-18
Gauge.............................................................................. 2-5
Engine coolant temperature gauge ................ 2-10
Fuel gauge ............................................................ 2-11

Odometer ................................................................. 2-7
Speedometer ........................................................... 2-7
Tachometer............................................................... 2-9
Trip computer ....................................................... 2-13
General maintenance .................................................. 9-2
Giving voice commands ........................................... 4-97
Glove box ..................................................................... 2-48

H
Hazard warning flasher switch .................................. 6-2
Head restraints/headrests .......................................... 1-5
Headlights
Bulb replacement ................................................ 8-23
Headlight switch .................................................. 2-40
Xenon headlights ................................................. 2-39
Heated seats ............................................................... 2-45
Heater
Engine block heater ............................................ 5-40
Heater and air conditioner operation ............. 4-28
Help voice commands ........................................... 4-100
High temperature warning light .............................. 2-18
Hood release ............................................................... 3-15
Horn ............................................................................... 2-44
How to say numbers ................................................. 4-98
How to use brightness control button .................... 4-8
How to use the APPS·i button ................................. 4-5
How to use the back button ..................................... 4-5
How to use the CAMERA button ............................ 4-8
How to use the ON·OFF button/Volume
control knob ................................................................... 4-8

I
Ignition switch ............................................................... 5-9
Immobilizer system ..................................................... 2-34
In-cabin microfilter...................................................... 4-35

Indicator lights ............................................................. 2-21
Inside mirror ................................................................. 3-21
Inspection/maintenance (I/M) test....................... 10-21
Instrument brightness control.................................. 2-43
Instrument panel ........................................................... 2-4
Integrated control system ............................. 2-24, 5-21
Intelligent Key system .................................................. 3-6
Intelligent Key system warning light ............... 2-18
Key operating range .............................................. 3-8
Key operation........................................................... 3-9
P position selecting warning light ................... 2-20
Remote keyless operation ................................. 3-12
Interior light replacement .......................................... 8-26
Interior lights ................................................................ 2-54
iPod player operation .............................................. 4-68
ISOFIX child restraint ................................................ 1-20

J
Jump starting ................................................................. 6-9

K
Keyless entry
With Intelligent Key system (See Intelligent
Key system) .......................................................... 3-12
Keys ................................................................................. 3-2
For Intelligent Key system .................................... 3-6

L
Labels
Air bag warning labels ....................................... 1-54
Air conditioner specification label ................. 10-13
Emission control information label ................ 10-12
Engine serial number ........................................ 10-11
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label...... 10-12

Tire and Loading information label .... 8-30, 10-12
Vehicle identification number (VIN) .............. 10-11
LATCH system ............................................................ 1-20
License plate, Installing front license plate ....... 10-13
Liftgate .......................................................................... 3-16
Light
Air bag warning light .......................................... 1-54
Bulb replacement ................................................ 8-23
Fog light switch ................................................... 2-44
Headlight switch .................................................. 2-40
Headlights bulb replacement ........................... 8-23
Indicator lights ...................................................... 2-21
Interior lights ......................................................... 2-54
Map lights .............................................................. 2-54
Replacement ......................................................... 8-23
Warning/indicator lights and
audible reminders ................................................ 2-16
Xenon headlights ................................................. 2-39
Lights, Exterior and interior light replacement .... 8-26
Loading information (See vehicle
loading information) ................................................ 10-15
Lock
Automatic door locks ............................................ 3-5
Door locks ................................................................ 3-4
Liftgate lock .......................................................... 3-16
Power door lock ..................................................... 3-4
Loose fuel cap warning ................................... 2-8, 3-19
Low fuel warning light ............................................... 2-18
Low tire pressure warning light .............................. 2-18
Low tire pressure warning system (See tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)) ..................... 5-3

M
Maintenance
Battery .................................................................... 8-10
General maintenance ............................................ 9-2

11-3

Inside the vehicle .................................................... 9-3
Maintenance log .................................................. 9-15
Maintenance precautions ..................................... 8-2
Maintenance requirements ................................... 9-2
Maintenance schedules ........................................ 9-7
Maintenance under severe
driving conditions ................................................ 9-14
Outside the vehicle ................................................ 9-2
Seat belt maintenance ....................................... 1-15
Standard maintenance .......................................... 9-7
Maintenance schedules .............................................. 9-7
Making a call................................................................ 4-92
Malfunction indicator light (MIL) ............................. 2-22
Manual air conditioner ............................................... 4-29
Manual front seat adjustment .................................... 1-3
Map lights ..................................................................... 2-54
Mechanical key (Intelligent Key system) ................. 3-3
Meter
Trip computer ....................................................... 2-13
Meters and gauges ...................................................... 2-5
Instrument brightness control........................... 2-43
Mirror
Inside mirror .......................................................... 3-21
Outside mirrors .................................................... 3-22
Vanity mirror .......................................................... 3-23
Monitor, RearView Monitor ........................................ 4-8
Moonroof ...................................................................... 2-52
Moving Object Detection (MOD) ........................... 4-24

N
Navigation system voice commands .....................
New vehicle break-in .................................................
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ....................
NISSAN Voice Recognition System ......................
NissanConnect App smartphone integration ......

11-4

4-99
5-27
2-34
4-96
4-75

O
Odometer ....................................................................... 2-7
Off-road recovery ......................................................... 5-6
Oil
Capacities and
recommended fluids/lubricants ........................ 10-2
Changing engine oil and filter ............................. 8-6
Checking engine oil level ..................................... 8-5
Engine oil .................................................................. 8-5
Engine oil viscosity.............................................. 10-8
One Shot Call ............................................................. 4-91
Outside air temperature display.............................. 2-12
Outside mirrors ........................................................... 3-22
Overheat, If your vehicle overheats ....................... 6-11
Owner’s Manual/Service Manual
order information...................................................... 10-22

P
Panic alarm .................................................................. 3-13
Parking
Brake break-in ...................................................... 5-35
Parking brake operation ..................................... 5-25
Parking on hills ..................................................... 5-33
Phone
Car phone or CB radio ...................................... 4-80
Phone settings ............................................................ 4-96
Power
Electric power steering ...................................... 5-34
Moonroof ............................................................... 2-52
Power door lock ..................................................... 3-4
Power outlet.......................................................... 2-46
Power windows.................................................... 2-50
Precautions
Audio operation.................................................... 4-35
Braking precautions ............................................ 5-35

Child restraints ..................................................... 1-19
Cruise control ....................................................... 5-26
Driving safety ........................................................... 5-7
Maintenance............................................................. 8-2
Seat belt usage.................................................... 1-10
Supplemental restraint system ......................... 1-38
When starting and driving.................................... 5-2
Push starting................................................................ 6-11
Push-button ignition switch ............................ 5-9, 5-10

R
Radio ............................................................................. 4-35
Car phone or CB radio ...................................... 4-80
Steering wheel audio controls ......................... 4-73
Rapid air pressure loss ............................................... 5-6
Readiness for inspection/maintenance
(I/M) test .................................................................... 10-21
Rear door lock, Child safety rear door lock .......... 3-6
Rear seats ...................................................................... 1-4
Rear window and outside mirror
defroster switch .......................................................... 2-38
Rear window wiper and washer switch ............... 2-37
RearView Monitor ......................................................... 4-8
Recorders, Event data............................................ 10-22
Registering in another country ............................. 10-10
Registering with NissanConnect App ................... 4-75
Remote keyless entry function, For Intelligent
Key system ................................................................... 3-12
Reporting safety defects ....................................... 10-20
Roadside assistance program................................... 6-2
Rollover ........................................................................... 5-6
Roof, Moonroof ........................................................... 2-53

S
Safety
Child seat belts .................................................... 1-16
Reporting safety defects ................................. 10-20
Seat adjustment
Front manual seat adjustment ............................. 1-3
Front seats ............................................................... 1-3
Seat belt(s)
Child safety ........................................................... 1-16
Infants ..................................................................... 1-17
Injured persons .................................................... 1-12
Larger children ..................................................... 1-17
Precautions on seat belt usage ....................... 1-10
Pregnant women.................................................. 1-12
Seat belt cleaning .................................................. 7-7
Seat belt extenders ............................................. 1-15
Seat belt hooks .................................................... 1-15
Seat belt maintenance ....................................... 1-15
Seat belt warning light ....................................... 2-20
Seat belts .............................................................. 1-10
Seat belts with pretensioners .......................... 1-52
Shoulder belt height adjustment ..................... 1-14
Small children ....................................................... 1-17
Three-point type .................................................. 1-12
Seat(s)
Heated seats ........................................................ 2-45
Seats.......................................................................... 1-2
Security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
System), Engine start ................................................ 2-34
Security system, Vehicle security system............. 2-33
Servicing air conditioner ........................................... 4-35
Setting climate eco .................................................... 4-34
Shift lever
Shift lock release ................................................. 5-18
Shift lock release
Transmission ......................................................... 5-18

Shifting
CVT (Continuously Variable Transmission) .... 5-14
Manual transmission ........................................... 5-19
Shoulder belt height adjustment, For
front seats .................................................................... 1-14
Siri Eyes Free ............................................................ 4-76
SOURCE select switch ............................................ 4-73
Spare tire .......................................................... 8-41, 10-9
Spark plugs .................................................................. 8-13
Speedometer ................................................................. 2-7
Standard maintenance ................................................ 9-7
Starting
Before starting the engine ................................ 5-12
Jump starting ........................................................... 6-9
Precautions when starting and driving ............. 5-2
Push starting......................................................... 6-11
Starting the engine ............................................. 5-13
Status light, Front passenger air bag.................... 1-46
Steering
Electric power steering ...................................... 5-34
Steering wheel switch for audio controls ..... 4-73
Tilting steering column ....................................... 3-20
Storage ......................................................................... 2-47
Sun visors..................................................................... 3-21
Supplemental air bag warning labels .................... 1-54
Supplemental air bag warning light ........... 1-54, 2-20
Supplemental restraint system ................................ 1-38
Precautions on supplemental
restraint system .................................................... 1-38
Switch
Audio control steering wheel switch .............. 4-73
Autolight switch ................................................... 2-40
Fog light switch ................................................... 2-44
Hazard warning flasher switch ............................ 6-2
Headlight switch .................................................. 2-40
Power door lock switch ........................................ 3-5

Rear window and outside mirror
defroster switch ................................................... 2-38
Turn signal switch................................................ 2-43
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch .... 2-44

T
Tachometer..................................................................... 2-9
Temperature display ................................................... 2-12
Temperature gauge, Engine coolant
temperature gauge ..................................................... 2-10
Text messaging ........................................................... 4-93
Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System),
Engine start .................................................................. 2-34
Three-way catalyst ....................................................... 5-3
Tilt steering column.................................................... 3-20
Tire pressure, Low tire pressure warning light .... 2-18
Tires
Flat tire ...................................................................... 6-3
Low tire pressure warning system ..................... 5-3
Tire and Loading information label .... 8-30, 10-12
Tire chains ............................................................. 8-37
Tire dressing ............................................................ 7-4
Tire pressure ......................................................... 8-28
Tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) .............................................. 5-3, 6-3
Tire rotation ........................................................... 8-38
Types of tires ........................................................ 8-36
Uniform tire quality grading............................. 10-19
Wheel/tire size ..................................................... 10-9
Wheels and tires ................................................. 8-28
Tonneau cover (see cargo cover) .......................... 2-49
Touch screen ................................................................. 4-4
Towing
Flat towing........................................................... 10-18
Tow truck towing ................................................. 6-13
Towing a trailer................................................... 10-18

11-5

TPMS, Tire pressure monitoring system ................ 5-3
TPMS, Tire pressure warning system ..................... 6-3
Trailer towing ............................................................ 10-18
Transmission
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) fluid ................................................................ 8-8
Driving with CVT (Continuously
Variable Transmission) ....................................... 5-14
Driving with manual transmission .................... 5-19
Transmission shift lever lock release .............. 5-18
Transmitter, With Intelligent Key system
(See Intelligent Key system) .................................... 3-12
Traveling or registering in another country........ 10-10
Trip computer .............................................................. 2-13
Turn signal switch....................................................... 2-43

U
Underbody cleaning ..................................................... 7-3
Uniform tire quality grading................................... 10-19
USB (Universal Serial Bus)
connection port ............................................... 4-57, 4-67

V
Vanity mirror ................................................................. 3-23
Variable voltage control system .............................. 8-12
Vehicle
Dimensions and weights ................................. 10-10
Identification number (VIN) ............................. 10-11
Information display.................................... 2-11, 2-12
Loading information .......................................... 10-15
Recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) .................. 6-15
Security system.................................................... 2-33
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch .... 2-44
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system ......... 5-37
Ventilators ..................................................................... 4-27

11-6

Voice command .......................................................... 4-91
Voice Prompt Interrupt .............................................. 4-91

W
Warning
Hazard warning flasher switch ............................ 6-2
Lights ...................................................................... 2-16
Tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) .............................................. 5-3, 6-3
Warning lights, indicator lights and
audible reminders ................................................ 2-15
Warning labels, Air bag warning labels ................ 1-54
Warning light
Air bag warning light ............................... 1-54, 2-20
Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
warning light ......................................................... 2-16
AWD warning light.............................................. 5-31
Brake warning light ............................................. 2-16
Door open warning light .................................... 2-17
Electric power steering warning light............. 2-17
Intelligent Key system warning light ............... 2-18
Low fuel warning light ........................................ 2-18
Low tire pressure warning light ....................... 2-18
Seat belt warning light ....................................... 2-20
Warranty, Emission control system warranty.... 10-20
Washer switch
Rear window wiper and washer switch ........ 2-37
Wiper and washer switch ................................. 2-36
Washing .......................................................................... 7-2
Waxing ............................................................................ 7-3
Weights (See dimensions and weights) ........... 10-10
Wheel/tire size ............................................................ 10-9
Wheels and tires ........................................................ 8-28
Care of wheels ........................................................ 7-4
Cleaning aluminum alloy wheels......................... 7-4
Window washer fluid................................................... 8-9

Window(s)
Cleaning .................................................................... 7-3
Power windows.................................................... 2-50
Wiper
Rear window wiper and washer switch ........ 2-37
Rear window wiper blade ................................. 8-16
Wiper and washer switch ................................. 2-36
Wiper blades ........................................................ 8-15
Wiper and washer switch ........................................ 2-36

X
Xenon headlights ........................................................ 2-39

MEMO

11-7

GAS STATION INFORMATION

FUEL INFORMATION:
Except for NISMO RS models:
NISSAN recommends the use of unleaded
premium gasoline with an octane rating of at
least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 96).
If unleaded premium gasoline is not available,
you may use unleaded regular gasoline with an
octane rating of at least 87 AKI number
(Research octane number 91), but you may
notice a decrease in performance.

Use unleaded premium gasoline for maximum vehicle performance.

CAUTION
.

For NISMO RS models:
Use unleaded premium gasoline with an octane
rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index)
number (Research octane number 96).

If unleaded premium gasoline is not available,
unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating
of at least 87 AKI number (Research octane
number 91) may be temporarily used, but only
under the following precautions:
.

Have the
unleaded
unleaded
possible.
Avoid full
eration.

fuel tank filled only partially with
regular gasoline, and fill up with
premium gasoline as soon as
throttle driving and abrupt accel-

and black label with the common
abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region.

Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also
affect warranty coverage.
Under no circumstances should a
leaded gasoline be used, because
this will damage the three-way catalyst.
Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your
vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed
to run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E15 or E-85 fuel in a vehicle not
specifically designed for E-15 or E85 fuel can adversely affect the
emission control devices and systems of the vehicle. Damage caused
by such fuel is not covered by the
NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.
U.S. government regulations require
ethanol dispensing pumps to be
identified by a small, square, orange

For additional information, see “Capacities and
recommended fluids/lubricants” (P.10-2).

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:
For NISMO RS models:
. Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 5W-30 SN”
Except for NISMO RS models:
. Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 0W-20 SN”
See “Capacities and recommended fluids/lubricants” (P.10-2) for engine oil and oil filter
recommendation.

COLD TIRE PRESSURES:
The label is typically located on the driver side
center pillar. For additional information, see
“Wheels and tires” (P.8-28).

NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCEDURES RECOMMENDATION:
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of
vehicle use, follow the recommendations outlined in the “Break-in schedule” (P.5-27) of this
Owner’s Manual. Follow these recommendations for the future reliability and economy of
your new vehicle.

Printing : August 2016 (34)
OM17E0 0F15U0
Publication No.: OM15E0
0F15U0
Printed in U.S.A.
TOOUM-3PU0D

F15-D

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Create Date                     : 2016:09:21 15:19:48-04:00
Keywords                        : nissan;, juke;, 2017;, owner, manual;, owner, guide;, owner’s, manual;, pdf;, vehicle, manual;, maintenance;, service
Modify Date                     : 2016:11:28 09:26:37-06:00
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c005 78.147326, 2012/08/23-13:03:03
Metadata Date                   : 2016:11:28 09:26:37-06:00
Creator Tool                    : PDFL 7.0
Document ID                     : uuid:E340CF572980E6119EF5A940CE06A44F
Instance ID                     : uuid:d0d814d6-5231-42b7-a612-2f9478b29423
Derived From Instance ID        : uuid:b5d0e403-1118-490b-855a-5574113eb4ca
Derived From Document ID        : uuid:425d1b14-b705-42f0-8d75-05bca942805c
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : 2017 Nissan Juke | Owner's Manual and Maintenance Information | Nissan USA
Description                     : Download the 2017 Nissan Juke Owner's Manual at the official Nissan USA website.
Creator                         : 
Subject                         : nissan, juke, 2017, owner manual, owner guide, owner’s manual, pdf, vehicle manual, maintenance, service
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 10.1.16 (Windows)
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 416

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

2017 Nissan Juke | Owner's Manual And Maintenance Information USA

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation